Panasonic” x-v Mama= Digital Business System Section 400 Programming 1 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com J I I Iss ued 8/l I I95 Dot. Part No. 7Ll3182A2IDJ The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice and do not constitute a commitment on the part of Panasonic Communications & Systems Company (PCSC). Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document. However, due to ongoing product improvements and revisions, Panasonic cannot guarantee the accuracy of printed material after the date of publication nor can it accept responsibility for errors or omissions. Panasonic will update and revise this document as needed. The software and hardware described in this document may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the license pertaining to said software or hardware. Reproduction, publication, or duplication of this manual, or any part thereof, in any manner, mechanically, electronically, or photographically, is prohibited without permission of the Panasonic Communications & Systems Company (PCSC). @Copyright 1995 by Panasonic Communications dr Systems Company All rights reserved. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Section 400-Table of Contents About This Section Structure .......................................................................................................................... FF Key Programming ..................................................................................................... Program Sequence .......................................................................................................... xvii xvii xvii Introduction to DBS Programming Before You Begin ................................................................................................ Intro-3 Preparations for Programming ................................................................................... Inuo-3 Initializing DBS Systems (RAMCLR) ...................................................................... Intro-4 Upgrading CPC-B Software (New Function Reset) .................................................. Intro-5 Understanding FF Key Programming .............................................................. Intro-6 Program Structure ...................................................................................................... Intro-6 How to Enter the Programming Mode.. ..................................................................... Intro-7 Example Programming Entry .................................................................................... Intro-9 Default Program Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*.................... Intro-9 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Date and Time Settings ............................................................................................. 1-3 Day/Date Setting ............................................................................................................. Time Setting .................................................................................................................... l-3 l-4 General System Settings ............................................................................................ l-5 Call Duration Display ...................................................................................................... SMDR Display Start Tier for CO Calls ........................................................................ Least Cost Routing (LCR) Access ................................................................................... Override Toll Restriction With SSD Numbers ................................................................ SSD Display Restriction .................................................................................................. Auto Flash Redial .......................................................................................................... One Touch Dial .............................................................................................................. Onhook Transfer ............................................................................................................ Key Bank Hold .............................................................................................................. Non-Appearing Trunk Hold ........................................................................................... SLT Flash Control ......................................................................................................... Extension Number Digits ............................................................................................... DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com l-5 l-6 1-7 l-8 l-9 l-10 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-17 ... - III - Section 400-Programming Table of Contents Alternate Attendant ........................................................................................................ Attendant Intercom Calling ........................................................................................... Extension Intercom Calling ........................................................................................... Alert Tone for Voice Calls............................................................................................. Alert Tone for Busy Override & OHVA ....................................................................... System Installation Area Code ...................................................................................... SSD Name Display ........................................................................................................ APVAEC Slot Assignment ............................................................................................ Voice Mail Busy Tone ................................................................................................... Analog Transfer Ring Pattern ........................................................................................ Attendant Overflow for Primary Attendant.. ................................................................. Delayed Ring ................................................................................................................. AEC Disconnect Signal Duration.. ................................................................................ Second Attendant Position ............................................................................................. Third Attendant Position ................................................................................................ Fourth Attendant Position .............................................................................................. Attendant Transfer Extension ........................................................................................ Attendant Override ........................................................................................................ Attendant LED Alarm Indication .................................................................................. Extension (BLF) Delayed Ring ..................................................................................... Analog Transfer Ring Pattern ........................................................................................ Mu! tiple DID/DNIS ....................................................................................................... Page Duration ................................................................................................................ SLT DISA Ring Pattern ................................................................................................. AEC Disconnect Signal Duration .................................................................................. DID/DNIS to a Voice Mailbox ...................................................................................... DID/DNIS Answer Code ............................................................................................... LCD Timer for Caller ID ............................................................................................... Internal Hold Tone .......................................................................................................... Door Opener Access Code Required ............................................................................. API Port Type” ................................................................................................................ API Baud Rate ......................... .: .................................................................................... 1-18 1-19 I-20 1-21 l-22 l-23 l-24 l-2.5 l-26 l-27 l-28 l-29 l-30 1-31 l-32 l-33 l-34 l-35 l-36 l-37 l-38 1-39 1-41 1-32 l-43 l-44 l-46 1-48 l-49 l-50 1-51 1-52 Serial Port Parameters (TTY Settings) ................................................................... 1-53 Parity Check ................................................................................................................... Odd/Even Parity ............................................................................................................. Baud Rate ....................................................................................................................... Stop Bit Length .............................................................................................................. Data Length .................................................................................................................... SMDR Printing Mode 1: Outbound and Inbound .......................................................... SMDR Printing Mode 2: Long-Di stance and Local Calls ............................................. SMDR Printing Mode 3: Header Title.. ......................................................................... Serial Port Flow Control (XON / XOFF) ...................................................................... RAI Baud Rate ............................................................................................................... - iv - DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com l-53 1-54 l-55 l-56 l-57 l-58 l-59 l-60 1-61 1-62 DBS-70-400 Section 400~Programming Table of Contents PBX Settings .............................................................................................................. 1-63 PBX Access Code(s) ...................................................................................................... 1-63 Automatic Pause Position for PBX Access Codes ........................................................ l-64 External (UNA) Relay Control ................................................................................. l-66 Ring Patterns for UNA Terminals (M, C and B) ........................................................... l-66 External Page Interface Control for Paging Groups ...................................................... l-67 Class of Service ......................................................................................................... l-68 Extension Class of Service ............................................................................................ l-68 ........................................................................................................... Account Codes l-70 Verified Forced Account Codes ................................................................................... l-70 Toll Restriction for Verified Forced Account Codes..................................................... l-72 Flexible Function Screens ........................................................................................ l-73 Flexible Function Screen Soft-Key Assignment ........................................................... Flexible Function Screen Text.. ..................................................................................... Flexible Function Screen Default .................................................................................. Flexible Function Screens Default (All) ........................................................................ l-73 1-78 l-79 I-80 Caller ID Automatic DISA ....................................................................................... i-81 Automatic DISA Callers.. .............................................................................................. 1-8 1 Door Phones .............................................................................................................. 1-82 Door Phone Extensions .................................................................................................. 1-82 Door Phone Ring Assignments.. .................................................................................... l-84 Door Opener Access Code ............................................................................................. 1-86 Door Phone Tone Type.. ................................................................................................ l-87 Door Phone Ring Timeout Timer .................................................................................. 1-88 Door Phone Ring Pattern ............................................................................................... l-89 Door Opener Relay Timer ............................................................................................. l-90 System Timers ............................................................................................................ 1-91 Automatic Night Mode Start Time ................................................................................ 1-91 Attendant Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls ................................................................... 1-93 Extension Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls ................................................................... 1-94 Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls .............................................................. 1-95 Extension Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls ............................................................. l-96 Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer ............................................................................. 1-97 Extension Hunt Group Recall Timer ............................................................................. 1-98 Attendant Park Hold Recall Timer ................................................................................ 1-99 Extension Park Hold Recall Timer ........................................... . .................................. I- 100 Attendant Call Reversion Timer for CO Calls............................................................. l-101 Unsupervised Conference Timer ................................................................................. l-102 Automatic Pause Timer ............................................................................................... l-103 DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com -V- 3ec;w I 4uu-rrogrammlng CO Flash Timer ........................................................................................................... SLT Onhook Flash Timer ............................................................................................ CO Ring Cycle Detection Timer ................................................................................. Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer ........................................................................ Dial Pause Timer ......................................................................................................... PBX Flash Timer ......................................................................................................... Call Forward-No Answer Timer .................................................................................. Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer .................................................................... Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer ....................................................................... Attendant Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls ........................................................ Extension Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls ........................................................ Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Calls ................................................... Extension Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Calls................................................... CO Delayed Ring Timer .............................................................................................. Extension (DSQBLF) Delayed Ring Timer ................................................................ Hunt Group No Answer Timer .................................................................................... Automatic Day Mode Start Time.. ............................................................................... Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time ........................................................................... l-104 l- 106 l-107 l-108 l- 109 l-110 l-111 l-l 12 1-113 1-114 1-115 1-116 1-117 1-118 l-120 1-122 1-123 1-125 Programming and DISA Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127 Remote Programming ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISA Inbound Call ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID Code for System Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127 1-128 1-129 l-130 1-131 New Function Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-132 New Function Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Confirm New Function Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-132 1-132 DID/DNIS and Tl Settings ..................................................................................... 1-133 Inbound DID Dial Numbers ........................................................................................ System Configuration .................................................................................................. Sync Source 1 .............................................................................................................. Sync Source 2 .............................................................................................................. Sync Source 3 .............................................................................................................. Network Re-Sync Timer .............................................................................................. Disconnect Timer .......................................................................................................... Guard Timer ................................................................................................................. Release Acknowledge Timer ....................................................................................... Outpulse Delay Timer.................................................................................................. Wink Timeout Timer ................................................................................................... Incoming Detection Timer ........................................................................................... Answer Supervision Timer .......................................................................................... Immediate Glare Timer ................................................................................................ - vi - DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 1-133 1-135 1-141 1-143 1-144 1-145 1-146 1-147 1-148 1-149 l-150 1-151 1-152 1-153 DBS-70-400 Wink Glare Timer.. ...................................................................................................... l-154 Digital Pad Settings ..................................................................................................... Trunk Configuration .................................................................................................... Number of Tl Channels.. ............................................................................................. Frame Format ............................................................................................................... Line Coding ................................................................................................................. Failure Mode ................................................................................................................ Remote Loopback ........................................................................................................ Yellow Alarm Send ..................................................................................................... Flash Key Operation .................................................................................................... Red Alarm Detection ................................................................................................... Yellow Alarm Detection .............................................................................................. Yellow Alarm Recovery .............................................................................................. Other Alarms Detection ............................................................................................... Other Alarms Recovery ............................................................................................... Frame Loss Counter ..................................................................................................... Slip Counter ................................................................................................................. Red Alarm Counter ...................................................................................................... Loss of Signal Counter ................................................................................................ Sync Loss Counter ....................................................................................................... Yellow Alarm Counter.. ............................................................................................... Yellow Alarm Relay .................................................................................................... Red Alarm Relay ......................................................................................................... l-155 l- 158 I-159 l-160 1-161 1-162 1-163 l-164 1-165 1-166 1-167 l-169 l-171 l-i73 1-174 l-175 1-176 1-177 1-178 . l-179 l-180 l-181 Sync Loss Relay.. ........................................ . ................................................................ I- 182 Frame Loss Relay ........................................................................................................ AIS Relay ..................................................................................................................... Relay Reset .................................................................................................................. Tl Trunk Type Emulation ........................................................................................... DID/DNIS .................................................................................................................... Outgoing Signaling Type ............................................................................................. Incoming Signaling Type.. ........................................................................................... Trunk Mode ................................................................................................................. Robbed Bit Setting ....................................................................................................... Incoming Dialing Method ............................................................................................ Dial Tone Transmission ............................................................................................... Busy Tone Transmission ............................................................................................. Dial Tone Receive ....................................................................................................... Ringback Tone Transmission ...................................................................................... DNIS Number Setting.. ................................................................................................ DID/DNTS Flexible Ringing Assignments .................................................................. Tl Trunk Closure ......................................................................................................... DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 1-183 1-184 l-185 l-186 1-187 1-188 l-189 l-190 l-191 1-192 l-193 1-194 l-195 1-196 1-197 1-198 l-200 - vii - Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2) Trunk Port Operation ....................................................................................................... DTMF/Pulse Dialing for Trunks ...................................................................................... Pooled Trunk Access for Group “9” ................................................................................ Pooled Trunk Access for Groups “8 l-86” ....................................................................... Trunk Port Type ............................................................................................................... DISA Auto Answer.. ........................................................................................................ Private Trunk Line ........................................................................................................... Automatic Pause for PBX Line ..................................................................................... Dial Tone Detection.. ..................................................................................................... Outbound DTMF Signal Duration for Auto-Dialed Digits ........................................... Unsupervised Trunk Conference ................................................................................... Inbound Ring Pattern ..................................................................................................... Trunk Disconnect Detection Timer ............................................................................... DISA Start Time ............................................................................................................ DISA End Time ............................................................................................................. . Trunk Circuit Type ........................................................................................................ . DID Immediate or Wink Start ....................................................................................... Wink Start Timer ........................................................................................................... Time Out for Dialed DID Digits.. .................................................................................. DID Interdigit Timeout .................................................................................................. . Trunk Port Class ............................................................................................................. 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 A 3-7 2-8 2-9 2- 10 2- 11 2-12 2- 13 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-17 2- 18 2-21 2-22 2-23 2-24 2-25 Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Extension Numbers .......................................................................................................... Terminal Type.. ................................................................................................................ EM/24 Port Assignment................................................................................................... Forced Least Cost Routing ............................................................................................... Forced Account Codes.. ................................................................................................... Extension Lockout Code................................................................................................ Offhook Signal (CO) ..................................................................................................... Call Waiting/OHVA ...................................................................................................... Busy Override Send ....................................................................................................... Busy Override Receive .................................................................................................. Prime Line Pickup ......................................................................................................... Auto Pickup (Ringing Line) .......................................................................................... Unsupervised Conference .............................................................................................. Station Message Detail Recorder (SMDR) Report ........................................................ Offhook Signal Volume ................................................................................................. Offhook Signal Pattern .................................................................................................. PSD Name Display on Large-Sized LCD Phones ......................................................... ... - VIII - DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 3-3 3-5 3-7 3-8 3-9 . 3-10 3-11 3- 12 3-13 3-14 3- 15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 DBS-70-400 . --W..“.. I-- . “J’U” . . . . . . . J --.- -. -1....,...w Page Group Extensions.. ................................................................................................ Display When Idle ......................................................................................................... Display During Intercom Dial Tone .............................................................................. Display When Calling an Extension .............................................................................. Display When Accessing CO Dial Tone ....................................................................... Display When Conversing on a CO Trunk.. .................................................................. Display When Receiving a Page .................................................................................... Display After Receiving a Call Waiting Tone ............................................................... Display When Dialing a Busy Extension ...................................................................... Extension Directory Display.......................................................................................... Extension Class of Service Assignment ........................................................................ Inbound DID Dial Numbers .......................................................................................... AEC Disconnect ............................................................................................................ Ringback Tone From ML Keys ............................................. i.. ..................................... Station Port Class.. ......................................................................................................... SLT Hookflash ............................................................................................................... Extension Ring Pattern .................................................................................................. Digital SLT Receiving Volume ..................................................................................... Auto Set Relocation Code.............................................................................................. Permanent Call Forward Type ....................................................................................... Permanent Call Forward Extension ............................................................................... ML/MC0Separation ..................................................................................................... VAU Hunting Priority .................................................................................................... AEC Disconnect ............................................................................................................ VAU Port Assignment.. .................................................................................................. Hot Dial Pad.. .......................... ....................................................................................... Auto-Redial on Extensions ............................................................................................ 3-22 3-23 3-25 3-27 3-29 3-3 1 3-33 3-35 3-37 3-39 3-40 3-41 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-45 3-46 3-48 3-49 3-51 3-52 3-53 3-54 3-55 3-56 3-57 3-58 Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) CO Day Ring Assignments .............................................................................................. 4-3 CO Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups .................................................................. 4-4 CO Night Ring Assignments ........................................................................................... 4-5 CO Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups.. .............................................................. 4-6 Hunt Group Pilot Numbers .............................................................................................. 4-7 Terminal/Circular Hunt Groups ....................................................................................... 4-9 Hunt Group Type ........................................................................................................... 4-11 Call Next Hunt Group .................................................................................................... 4-13 Hunt Group Members .................................................................................................... 4-14 Transfer Extension ......................................................................................................... 4-15 Hunt Group Transfer Timer.. ......................................................................................... 4- 16 Hunt Group Members .................................................................................................... 4-17 Call Coverage Group Members ..................................................................................... 4-18 DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com - ix - CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments ............................................................................. CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups .................................................. CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments ........................................................................... CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups ................................................ Extension Ring Table ..................................................................................................... Extension Delayed Ring Table ...................................................................................... CO Night 2 Ring Assignments ...................................................................................... CO Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups ........................................................... CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments ........................................................................ CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups............................................. 4-20 4-2 1 4-22 4-23 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-30 Chapter 5. FF Key Programming (FF5) FF Key Assignments for Extensions ............................................................................... 5-3 FF Key Assignments for DSS Consoles .......................................................................... 5-8 Attendant Feature Package Key Assignments ............................................................... 5-10 Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6) General Notes .................................................................................................................. Extension Name ............................................................................................................... System Speed Dial Names ............................................................................................... . Personal Speed Dial Names ............................................................................................. Absence Messages ........................................................................................................... Trunk Name Assignment ................................................................................................. Hunt Group Name Assignment.. ............... . ...................................................................... Call Waiting/OHVA Text Reply ................................................................................... DID/DNIS Text Name Assignment ............................................................................... Chapter 7. Toll Restrictions (FF7) 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 . An Overview of Toll Restrictions .................................................................................... 7-2 International Calling For TRS Types 3-6 ........................................................................ 7-5 DTMF Signaling During Incoming Calls for TRS Types O-6 ......................................... 7-6 Maximum Dialed Digits For TRS Types 3-6 .................................................................. 7-7 3-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6.. .................................................................. 7-8 7-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6.. .................................................................. 7-9 Dialing Plan Switch ....................................................................................................... 7-10 Operator Access ............................................................................................................. 7-11 International Calling on Extensions ............................................................................... 7-12 -X- DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Table of Contents Section 400-Programming Country Code Table.. ......................................................................... .:. ......................... 7- 13 Equal Access Code Format............................................................................................ 7-14 Office Code Restriction Table For TRS Types 2-6 ....................................................... 7-15 Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 ............................................................................ 7-16 Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6.......................................................................... 7- 17 Special Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 ............................................................... 7- 18 Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 ............................................................. 7-19 Special 7-Digit Table For TRS Types 2-6.. ................................................................... 7-20 Day TRS Types O-7 for Trunks ..................................................................................... 7-2 1 Night TRS Types O-7 for Trunks.. ................................................................................. 7-22 Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy).................................................... 7-23 Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copyj ................................................. 7-24 Area & Office Code Table for TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy)..................................... .7-25 Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy). ................................... .7-26 Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) An Overview of Least Cost Routing ................................................................................ Before Programming LCR.......................................................................................... LCR Setup ................................................................................................................... Activating LCR ........................................................................................................... LCR Call Processing ................................................................................................... Using LCR With a PBX System.. ............................................................................... LCR Area Codes .............................................................................................................. LCR Office Codes ......................................... . ................................................................. Special LCR Area Codes ................................................................................................. Special LCR Office Code Tables ..................................................................................... Time Priority Route Tables.. .......................................................................................... LCR Trunk Groups ........................................................................................................ LCR Delete Tables ......................................................................................................... LCR Add Tables ............................................................................................................ 8-3 8-3 8-2 8-4 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-S 8-9 8- 10 8- 12 S-13 8-14 Chapter 9. Copy Program Settings (FF9) Trunk Copy ...................................................................................................................... Extension Copy ................................................................................................................ FF Key Copy .................................................................................................................... DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 9-3 9-4 9-5 - xi - JGLLIUII wuu-riuyldlillliii~y Chapter IO. Speed Dial Programming (FFIO) System Speed Dial Numbers ......................................................................................... Personai Speed Dial Numbers ....................................................................................... IO-3 10-5 Appendix A. Large-Screen Displays Menu Screens During Different Call States (FF3 ExtPor# 26-33#) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Al thru A5 Appendix B. Terminal Programming Terminal Programming Through a Direct Connection.. .................................................. B- 1 Terminal Programming Through a CO or DISA Trunk .................................................. B-2 Terminal Programming Commands ................................................................................. B-2 Resuming SMDR or Bus Monitor Mode After Terminal Programming.. ....................... B-3 Section 400~Index - xii - DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 1 acie ot Lontents sectron 4owrrogrammlng List of Figures Figure 1. CPC memory clear switch ................................................................................. Intro-4 Figure 2. Phone keys used in programming mode ............................................................ Intro-7 Figure l-l. Sofi key numbering on large-display phones.. ................................................... I-73 Figure I-2. Example of a CO Ring Cycle and its Detection Timer .................................... I -I 07 Figure I-3. Trunk Closure Example in a DBS 96 (32~trunk system) .................................. I-200 Figure 5-I. FF key layout on a 34-button phone.. ................................................................. .5-4 Figure 5-2. FF key layout on an EM124 unit .......................................................................... 5-4 Figure 5-3. FF key layout on a DSSl72 console.. .................................................................. .5-9 Figure 6-I. Key layout of a DSSi72 console for text name assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com *.. - XIII - Section 400-Programming Table of Contents List of Tables Table I. DBS program structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intro-6 Table 2. Default program settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intro-9 . Table I-l. SLT Hookflash Control Settings.. ......................................................................... I-15 Table I-2. Analog Transfer Ring Patterns ............................................................................ I-38 Table l-3. AEC Disconnect Signal Duration values ............................................................. I-43 Table I-4. RAI Modem Card Compatibility .......................................................................... l-62 Table I-5. Class of Service features ...................................................................................... I-68 Table I-6. Feature codes for Flexible Function Screen soft keys ......................................... I-74 Table I-7. Door phone ring timer values.. .................................................... . ...................... I-88 Table l-8. Attendant Hold Recall Timer values for CO calls ............................................... I-93 Table I-9. Extension Hold Recall Timer values for CO calls ............................................... I-94 Table I-IO. Attendant Transfer Recall Timer values for CO calls.. ...................................... I-95 Table I-11. Extension Transfer Recall Timer values for CO calls.. ...................................... I-96 Table I-12. Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer values for CO calls .................................. I-97 Table I-13. Extension Hunt Group Recall Timer values for CO calls.. ................................ I-98 Table I-14. Attendant Park Hold Recall Timer values ......................................................... I-99 Table I - 15. Extension Park Hold Recall Timer values ....................................................... I-100 Table I-1 6. Attendant Call Reversion Timer values ........................................................... I-IOI Table I -I 7. Unsupervised Conference Timer values ........................................................... l-102 Table I-18. Automatic Pause Timer values.. ....................................................................... I-103 Table I -I 9. CO Flash Timer values .................................................................................... I-l 04 Table I-20. SLT Onhook Flash Timer values.. .................................................................... l-l 06 Table I-2 I. Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer values.. ................................................ I - IO8 Table I-22. Dial Pause Timer values .................................................................................. I-109 Table I-23. PBX Flash Timer values ................................................................................... I-110 Table I-24. Ring Control for Call Forward-No Answer Timer ............................................ l-111 Table I-25. Call Forward-No Answer Timer values ............................................................ I-111 Table l-26. Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer values .............................................. I -II2 Table I-27. Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer values ................................................. l-113 Table l-28. Attendant Hold Recall Timer values for intercom calls .................................... I-114 Table l-29. Extension Hold Recall Timer values for intercom calls .................................... l-11.5 Table I-30. Attendant Transfer Recall Timer values for intercom calls .............................. I-116 Table I-3 I. Extension Transfer Recall Timer values for intercom calls .............................. l-117 Table I-32. CO Delayed Ring Timer values ........................................................................ l-118 Table l-33. Extension Delayed Ring Timer values ............................................................. I-120 Table I-34. Hunt Group No Answer Timer values .............................................................. 1-122 Table l-35. System Configuration for Tl installation ......................................................... l-135 Table I-36. Minimum Tl programming.. ............................................................................ l-136 Table I-37. TI Disconnect Timer values ............................................................................. I-146 Table I-38. TI Guard Timer values .................................................................................... I-147 - xiv - DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 secrlon 4uwrrogrammlng Table I-39. Table l-40. Table l-41. Table I-42. Table I-43. Table I-44. Table l-45. Table l-46. Table I-47. Table l-48. Table I-49. Table l-50. Table I-51. Table I-52. Table I-53. Table 2 -1. Table 2-2. Table 2 -3. Table 2-4. Table 2 -5. Table 2-6. I ama OT c;ontenrs Release Acknowledge Timer values ................................................................. Outpulse Delay Timer values.. ......................................................................... Wink Timeout Timer values .......................... .; .................................................. Incoming Detection Timer values .................................................................... Answer Supervision Timer values.. .................................................................. Immediate Glare Timer values.. ....................................................................... Wink Glare Timer values.. ................................................................................ Digital Pad Settings - circuit types .................................................................. Digital Pad Settings - pad numbers and related dB levels .............................. Digital Pad Settings - default values ............................................................... Yellow Alarm Detection timer values.. ............................................................. Yellow Alarm Recovery timer values ............................................................... Other Alarms Detection timer values ............................................................... Other Alarms Recovery timer values ............................................................... DIDIDNIS Flexible Ring settings in diferent CPC-B versions ....................... I-148 l-149 I-150 I-151 I-152 l-153 I-154 l-155 I- 156 I-156 I-167 I - I69 l-171 I -I 73 I-l 98 Ring Patterns for inbound trunk calls.. ............................................................... .2 -I 4 Trunk Disconnect Detection Timer values ........................................................... 2-15 Wink Start Timer settings ........: ........................................................................... .2 -22 DID Dialed Digit Timer values ........................................................................... .2 -23 DID Interdigit Timer values.. .............................................................................. -2 -24 Trunk Port Class - circuit types ........................................................................... 2-25 Table 3-1. Terminal. Types ....................................................................................................... 3-5 Table 3-2. Sof key menus during idle mode ........................................................................ .3-23 Table 3-3. Soft key menus during intercom dial tone.. ......................................................... .3-25 Table 3-4. Soft key menus when calling an e.utension .......................................................... .3-2 7 Table 3-5. Soft key menus when accessing CO dial tone.. ................................................... .3-29 Table 3-6. Soft key menus during a trunk call.. ..................................................................... 3-3 I Table 3-7. Soft key menus when receiving a page.. ............................................................... 3-33 Table 3-8. Sofr key menus after receiving a call waiting tone .............................................. 3-35 Table 3-9. Soft key menus when dialing a busy exten.sion ................................................... .3-37 Table 3-10. Station Port Class - circuit types ....................................................................... 3-43 Table 3-11. Extension ring patterns ..................................................................................... .3-46 Table 5-I. Feature codes for FF key assignment ,...................................................:............... 5-5 Table 6-1. Preset Absence Messages O-4 ................................................................................ 6-6 Table 6-2. Default call waitinglOHVA text reply messages.. ................................................ 6-10 Table 7-I. Toll restriction types.. ............................................................................................. 7-2 Table 7-2. NANP changes ....................................................................................................... 7-3 Table 7-3. h4aximum number of dialed digits for TRS types 3-6 ............................................ 7-7 Table 7-4. Diferences between. old and new dialing plans ........................................ ..t ....... 7-10 DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com - xv - Table 8-1. Time Priority Route Table format.. ........................................................................ 8-3 Table 8-2. Time Priority Route Table format.. ...................................................................... 8-10 Table 8-3. LCR table ........................................................................ .;. .................................... 8-5 Table 8-4. LCR time periods and positions used ................................................................... S-11 Table 8-5. LCR trunk selection ............................................................................................. 8-13 Table 1 O-I. DSS key filnctions in System Speed Dial programming.. ................................... I O-4 Table IO-2. QSS key finctions in Personal Speed Dial programming ................................. IO-4 Table B-l. Terminal programming commands.. ...................................................................... B-2 Table B-2. Codes for switching SMDRIBus Monitor modes.. ................................................. B-3 - xvi - DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 ,About This Section This Section 400 is intended for use as a technical reference manual for DBS programming via the FF keys on a DBS key phone. (Other programming methods are described in Appendix B of this section.) Structure Section 400 is structured according to FF key numbering. For example, Chapter 1 covers FFl programs; Chapter 2 covers FF2 programs; and so on. The FF keys categorize the programs by subject -- each FF key represents a group of related programs as follows: Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 FFl -- System FF2 -- Trunks FF3 -- Extensions FF4 -- Ring Assignments & Hunt/Call Coverage Groups FF5 -- FF Key Features FF6 -- Displayed Names & Messages FF7 -- Toll Restriction FFS -- Least Cost Routing FFP -- Program Copy FFlO -- Speed Dial Numbers FF Key Programming FF key programming is accomplished by entering programming mode, then punching in each program’s address (press the FF key, then enter a string of numbers that are separated by the pound #key). The phone’s LCD display will show prompts while you are punching in the string, to guide you through the programming. Within each address string (usually at the end of it), you have a choice of numbers to press in order to set the program; the number you press determines the program setting. Once you’ve entered programming mode and punched in an FF key address, you do not have to keep pressing the FF key to go to the next [sequential] address -- the DBS will automatically display the next prompt after you set the fust one (or press # to accept the displayed setting). To jump to an address in another FF key, simply press that FF key while still in programming mode. Program Sequence Although FF key programming separates DBS programs into groups, it is important to note that the numerical sequence of the FF keys and the addresses within them, does not necessarily represent a logical progression for programming a particular feature or application. For example, some DID settings are in FFl (System), while others are in FF2 (Trunks), FF3 (Extensions) and FF6 (Names and Messages). In Section 400, each program explanation includes related information about the feature or application it affects (if any). Also, the forms in Section 450 of the DBS Manual provide a more concise view of programming DBS features. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com - xvii - . Introduction to DBS Programming This introduction provides an overview of DBS programming from a phone. For descriptions of other DBS programming methods. see Appendix B of this manual. The following table summarizes the topics contained in this introduction. DBS-70-400 Topic Page Before You Begin Preparations for Programming Initializing DBS Systems (RAMCLR) Upgrading CPC-B Software (New Function Reset) Understanding FF Key Programming Program Structure How to Enter the Programming Mode Example Programming Entry Default Program Settings Intro-3 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com IllUO-3 Intro-4 Intro-5 Intro-6 Intro-6 Intro-7 Intro-9 Intro-9 Intro-l Intro-2 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70400 Introduction to DES Programming Section 400~Programming Before You Begin This section describes preparations that should be completed before you start programming. If you are familiar with FF key programming for DBS systems, you may begin programming as soon as these preparations have been made. If you are new to DBS programming, be sure to read “Understanding FF Key Programming” on page Intro-5 before you begin. Preparations for Programming Prior to programming the DBS system, make sure you have completed the following steps: 1. Confirm that the DBS features meet customer requirements. See Section 700-Feature Operation for DBS feature descriptions. 2. Confirm that you have the DBS hardware required for the end user. See Section 300-Installation for details. 3. Use Forms and Tables (Section 450) to record the customer’s site data. Use the following guidelines when completing Forms and Tables: l l l Be sure to record all program entries. Leave the default values for equipment that is not connected. Pay careful attention to program items that require a power-down to take effect. Be sure to complete the necessary programming in these areas before you make the system operational. 4. To program a new DBS system, you must first initialize the software to default values (see “Initializing DBS Systems”, next page). If you are performing an upgrade and the system is using a CPC-B card, you must first perform the New Function Reset procedure (see “Upgrading CPC-B Softtiare” on page Intro-5). Once these steps are completed, use the site data in Forms and Tables to program the system. D BS-70-400 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Intro-3 Initializing DBS Systems (RAMCLR) After installing a new DBS system, or when upgrading to Version 7.0, you must initialize the CPC (Central Processing Card) before programming the system. IMPORTANT: This procedure must be performed before you program the DBS system. Failure to initialize the CPC before programming may cause operational problems. The procedure described below re-initializes the entire DBS memory, and resets all programs to their default values. This means that all programs used, as well as features set on individual extensions, must be reprogrammed. If you have PCAS, you can download existing settings (thru CPC Version 4.0) and upload them to the new version. The new features introduced in CPC Versions 5.0 thru 6. lx. as well as the Permanent Call Forwarding feature, must be manually reprogrammed. 1. Power-off the DBS (set power switch to OFF). 2. Slide the CPC’s SW1 switch to “RAMCLR”. 3. Power-on the DBS. Wait until the bottom status LED on the CPC card stops flashing (this takes less than a minute). 4. Slide SW 1 back to “RAMHOLD”. 5. From any display phone, verify the software version by pressing ON/OFF. CONF 7777 Figure 1. T memory clear switch STATUS LED Intro-4 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Introduction to DBS Programming Section 400-Programming Upgrading CPC-B Software (New Function Reset) Perform the following procedure when upgrading CPC-B software to a new version. Exception: If upgrading to Version 7.0, the system must be initialized instead: see “‘Initializing DBS Systems (RAMCLR)“. previous page. IMPORTANT: Perform New Function Reset if upgrading to a new release -- from 5.0 to 6.0, for example. It is not necessary for a “point” release (e.g., from 5.0 to 5.2). New Function Reset clears unused registers and adds new programs, but retains all current DBS settings. If you are upgrading from a CPC-B version prior to 3.1, New Function Reset will also clear any existing DID numbers that are extension-based. 1. Power-off the DBS. Remove the CPC-B card. 2. Replace the existing EPROMs l-4 with new EPROMs. 3. Re-install the CPC-B card, then power the system back on. 4. If upgrading to a new release (e.g., from 5.0 to 6.0), perform New Function Reset as shown below: FFl 8# I# (0 or l)# t O=Do not perform New Function Reset. l=Perfonn New Function Reset. NOTE: If you enter “1” (to reset), the following displays: This is to confirm that you want to reset the data before the DBS actually performs the reset. Press one of the following: O=Do not complete the reset. l=Complete the reset. 5. Power-off the system, wait at least 3 seconds, then power it back on. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Intro-5 Introduction to DBS Programming Section 400-Programming Understanding FF Key Programming Program Structure Program entries for the DBS are organized into 10 primary groups, which are listed in Table 1 below. Each group has its own Flexible Function (FF) key on the phone. These keys can be identified by the LED on the left side of the key. On key telephones, the FF keys are numbered left-to-right, starting on the bottom row. After you enter the programming mode (see “How to Enter the Programming Mode”, next page), press the desired FE key to start programming the entries (“addresses”) of the group. The phone’s LCD display will prompt you through the addresses. Tuble 1. JIBS program structure FF Key FFl FF2 FF3 FF4 FF5 FF6 FF7 I FF8 FF9 FFlO Programming Group System settings CO Trunk settings Extension settings Ring Assignments and Hunt Groups FF Key Assignments 1 Names and Messages on LCD Display 1 Toll Restrictions (TRS) Least Cost Routing (LCR) Copy Program Settings 1 Speed-Dialing (system and personal) In the programming mode, some of the phone keys can be used to store your settings and move forward or backward through the program addresses. Figure 2 (next page) identifies these keys and what they do in programming mode. intro-6 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com D BS-70-400 Introduction to DES Programming Section 400-Programming ‘imrre 2. Phone kevs used in womamming mode CONF: Resets entry to default setting. VOL “: Moves backward to the previous programming level. FLASH: Stores your entry and moves backward (decrements port number in the same address; or decrements program address number). HOLD: Stores your entry and moves forward (increments port number in the same address; or increments program address number). *: Stores your entry and moves backward (decrements program address number). # : Stores your entry and moves forward (increments program address number). How to Enter the Programming Mode From the Atiendant port... Programming can be performed from an Attendant display phone. The phone connected to extension port 1, assigned extension number 100 is automatically the Primary Attendant phone. By default, extension port 2 (extension number 101) is the Second Attendant phone (although this extension assignment can be reprogrammed). Up to two other phones can also be programmed as Third and Fourth Attendant phones. Programming is also possible from other extensions (see ‘%rom a Non-Attendant Port”, next page). To enter the programming mode from any Attendant phone, press: ON/OFF PROG ## [desired FF key] DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Intro-7 introduction to DBS Programming Section 400-Programming Notes: l l Name settings can only be progammed from the Attendant phone or a DSS console connected to it. When you enter the programming mode on the Attendant phone -- and the DBS is set for only one Attendant -- the system will automatically change to the “Night” mode. After you exit the programming mode (by pressing ON/OFF), the system will return to the appropriate mode according to the system clock and the mode’s start time. From a non-Attendant port . . . When programming from a display phone other than an Attendant, press: ON/OFF #98 [NNNN] PROG ## [desired FF keyJ (where “[NW” is the programming authorization code -- “9999” by default) .i Notes: l l In CPC-A versions prior to 3.3, if a non-Attendant phone is used for programming, you must enter the programming authorization code twice -once to begin programming, and once to exit programming. Otherwise, other non-Attendant extensions cannot enter the programming mode. Beginning with CPC-A Version 3.3, and CPC-B versions, a non-Attendant phone only has to enter the authorization code once, to begin programming. As soon as programming is complete, any other nonAttendant phone can enter the programming mode. From the Test Terminal port . . . You can also program from a phone connr .:ted to the test terminal (CN3) of the main DBS cabinet: 1. Slide the SW1 switch on the cabinet to ‘Test” mode. This will provide a direct connection to ports 7 and 8 (if the DBS is already in service, make sure beforehand that placing ports 7 and 8 out of service is acceptable). ON/OFF #98 [NNNN] PROG ##### [desired.FF key] (where “[NNNNJ” is the programming authorization code -- “9999” by default) 2. Press: When you are finished programming, be sure to return SW1 to the “ST” position. Intro-8 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Introduction to DBS Programming Section 400-Programming Program Address Topic ITI 2# I# 5# ( 0 orl)# SSD Display Restriction FFl 2# 1# 6P ( 0 orl)# Auto Flash Redial FFl FFl FFl hi IFFi 2f 2# 2# 2Rc 2# 1P 18 l# iRc i# 7# (Oorl)# 8# (Oorl)# 9# (Oorlj# io# (Oorlj# li# (Oorl)# Extension Number Digits Alternate Attendant (CPWBpriorto2.0) Attendant Intercom Calling Extension Intercom Calling I Alert Tone for Voice Calls /Alert Tone for BUSY Override & OHVA System Installation Area Code SSD Name Display APVAEC Slot Assianment IVoice Mail Busy Tone Analog Transfer Ring Pattern FFl 2# l# 22# (l-15)# Attendant Overflow for Primary Attendant FFl 2# l# 23# (Oorl)# FFl 2# l# 23f (O-15)8 Delayed Ring (CPC-AIIIB) AEC Disconnect Signal Duration FFl FFl FFl FFl FFl FFl Second Attendant Position Third Attendant Position Fourth Attendant Position Attendant Transfer Extension Attendant Override Attendant LED Alarm Indication l# 24#(11-69orlOl-699)# l# 25#(11-69 or 101-699)# l# 26#(11-69orlOl-699)# l# 27#(11-69orlOl-699)P l# 28# (0 orlj# l# 29# (Oorlj# Page O(Display D B S dialed digits) 1 (REDIAL sends flash) 1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled) 0 I (Disabledj ! 11 &tern hold) 1 11 (Retrieves held I call) 1 (3 digits) 1 (Enabled) 1 (Voice) 1 (Voice) 1 (Enabled) 10 (Disabled) I 1 (1tArea) O(5 names) Noassianment IO (Silence) t OneTouch Dial OnhookTransfer Kev BankHold I /Non-Appearing Trunk Hold ISLT Flash Control FFl 2# l# 12# (Oorl)## FFl 2# l# 13# (Oorlj# FFl 2# l# 14f ( 0 orl)f FFl 2# l# 155 (0 orl)P FFl 2# l# 16# (Oorlj# IFFi 2# i# 17# (oar I)# FFI 2# l# 18# (Oorl)# FFl 2# l# 19# (Oorl)# FFl 2# l# 20# (2-9 or 2-18)# 1~~1 2# I# 21# (Oorl)# FF1.2# l# 22# .(O-6)f 2# 2# 2# 2# 2W 2# Default I - I l-9 l-10 l-11 1-12 1-13 1-14 1. ) l-15 1, l-17 l-18 1-19 l-20 1-21 l-22 l-23 l-24 l-25 l-26 1 (CPGA3.21 orhigher) (CPC-B 1.0 only) (CPC-A 3.3 or higher) (CPC-B 2.09thru 4.0with AFP) FFl 2# l# 30# (Oorl)# FFl 2# l# 31# (0-6)# Extension (BLF) Delayed Ring Analog Transfer Ring Pattern (CPC-Ail/B) FFl 2C l# 32# (Oorl)# FFl 2# l# 33# (0 orl)# FFl 2# l# 34# (Oorl)# Multiple DID/DNIS (CPC-84.0orhighcr) Page Duration SLT DISA Ring Pattern FFl 2# l# 35# (0-15j# AEC Disconnect Signal Duration Intro-l 0 DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 I l-31 1 (Enabled) 1 (can assign alarm) 0 (Disabled) 1 1-35 l-36 I 1 l-37 0 (Unlimited) O(1 secon/ 3 secoff) 0 (No signal sent) (CPC-All/B 5.0 or higher) Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Ext.11 or101 . l-41 1-42 1-43 DBS-70-400 0 Introduction to DBS Programming Section 400-Programming Program Address FFl 2# l# 36# (O-2)P FFl 2P l# 37# (6 char.)# Topic Default DID/DNIS to a Voice Mailbox 0 (No DIDIDNIS digits transmitted) None 1-44 0 (5 set) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Not required) 1-48 1-49 l-50 1-51 1-52 (CPC-8 6.0 or higher) DID/DNIS Answer Code Page (CPC-8 6.0 or higher) FFl 2t l# 38P (0-2)# FFl 28 1X 39# (0 or l)# FFl 2# If 4OP (0 or 1)P LCD Timer for Caller ID (CPC-AH/B 6.1 or higher) Internal Hold Tone (CPC-All/l3 7.0 or higher) Door Opener Access Code Required FFl 2# 1X (41 or 42)# 1X (0 or l)# FFl 2P l# (41 or 42)P 2f (0 or l)# API Port Type (CPCAWE 7.0 or higher) API Baud Rate (CPC-All/B 7.0 or higher) 0 (Standard API) 0 (9600 bps) Program Address 1 Topic IDefault l-46 (CPC-AWE 7.0 or higher) FFl:- *#,.2*!. ,8erid Port Parameters (TTY Settings) FFl FFl FFl hi FFl FFl 2# 2% 1Y (0 or l)# 2# 2f 2# (0 or l)# 28 2# 3# (l-4)# 2t 2# 4,dc ii-sir 2# 2# 51 (3 or 4)# 21 2# 6# (0 or l)# FFl 2# 2# 7# (0 or l)# FFl 2# 2# 8P (0 or l)# FFl 2# 2# 9# (0 or 1)X FFl 2# 2# lO# (0 or l)# 1-53 Parity Check l-53 1 (On) l-54 Odd/Even Parity 1 (Even) Baud Rate . I I 4 .19600 bos) I l-55 1 Stop Bit Length 11 (1 bit) 1 l-56 Data Length l-57 4 (8 bits) l,-58 SMDR Printing Mode 1: Outbound and Inbound 1 (Outbound and Inbound) l-59 SMDR Printing Mode 2: Long-Distance and 1 (Long-distance Local Calls and local) SMDR Printing Mode 3: Header Title 0 (No header l-60 titles) 1-61 Serial.Port Flow Control (XON / XOFF) 1 (No DBS flow control) l-62 RAI Baud Rate 0 (300 bps) 1-63 FFl, 2# 3#: PBX Settings FFl 2P 3f (l-8)1% (O-999 or o*-99ya FFl 2# 3P (9-18)# (l -3)# Page PBX Access Code(s) None 1-63 Automatic Pause Position for PBX Access Codes None l-64 1-66 FF1 2# d#z-.: Exknal (UNA) Relay Control FFl 28 4# 1Y (0 or 1)# Ring Patterns for UNA Terminals (M, C and B) FFl 2# 4# (2-9)Y (0 or l)# External Page Interface Control for Paging Grouts I,FFl- 2# 5#:. Class of Service ,’ FFl 2# 5P (l-8)# (l-21)W (0 or 1)# Extension Class of Service D BS-70-400 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 0 (1 set on/ l-66 3 set off) 0 (Internal paging l-67 onlv) 11-68 0 (All features disabled) 1-68 Intro-11 introduction to DBS Programming Program Address Section 400-Programming Topic Default P FFl 2# 6#: Account Codes None set 0 (TRS type 0 -intercom calls (CPGAIIB 6.0 or higher) Flexible Function Screen Soft-Key Assignment FFl 2# 7# 1# (2539)# (I-lO)# ICodeI# FFl 2# 7% 2# (2539)# (l-lO)# (Text)# Flexible Function Screen Text FFl 2# 7# 3# (2539)# (0 o r lI# Flexible Function Screen Default ’ FFl 2# 7# 4# i0 or 1 j# ~ (Flexible Function Screens Default (All) t-73 None 1-73 I None l-78 0 (Do not default)r , 1 - 7 9 (0 ~DO not default) 1 l-80 FFl 2# 8#: Caller ID Automatic DISA FFt 2# 9#: Door Phones FFl 2# 9# FFl 2# 9# (Oorl)# FFl 2# 9# FFl 2# 9% FFl 2# 9# FFl 2# 9# (l-4)% l# (3-144)# (l-4)# 2# (1-144)X (i-4)# (l-4)# (1-4)# (l-4)# 3# (OOOO-9999)f 4# (0 or l)# 5% (O-15)8 6# (0-5)# (CPGAIIIB 6.1 or higher) 1 Automatic DISA Callers (WC-AIVB 7.0 or higher) 1 Door Phone Extensions Door Phone Ring Assignments Door Opener Access Code Door Phone Tone Type Door Phone Ring Timeout Timer Door Phone Ring Pattern I-81 INone 1-81 .’ . : t-82 /No assignment 1 1-82 0 (Do not ring) 1-84 ’ 1~~1 2~ 9# (i-4)ry 7# (0-514~ 1 Door Opener Relay Timer 9999 1-86 0 (Slow chime1 l-87 3 (20 set) l-88 1 (4 set between 1-89 . rinas) I1 (Open for 4 secll l-90 I Program Address T o p i c Default - 3# 1# (OOOO-2359)# 3# 2# (0-12)# 3# 3# (0-12)# 3# 4# (0-12)# 3# 5# (0-12)# 3# 6# (O-12)t 3# 7# (0-12)# 3# 8# (O-12)# 3# 9# (o-l 2)~ 38 lO# (O-1 2)# 3# ll# (0-15)# 3# 12# IO-15)f 3# 13# (0-15)P 3# 14# (O-6)8 Intro-l 2 I I Page 1-h FFI 3#: System Timers FFl FFl FFl FFl FFl FFl FFl FFl 1~~1 FFl FFl FFl FFl FFl e l-70 1-72 FFI 2# ?#: Flexible Function Screens FFl 2# 8# (l-lO)# (PhoneNo.)# g l-70 FFl 2t 6# (l-1OO)P 1# (OOOl-9999)# Verified Forced Account Codes FFl 2# 6# (1 -lOO)# 2# (0-7)# Toll Restriction for Verified Forced Account Codes , a [Automatic Night Mode Start Time Attendant Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls Extension Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls Extension Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer Extension Hunt Group Recall Timer Attendant Park Hold Recall Timer 1 Extension Park Hold Recall Timer Attendant Call Reversion Timer for CO Calls Unsupervised Conference Timer Automatic Pause Timer CO Flash Timer SLT Onhook Flash Timer DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 1 Not set 1 (20 set) 7 (140 set) 1 (20 set) 7 (140 secl 1 (20 set) 7 (140 set) 1 (20 set) 17 (140 set) 1 9 (180 set) 2 (10 min) 7 (3.5 set) 9 (1 set) 4 (200 - 1500 ms) l-91 1-93 1-94 l-95 1-96 l-97 1-98 1-99 l-1001 l-101 l-102 l-103 l-104 I-106 DBS-70-400 ,’ Section 400-Programming Introduction to DES Programming Program Address Topic Default Page FFl FFl FF1 l~Fl FFl FFl CO Ring Cycle Detection Timer Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer i Dial Pause Timer 1 PBX Flash Timer Call Forward-No Answer Timer Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer 1 (6 set) l-107 3# 38 3X 3Rc 3f 3# 15# 16# 17# la# 19# 20# (O-3)# (0-15)# (O-15M ;o-lob (0-15)# (l -8)# FFl 3# 21# (l-8)# I * I7 (.I3 set) (CPC-8only) Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer (CPC-Bonly) 4 (4 set) FFl 3P 22# (0-12)# FFl 3# 23# fO-12)# 1~~1 3# 24# ;o-12k . , Attendant Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls I Extension Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls 1 Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom 11 (20 set) FFl 3# 25# (0-12)# FFl 3# 26# (O-15)8 Extension Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Calls CO Delayed Ring Timer 1 FF~ 7# (oooo-9999)# 1 ID Code for System Programming Program Address Topic I‘ ’ 7 (140 set) 2 (After 12 set) Default New Function Reset Confirm New Function Reset DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I / I l-117 1-118 Page l-132 FFl 8# I# and 2#: Neti Function Reset @PC-B only, 4.0 or higher) FF1 8# l# (0 or l)# FFl 8# 2# (0 or l)# I 1 1-116 0 (Do not reset) 0 (Do not complete reset) l-132 1-132 Intro-l 3 Introduction to DBS Programming Intio-14 Section 400-Programming DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com D BS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Introduction to DBS Programming 1~~1 8f 48 6# (i-64)1 7# (0 or l)# FFl 8# 4P 7# (0000-9999)# (lo-69 o r DNIS Number Settin FFl 8P 51 (0000-9999)# (lo-69 or 100-699)# (0000[00]-llll[ll])P r 6P (0000-9999)P (lo-69 o r DNIS Flexible Ringing Assignments 100-699)P (0000[00]-llll[ll])# FFl 8# 7# (1/2)# (l-4)# (1-8)# (0 or l)# Tl Trunk Closure disabled) 1100 or 111000 (Ringing enabled: Delayed ringing disabled) l-198 l-200 0 (Own) 1 Topic Default Page Program Address ., . . . .:. : .:.:.;. . .~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.: ._,.,.j,. .,.,. .:,:._ :,: :,:,: : ., ,:. ..,/,,,,,,, ..___..,,, :.......,..... . ,:.,:.:.:..: .:.:.:.:.,.:.:,.~. ~:.,:.:.:.:~~.:.:,~C.:,:,:.,~,:.,:.r, : :i:i:I:i: .:~~:: ‘: :~~:~: . : . : . : ‘ : . : : . : . : . : . ~ ~; ~ ~. ~ . ~ . ~ . : ~ : ~ : ~ ~: . ~ : : . : . : . ~ . : : ~~~~~~~~~~B~~~~~~:~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ,,...,( , ;:.:... ........‘. .:.:. ‘.:. .:,‘:~:~,. . . . . . . _. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. ., ., _, .,. . . .,., ,. ,. .,_: _,.,.,., ,.,i. . . . . . . . _. . . . . , .:. ,I. . . . .,.,. . . :,:.: . . . .:.:.:.:.: ... . . . . . . . . .:. . . IFF2 (l-64)# l# (0 or l)# /Trunk Port Operation DTMF/Pulse Dialing for Trunks Pooled Trunk Access for Group “9” 10 (In service) 0 (DTMF) 1 (Trunk is included) 1 2-3 2-4 2-5 Pooled Trunk Access for Groups “81-86” FF2 (1-64)X lO# (1 or 2)# FF2 (l-64)# ll# (0 or l)# FF2 (1-64)X 15# (l-3)# FF2 (l-64)P 16Y (0 or 1)# DBS-70-400 Outbound DTMF Signal Duration for Auto-Dialed 1 (75 ms on/ Dioits I 50 ms off) Unsupervised Trunk Conference 0 (Disabled on trunk) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I 2-l 2 2-13 Intro-l 5 Introduction to DBS Programming Section 400-Programming Program Address Topic Default Page :~ia:s~~~~~~~~~~~~~~, : ;: :;: :; .:.: :y.:.. . . . . . . i. . . . . ~. .~. . . . . . . . ....:. .~:.:.:i.:.~: .: .:;:~.~:~: : : : .~~~:~;,:.: ‘.~~:~:~: .,.:‘. ::., :~~~~~~~~ili:;:.:i:i:;:‘.ii.:::.i::i~~:, :.:. : . : . . ,. ,. . :. :.:. :. . . . . : . . . :, .: ;. ,::~~~~~~~~ . . . . . . . > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ::..:,.:. ........ ._. . . . . . ,. . . . . .~. . ,. . . .~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _.. .A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... . FF3 (l-l 44)k: I# (1 O-69 or 1 OO-699)# Extension Numbers . FF3 (I-144)# 17# (0 or l)# FF3 (l-144)P (Ia-25)# (0 or l)# FF3 ( l - l 44)# 26W (0-24/39)# lO/lOO (Port 1) 1lM0l (Port 2) . . . etc. Terminal Type 4 (34-button key phone) No assignment EM/24 Port Assignment Forced Least Cost Routing 0 (Disabled) Forced Account Codes 0 (Voluntary) Extension Lockout Code Not set 0 (Disabled) Offhook Signal (CO) 1 (Enabled for Primary Attendant only) 1 (Enabled) Call Waiting/OHVA Busy Override Send 0 (Disabled) Busy Override Receive 1 (Enabled) Prime Line Pickup 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled) Auto Pickup (Ringing Line) 0 (Disabled) Unsupervised Conference 1 (Extension is Station Message Detail Recorder (SMDR) included in Report SMDR report) Offhook Signal Volume 2 (Mid-level) Offhook Signal Pattern 0 (Repeated tone burst) PSD Name Display on Large-Sized LCD Phones 0 (5 PSD names) Page Group Extensions 0 (None) 0 (Prev. menu) Display When Idle Intio-16 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 FF3 (I-144)f 2# (I-48)# FF3 (l-144)# 3# (l-144)# FF3 (l-144)# 4# ( 0 o r I)# FF3 (1-l 44)# 5# (O-2)# FF3 ( l - l 44)# 6# (OOOO-9999)# FF3 (l-144)f 7# (0 or I)# FF3 FF3 FF3 FF3 FF3 FF3 FF3 (l-144)# (l-144)+! (l-144)f (l-144)# (I-144)# (I-144)t (I-144)# 8# (0 or l)# 9# (0 or l)# lO# (Oor l)# ll# (Oorl)# 12# (0 or l)# 135 (Oar I)# 14# (Oor I)# FF3 (l-144)# 15# (O-4)# FF3 (i-144)# 16f (Oor l)# Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 3-3 3-5 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-20 D BS-70-400 I Section 400-Programming Introduction to DBS Programming Program Address Topic Default FF3 (l-144)# FF3 (l-144)# FF3 (l-144)# FF3 (l-144)# FF3 (l-144)P FF3 (l-144)# FF3 (l-l 44)# FF3 (l-144)# Display During Intercom Dial’Tone Display When Calling an Extension Display When Accessing CO Dial Tone Display When Conversing on a CO Trunk Display When Receiving a Page Display After Receiving a Call Waiting Tone Display When Dialing a Busy Extension Extension Directory Display (CPC-Ail; CPC-B 2.0 or higher) VAU Port Assignment @PC-A 3.3 or higher) Extension Class of Service Assignment 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 27# (0-24/39)# 28# (0-24/39)# 29# (0-24/39)# 30t (0-24/39)# 31# (O-24/39)8 32# (0-24/39)# 33# (0-24/39)# 34# (0 or l)# FF3 (l-72)# 34# (0 or l)# FF3 (l-144)# 35# (0-8)# Page (Prev. menu) (Prev. menu) (Prev. menu) (Prev. menu) (Prev. menu) (Prev. menu) (Prev. menu) (5 names) 3-25 3-27 3-29 3-31 3-33 3-35 3-37 3-39 (see paQe 3-56) 0 (Class 0; all 3-40 (CPC-All; CPC-B 3.1 or higher) features allowed) Inbound DID Dial Numbers (cPc-B 2.0 only) FF3 (l-1 44)# 35# (0000-9999)# No assignment 3-41 AEC Disconnect (CPGA3.3 or higher) FF3 (l-72)# 35# (0 or l)# 0 (Disabled) 3-41 1 Ringback Tone From ML Keys FF3 (l-1 4b)# 36#‘ (0-2)c 10 (Ringback, then 1 3-42 busy tone) FF3 (l-l 44)# 37# (l-2 or 7-8)# Station Port CkiSS (CPC-84.0 or higher) Automatically 3-43 assianed SLT Hookflash (CPGB3.1 or higher) 0 (Broker’s hold) FF3 (l-144)# 38# (0 or l)# 3-45 Extension Ring Pattern FF3 (l-144)8 39# (0-9)# 0 (Determined by 3-46 CO) DiQitaf SLT ReceivinQ Volume 3-48 FF3 (l-144)# 40# (0 or 1 )# 0 (Normal) Auto Set Relocation Code Not set 3-49 FF3 (l-144)# 418 (OOOl-9999)# Permanent Call Forward Type 3-51 FF3 (l-144)# 42# (0-3)# cl (Off) No assignment FF3 (l-l 44)# 43# (1 O-69 or l OO-699)# Permanent Call Forward Extension 3-52 ML/MC0 Separation 0 (MC0 keys) 3-53 FF3 (l-144)# 44# (0 or l)# VAU Hunting Priority 0 (No priority) 3-54 FF3 (l-144)# 456 (0 or l)# AEC Disconnect 0 (Disabled) 3-55 FF3 (l-144)# 46# (0 or l)# VAU Port Assignment 3-56 FF3 (l-144)# 47# (0 or 1)# 0 (Off) Hot Dial Pad (CPC-All/B 7.0 or higher) IO (Disabled) 3-57 FF3 (1-l 44)# 48# (0 or l)# [Auto-Redial on Extensions (CPC-AIuB7.0 or higher)/1 (Enabled) 1 3-58 1 (FF3 (l-144)# 49# (0 or l)# _ I DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I * I Intro-l 7 introduction to DBS Programming Program Address Section 400-Programming Topic Default Page FF4 3# (l-8)# I# (11-69 or 101-699)# Hunt Group Pilot Numbers No assignment 4-7 FF4 3# (I-8)P . , I# (0 or l)# Terminal/Circular Hunt Groups FF4 3# (l-8)# 2# (0-2)# Hunt Group Type (CPC-Ak CPC-B 2.0orhigher) 0 (Terminal ‘hunting) 0 (Terminal hunting) No assignment No assignment (CPC-All: CPC-8 2.0 or higher) (CPC-A;CPC-B priorto 2.0) FF4 3# (1-8)# 2# (l-8)1 Call Next Hunt Group (CPC-A; CPC-I3 prior to 2.0) FF4 3# (l-8)# (3-lO)# (IO-690r Hunt Group Members (CPC-A; CPC-B prior to 2.0) l OO-699)# FF4 3# (I-8)# 3# (1 O-69 or l OO-699)# Transfer Extension (CPC-All; CPC-B 2.0 or higher) 000 FF4 3# (l-S)# 4# (0-32)# Hunt Group Transfer Timer (CPC-All; CPC-B 2.0 or 2 (2 set) FF4 3% (l-8)P (5-12/20)# (lo-69 or Hunt Group Members (CPC-All; CPC-B 2.0 or higher) No assignment 100-699)# FF4 4# (1-16)# (l-8)# (IO-690r Call Coverage Group Members No assignment IOO-699)# FF4 5# (l-73/145)# (l-64)% (0 or 1)P CO Delaved Dav Rino Assionments 0 (No rina) FF4 5# (79-86 or 151-158)# (l-64)# CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments for Hunt 0 (No ring) (Oorl)# G r o u p s FF4 6# (l-73/145)# (l-64)# (0 or l)# CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments 0 (No ring) FF4 6# (79-86 or 151-158)# (l-64)# CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments for Hunt 0 (No ring) (Oorl)# Groups FF4 7# (l-144)# (l-144)# (0 or l)# Extension Ring Table 0 (No ring) FF4 8# (l-144)# (1-144)f (Oorl)# Extension Delayed Ring Table 0 (No ring) CO Night 2 Ring Assignments FF4 9# l# (l-73/145)# ( l - 6 4 ) f 0 (No ring) (CPC-All/B 7.0 or higher) (Oorl)# FF4 9# l# (79-86 or 151-158)# (i-64),+ CO Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups 0 (No ring) (CPC-All/B 7.0 or higher) (Oorl)# FF4 9# 2# (1-73/145)# (l-64)# CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments 0 (No ring) (CPC-All/B 7.0 or higher) (Oorl)# FF4 9# 2# (79-86 or 151-158)X (l-64)$ CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt 0 (No ring) Grouos (CPC-AIVB7.0 or higher) (0 or 1)# ., .,., .,. ., .,. ., ,. ,.,_,. ,.,. FF5 (l-144)# (l-24)# CONF (Code)# (FF Kev Assignments for Extensions FF5 (73-76 or 145-l 48)# CONF (1-72)P FF Key Assignments for DSS Consoles (Code)# FF5 (149-152)# (1-32)# CONF (Code)# Attendant Feature Package Key Assignments CPC-B 2.0to 4.Owith AFP intro-l 8 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com ., ., ,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,. ,_,.,.,,,.,.,. .,.,,,.,. 4-11 4-13 4-14 4-15 (i-16 higher) .,.,..,_,_,...,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,..i, ..,..:...............,...,.,.,.,...,.., 4-9 4-l 7 4-l 8 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-3c ... INoassionment 1 5 - 3 No assignment 5-8 No assignment 5-10 D BS-70-400 I I Section 400-Programming Program Address Introduction to DBS Programming Topic FF6 1# (l-144)# CONF (up to 10 char.)# FF6 21 (00-89 or 000-l 99)# CONF (up to 16 char.)% FF6 3# (l-144)P (90-99 or 900-909)# CONF (up to 16 char.)# FF6 4# (59)P CONF (up to 15 char.)% FF6 51 (l-64)P CONF (up to 6 char.)# FF6 6# ([email protected]# CONF (up to 10 char.)# FF6 7# (l-5)P CONF (up to 15 char.)# FF6 8/9# (l-200)# (1 or 2)# (OOOO9999)R (up to 6 char.)# Extension Name System Speed Dial Names Program Address 1 Topic 1 Default No assignment 6-3 No assignment 6-4 Personal Speed Dial Names No assignment 6-5 Absence Messages Trunk Name Assignment Hunt Group Name Assignment Call Waiting/OHVA Text Reply DID/DNIS Text Name Assignment No No No No No (CPM 5.0 or higher) assignment 6-6 a s s i g n m e n t S-6 assignment 6-9 assignment 6-l 0 assignment 6-l 1 Default International Calling For TRS Types 3-6 FF7 1P 21 (0 or l)# FF7 l# 3# (l-15)# FF7 l# (4-ll)# (0 or l)# FF7 If (12-16)# (0 or l)# FF7 l# 17# (0 or I)# FF7 l# 18X (l-144)# (Oar l)#. FF7 l# 19# (l-144)# (Oor 1)# Page 0 (Deny/Check Country Code Table) DTMF Signaling During Incoming Calls for TRS 1 (Enable DTMF Types O-6 signaling during incoming calls) Maximum Dialed Digits For TRS Types 3-6 * (Unlimited) 3-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6 0 (Allow) 7-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6 1 (Check 7-digit table) Dialing Plan Switch (CPC-AWE 6.0 or higher) 0 (Old dial plan) Operator Access (CPC-All/B 6.0 or higher) 0 (Deny) international Calling on Extensions 0 (Dew) l Page ~~~~: 1.. 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-l 0 7-l 1 7-l 2 (CPC-All/B 6.0 or higher) Country Code Table (CPC-All/B 6.0 or higher) Equal Access Code Format FF7 l# 225 (l-lO)# (000-999)# No assignment 0 (Old 10XxX (CPC-All/B 6.0 or higher) format) Office Code Restriction Table For TRS Types 2-6 No assignment FF7 2% (3-6)# (000-999)P (0 or 1)# Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 FF7 3# (3-6)# (000-999)# (0 orl)# Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 DBS-70-400 DBS Manual- Issued 8/l/95 . FF7 l# 20# (l-lO)# (0-999)# FF7 l# 21Y (0 or l)# 7-13 7-14 7-l 5 (CPC-All/B 6.0 or higher) Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 0 (Allow) for TRS types 5 and 6 1 (Deny) for TRS types 3 and 4 0 (Allow) for TRS types 4-6 1 (Deny) for TRS tvoe3 7-l 6 7-l 7 Intro-19 Introduction to DBS Programming K-7 9# (13-16)# (0 or l)# Section 400-Programming Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy) . 0 (Allow) for Sp. AlCs 3 and 4 1 (Deny) for Sp. A/Cs 1 and 2 7-26 No assignment No assignment No assignment 8-12 8-13 8-14 Off ice Code Tables FF8 FF8 FF8 FF8 5# 6# 7# 8# (l-15)# (I-48)# (l-8)# (l-8)# (l-8)# (l-64)# (l-8)P (up to 16 digits)# (l-8)# (up to 16 digits)# Intro-20 LCR Trunk Groups LCR Delete Tables LCR Add Tables DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com . DBS’70-400 Section 400-Programming Introduction to DBS Programming Topic Program Address Default Page ‘. .‘.‘.A . . . . . . . .i. .:+.:.:yy..: :.:.: .... i.\: :.:.:.:. ~~ .:,:. .:.:.:.: :.:.: :>>:: :; ;>; :. ‘.:~i$~~~::‘.‘.: . . . .: ; 5- . <I :., ~,.i.i.i.:,: ,i :i ~~:~:~:~~~~~:: :~~::.~~~~~~:~.~: ~: ~~:~~:~:~:~~~:: .i : : :, ; :...y c : :.,: : ‘.’ :. ‘. .:.. . . \. . ‘.‘:‘.‘.‘.“:‘: .:i: .:, j. : ,: . ,. : 3’,:,: : :.j:;~: : i: : : i.i: :.:. : :; . ,. :+ .:.: : j:j :~~~~~~~:~~~~~a~~~~~~~~~~~~.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~l~~~~~~~ ._. . . . . ., ., ., ., . . .,_. ,. ., . . . ., :. . . . . . . . . ..,. . . ..,.,.,.,. . . . . . . . . . . . .:.:. .:. .: .,.,.,. . . .(. ., .: .:.:. .,., . :.:.;,: .:.:. . . , . , .,. . A. . . . . y:.: . ...... .:.,. . :. : ., ., .,. . ., . . . . . . .,.,. . ,.,. .,.,. .,. ., FF9 1# (l-64)P (l-64)## FF9 2# (l-144)# ( I - 1 4 4 ) f t FF9 3# (l-144)# (1-144)## /Trunk Copy Extension Copy FF Key COPY 1 Not set Not set Not set / 1 9-3 9-4 i 9-5 Topic Default Page Program Address :‘. . ,. : .: .:.:. .,..y :,:.:.: . . . . . .:. :.:. .:.:.:.>.,>:. :.>. ._,:;,: .:. ,..:.:.:.I:.:,..‘, : ,.;::.: :.j :.~:.: : : :. .: :.~:‘~.‘-~:.:.~: : .:.~: ;~~~:~: : ~. : .: l.: : .:i,:-j:-;.: : .: ~. .,.: .:.:.,.:. ............ ._ ~ ~ ~.~.~.~ ~.~.,~ .~ ,.,.,. . ,.,.,., .,.,., : .,.,. . . . .:. .:: :::+, .:. ‘. 2.. .: .:.: .::. ,. ;. .‘. -:; . . : (. y . :., .J, ;..iia~~~~~~~~~.a~~~~~~~~~,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ .,. . ., . . . . . ... ,. ,. . . . .,:. . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ .... ............... ,. . . . . . .,. . . . ‘.’ . . . . . :. FFlO l# (00-89 or 000-199)# (up to 16 System Speed Dial Numbers diaitslf I FFlO 2# (l-144)f (90-99 or 900-909)# Personal Speed Dial Numbers (up to 16 digits)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I Not set Not set I 10-3 10-5 Intro-21 1. System Programming (FFl) This chapter describes DBS system settings using programming key FFl. This chapter covers the following FFl addresses: F’Fl Address Topic FFl FFl FFl FFl FFl FFl FFl FFl Date and Time Settings General System Settings Serial Port Parameters (TTY Settings) PBX Settings External (UNA) Relay Control Class of Service Account Codes Flexible Function Screens Caller ID Automatic DISA Door Phones (CPC-AII/B 7.0 or higher) System Timers Programming and DISA Codes New Function Reset DlD/DNTS and Tl Settings (CPC-B only) l# 2# 2# 2# 2# 2# 2# 2# l# 2# 3# 4## 5# 6# 7# FF1 2# 8# FF1 2# 9# FFl FFl FFl FFl DBS-70-400 3# 4##thru7# 8# l# and 2# 8# 3# thru 7# DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-3 ==i -I l-5 1-53 l-68 l-70 l-73 1-81 I I I 1 1-133 1 Page l-l Page l-2 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Prog;arnming (FFl) Date and Time Settings Day/Date Setting Software Version: Ail Versions Address: FFl l# l# (MMDDYY)# Description This program sets the date in the DBS system clock. The day and date are printed on the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDRj printout Proper LCR (Least Cost Routing) operation depends on correct date settings. Proper operation of peripheral equipment may also depend on correct date settings. Programming I FFl 1# 1# (MM.DDYY)# t Month, day, and year in numeric format (for example, January 1.1995 would be entered as 010193. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-3 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Time Setting Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 1# 2# (HHMM)# Description This program sets the time in the DBS system clock. The time appears on key phones that have LCDs. The time is also recorded in SMDR call records. Note: Correct time settings are necessary for proper LCR (Least Cost Routing) operation. Programming I Time setting in 24-hour format (for example, 3:00 pm would be entered as 1500). Page l-4 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-46?j Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) General System Settings Call Duration Display Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 1# l# (0 or l)# Description This program determines whether call duration will be displayed on telephones with LCDs. By default, call duration will display. Programming FFl 2# 1# l# (0 or l)# t O=Call duration is not displayed. l=Call duration is displayed. Related Programming SMDR Display Start Timer for CO Calls: FFl 2# 1# 2# (0, 1 or 2)# LCD Timer for Caller ID: FFl 2# l# 38# (0, 1 or 2)# Notes No Interaction With SMDR Records. This setting does not affect SMDR record generation. Timing of Call Duration Display. In CPC-AH/B Version 6.1 or higher using Caller ID, the LCD Timer for Caller ID address (FF12# l# 38#) determines the delay before call duration is displayed, so that Caller ID information can appear first. In versions prior to 6.1, the SMDR Display Start Timer for CO Calls (see next address) controls the delay. D&-70-400 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-5 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming SMDR Display Start Timer for CO Ca!ls Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# l# 2# (0, 1, or 2)# Description This address determines the delay between the start of a call and the beginning of the SMDR record (5 seconds by default). In CPC-AII/B versions prior to 6:1, it also controls the delay before call duration is displayed on LCD phones. l l For Incoming Calls: An incoming call starts when the extension user answers an incoming trunk calI. If the user hangs up before the Timer ends, the system will not generate an SMDR record for the call. For Outgoing Calls: An outgoing call starts after the extension user dials the outgoing phone number. This allows time for the CO to connect the call, or the called party to answer, before beginning the SMDR record. Programming FFl 2# I# 2# (0, 1, or 2)# + O= SMDR record begins after 5 seconds. l= SMDR record begins after 16 seconds. 2= SMDR record begins after 30 seconds. Related Programming Call Duration Display: FFl 2# l# l# (0 or l)# SMDR Communications Parameters: FFl 2# 2# (l# thru 9#) SMDR Report (including the extension in): FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (0 or l)# Notes Caller ID Interaction. In CPC-AII/B Version 6.1 or higher using Caller ID, the SMDR Display Start Timer does not control when call duration starts displaying on LCD phones. Instead, the LCD Timer for Caller ID address controls when the display begins. Settings In Older DBS Versions. In CPC-A and CPC-B versions prior to 3.1, the SMDR Display Start Timer has only two settings -- “0” (16 seconds) or “1” (30 seconds). DBS Manual - Issued 8/I/95 Page l-6 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 . Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Section 400-Programming Least Cost Routing (LCR) Access Software Version: All Versions Address: FFI 2# l# 3# (0 or l)# Description This program specifies whether Least Cost Routing (LCR) is used when “9” is dialed to make an outside call. Prdgramming FFl 2# l# 3# (0,or I)# 0=“9” indicates a pooled-trunk call. 1=“9’* indicates an LCR call. I I Related Programming Forced Least Cost Routing: FF3 (ExtPort)# 4# (0 or l)# LCR Settings: all FF8 programs Notes Restriction With Call Forward-Outside Feature (in CPC-AII and CPC-B Version 7.0 and above). LCR will not work with the Call Forward-Outside feature. If LCR is activated (the above address is set to “l”), extensions set to Call Forward-Outside must use trunk groups l-6 (trunk group “9” cannot be used). See Section 700~Feature Operation for more information. Required Hardware Setting. Cut strap S 1 on the CPC card to enable LCR. See Section 300~Installation for instructions. FCC Regktration. If strap S 1 is cut, a different FCC registration number should be used to identify the DBS syste,m. Both registration numbers -- one for the DBS as a PBX system (Sl is cut), and one for the DBS as a KSU (Sl is not cut) -- are printed on a label in the main cabinet. See Section 300Installation for more information. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com . Page 1-7 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Override Toll Restriction With SSD Numbers Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# l# 4# (SSD)# Description This address allows you to set a range of System Speed Dial (SSD) codes that will override Toll Restriction Service (TRS) types 2-6. The number entered in this address is the lower boundary for SSD codes that will override TRS. In other words, all SSD numbers higher than the one entered will also override TRS types 2-6. Programming To set a range of SSD numbers to override TRS settings (enter the lowest SSD code in the range) . . . FFl 2# l# 4# (00-89 or 0001199)# + Lowest SSD Code that will override TRS (all SSDs above this number will also override TRS) OO-89=SSD code range for CPC-A (all versions), CPC-AII and CPC-B versions prior to 7.0 OOO-199=SSD code range for CPC-AI1 and CPC-B Version 7.0 or higher To reset to the default value . . . By default, SSD,numbers do not override TRS types 2-6. To reset to default: I FFl 2# l# 4# CONF ON/OFF I Related Programming TRS Settings: all FF7 programs SSD Numbers: FFlO l# (SSD)# (PhoneNo.)# Notes SLT Audio Delay. If “Override Toll Restriction With SSD Numbers” is executed on an SLT phone, there is a 15-second delay before audio is passed to the receiver. Page 1-8 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com D&-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming SSD Display Restriction Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# I# 5# (0 or l)# Description This address determines whether the telephone’s LCD will display the phone number actually sent by the DBS when an SSD code is dialed (or redialed with the REDIAL key). By default, the phone number will display. This address affects SSD codes 80-89 (or 160-199, in CPC-AR/B Version 7.0 or higher). The phone numbers associated with SSD codes 00-79 (or OOO159) will always display during dialing, regardless of the setting here. If SSD Display Restriction is enabled (set to “1” in this address), the text assigned to the SSD code will display, but the dialed digits will not. Programming FFl 2# l# 5# (0 cy l)# O=DBS-dialed digits of SSD are displayed. . 1 =DBS-dialed digits are not displayed (only the SSD name is displayed). SSD Codes Affected By This Address -80-89 (all CPC versions prior to 7.0) or 160-199 (CPC-AH/B Version 7.0 or higher) Related Programming Override TRS With SSD Numbers: FFI 2# 1# # (SSD)# SSD Name Display: FFl 2# I# 19# (0 or l)# SSD Names: FF6 2# (SSD)# CONF (Name)# SSD Numbers: FFlO l# (SSD)# (PhoneNo.)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-9 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi) Auto Flash Redial Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 1# 6# (0 or l)# Description This address determines whether the DBS will send a “flash” signal to the CO on loop-start trunks when the REDIAL key is pressed. By default, the REDIAL key sends a flash before redialing a number. If your DBS system is connected to a PBX, set this address to “0” (sending a flash may place the line to the PBX on hold). Programming FFl 2# l# 6# (0,or l)# O=REDIAL does not send “flash”. l=REDIAL sends 6‘flashy’. Related Programming COFlash Timer: FFl 3# 13# (0-15)# PBXFlash Timer: FFl 3# 18# (0-lO)# Trunk Port Type: FF2 (Trunk)# lO# (1 or 2)# Notes Flash Timing. The CO Flash Timer (FF13# 1 l#) determines the duration of a flash when REDIAL is pressed. Ground-Start Trunk Restriction. The Flash and Redial features are not functional for ground-start trunks. See Technote 13 (March 1992) for more information. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Page I-10 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI ) One Touch Dial Software Version: All Versions A d d r e s s : FFl 2# l# 7# ( 0 o r l)# Description DBS-70-400 The One-Touch Dial feature enables users to dial an extension by pressing a single programmable key. This feature is enabled regardicss of the program setting (One-Touch Dial cannot be deactivated). DBS Manual- Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-11 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Onhook Transfer Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 1# 8# (0 or l)# Description This address determines whether a call can be transferred without pressing the PROG key. If Onhook Transfer is enabled (default setting), the user can transfer a call by placing the call on hold, dialing the extension number, and then hanging UP* If Onhook Transfer is disabled, the user places the call on hold, dials the extension number, then presses PROG (or “8” if using an SLT or DSLT phone) and hangs up to transfer the call. l Programming O=Onhook Transfer is disabled. l=Onhook Transfer is enabled. Related Programming Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 4# (0-12)# Extension Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 5# (0-12)# Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Calls: FFl 3# 24# (0-12)# Extension Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Calls: FFl 3# 25# (0-12)# Notes Call Transfer Limitation With CPC-A. In CPC-A versions, only trunk calls can be onhook-transferred to other extensions. In CPC-AI1 and CPC-B, both trunk and intercom calls can be onhook-transferred. Transfer Recalls. If a transferred call recalls to an extension and is not answered, it will automatically transfer to the attendant. Timing for the attendant transfer is controlled by the Attendant Call Reversion Timer (FFl 3# lO# o-12+9. VA U Interaction. If a VAU (Voice Announce Unit) is used, enable Onhook Transfer to allow the VAU to transfer calls. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Page 1-12 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Key Bank Hold Software Version: All Versions Address: FF1 2# l# 9# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to enable or disable the Key Bank Hold feature in the DBS system. l If Key Bank Hold is enabled: - a phone user can switch back and forth between trunk calls (by pressing the FF key for each trunk) without placing the current trunk on hold. - an Attendant phone can press a DSS/BLF key to automatically transfer a trunk call to an extension without pressing HOLD first. l In both cases, the DBS will automatically place the current trunk call on System Hold (anyone can pick up the call) when the phone user presses the FF key or DSS/BLF key. If Key Bank Hold is disabled (default setting), the phone user must press HOLD before accessing a second trunk or transferring a call. Programming L O=Key Bank Hold is disabled. l=Key Bank Hold is enabled. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-13 Chapter I. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Non-Appearing Trunk Hold Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# l# lO# (0 or l)# Description This address determines who can pick up trunk calls that are on hold. It applies to DBS phones that don’t have dedicated key appearances for trunk calls (the phone user can’t tell which trunk is being used for incoming or outgoing calls). Choose one of the following: l l Exclusive Hold: The call can be retrieved only on the extension where it was placed on hold. System Hold (default setting): Any extension can pick up the call. Programming I I Notes O=Exclusive Hold is used for non-appearing trunk calls. l=System Hold is used for non-appearing trunk calls. Applicable Phone Types. This feature applies to both single-line and digital telephones. Number of Trunks That Can Be Held Without Key Appearances. Phones that do not have a key appearance for trunk calls can only hold one trunk at a time. VAU Interaction. If a VAU (Voice Announce Unit) is used, set Non- Appearing Trunk Hold to “Exclusive Hold” to prevent other extensions from picking up calls being handled by the VAU. Page l-14 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) SLT Flash Control Software Version: All Versions A d d r e s s : FFl 2# 1# 11# ( 0 o r l)# Description This address determines how the DBS will respond to a second hookflash during a call transfer on an SLT (Single-Line Telephone). By default, the second hookflash will retrieve the held call. To transfer a call on an SLT, the user hookflashes to place the call on hold, then dials the extension number to transfer the call to. If the extension is busy or not answered, the SLT user can hookflash again to either returu to dial tone or retrieve the held call. depending on the setting.(“O” or “l”, respectiveiy) in this address. The following table further explains the SLT call transfer process for both settings: Table l-l. SLT Hookflash Control Settings If SLT Flash Control is Set to “0” . . . If SLT Flash Control Is Set to “1” . . . -- ;;eh;y;r hookflashes to place a call -- i;eh;y;r hookflashes to place a call -- The.user dials an extension number to transfer the call. The extension is busy or does not answer. -- The user dials an extension number to transfer the call. The extension is busy. -- The user hookflashes a second time to receive dial tone. -- The user hookflashes a second time to retrieve the held call. -- The user dials another extension*. -- The user can then hookflash a third time to place the call on hold and receive dial tone. -- When the extension rings, the user hangs up to transfer the held call. * Or, the user can hookflash a third time to retrieve the held call. -- The user dials another extension. -- When the extension rings, the user hangs up to transfer the held call. NOTE: This address does not affect how the hookflash functions when the SLT user is listening to dial tone. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-l 5 Lnapter 1. system rrogramming (t f- i ) section 400~Wogrammlng Programming FFI 2# 1# 11# (0 or l)# t O=A second SLT hookflash results in dial tone. l=A second SLT hookflash retrieves a held call. Page 1-16 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Extension Number Digits Software Version: Ail Versions Address: FFl 2# l# 12# (0 or l)## Description This address determines whether the DBS will use 2-digit or 3-digit extension numbers. l l If 2-digit numbers are used, a maximum of 60 extension numbers are available for assignment. Number Range: 10 thru 69. If 3-digit numbers are used (default setting), a maximum of 600 extension numbers are available. Number Range: 100 &u-u 699. Programming FFl 2# l# 12#qr l)# (#jr *) [email protected] numbers 1=3-digit numbers A second ‘W’ is required to ’ confirm the new numbering plan. (Or, enter “*” to cancel the new numbering plan.) Related Programming Extension Numbers: FF 3 (ExtPortj# l# (lo-69 or lOO-699)kt Notes Interaction With Larger Systems. If more than 60 phones are installed in your system, use 3-digit extension numbers. Sites with fewer than 60 phones can use either 2-digit or 3-digit extension numbers. Interaction With Voice Mail. If your system uses Voice Mail, use 3-digit numbers in order to match extensions with Voice Mail boxes. Precaution for Changing Extension Number Digits. Changing this setting can adversely affect other DBS settings that are based on extension numbers, such as entries for DSWBLF keys and Call Forwarding. DES-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 . Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-17 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Alternate’ Attendant Software Version: CPC-A and CPC-B Versions Prior to 2.0 Address: FFl 2# l# 13# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to enable or disable the use of an Alternate Attendant phone. By default, the Alternate Attendant is enabled. When enabled, the Alternate Attendant phone receives overflow intercom calls from the Primary Attendant. The Alternate Attendant also has full access to Attendant features. Programming I I FFI 2# 1# 13# (0 or l)# t O=Disables the Alternate Attendant. l=Enables the Alternate Attendant. Related Programming Attendant Overflow for Primary Attendant (CPC-B Version 1.0 only): FFl 2# 1# 22# (l-15)# Extension Numbers (assigning to ports): FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)# Terminal Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (Type)# Notes Alternate Attendant Phone Settings In Later DBS Versions. In CPC-B Version 2.0 and above, and in all CPC-AII versions, you can program Second, Third, and Fourth Attendant phones instead of just one Alternate Attendant. . See FF12# l# 24# thru 26# for more information. Limitations on Assigning Attendant Phones. The DBS system always recognizes the Primary Attendant location at extension port 1, with extension number 10 or 100; this cannot be changed. However, you can change the assignment of the Alternate Attendant -- but it is recommended that you leave its default extension number at 11 or 101, so that a DSS/BLF console can be used with it. (The Alternate Attendant is assigned by default to port 2, but it can be reassigned to another port -- as long as extension 11 or 101 is assigned to the new port.) Page 1-18 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com , DBS~70-400 . Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Attendant Intercom Calling Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# l# 14# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to determine how intercom calls from an Attendant phone are announced at extension phones -- by ringing the extension, or by immediately establishing a voice path over the extension loudspeaker. By default, a voice path is established when an Attendant dials an extension. After the connection is established, the Attendant can change from voice to ring (or vice versa) by dialing “ 1”. Programming I FFl 2# l# 14#I (0 orl)# + I O=Ring tone intercom calling from Attendant. l=Voice intercom calling from Attendant. Related Programming Alert Tone for Voice Calls: FFI 2# l# 16# (0 or l)# Notes DBS-70-400 Interaction With VAU. If this address is set to “Voice intercom calling” and a VAU is used, the VAU will not answer a call from an Attendant unless the Attendant dials a “1” after dialing the VAU. DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-19 section 400~Wogramming uapter 1. system rrogrammlng (t-i- 1) Extension Intercom Calling Software Version: Ail Versions Address: FFl 2# I# 15# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to determine how intercom calls from another extension will be announced at extension phones -- by ringing the extension, or by imrnediately establishing a voice path over the extension loudspeaker. By default, a voice path is established when an extension dials another extension -- the called party can hear and talk to the caller without lifting the handset. After the connection is established, the caller can switch from voice to ring (or vice versa) by dialing “1”. Programming FFl 2# 1# 15# (0 or I)# 4 I O=Tone intercom calling from extension. l=Voice intercom calling from extension. Related Programming Alert Tone for Voice Calls: FFl 2# 1# 16# (0 or l)# Notes Page l-20 Interaction With VAU. If this address is set to “Voice intercom calling” and a VAU is used, the VAU will not answer a call from an extension unless the extension dials a “1” after dialing the VAU. DES Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com OBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Alert Tone for Voice Calls Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# l# 16# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to determine whether voice intercom calls are preceded by an initial alert (“splash”) tone. By default, the alert tone is enabled. The alert tone (if enabled) will be sounded for 0.5 seconds before the caller’s voice path is established. Programming I I FFl 2# l# 16# (0 or l)# f O=Alert tone is disabled. l=Alert tone is enabled. Related Programming Attendant Intercom Calling: FFl 2# l# 143 (0 or l)# Extension Intercom Calling: FFl 2# l# 15# (0 or l)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-21 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Alert Tone for Busy Override & OHVA Software Version: All Versions Address: FFI 2# l# 17# (0 or l)# Description This address determines if Attendant Override, Busy Override, and Offhook Voice Announce (OHVA) calls are preceded by an alert tone. By default, the alert tone is disabled. This feature is governed by state law -- some states require the alert tone. Programming FFl 2# I# 17# (0 or l)# O=Alert tone is disabled. l=Alert tone is enabled. Related Programming Busy Override Send: FF3 (ExtPort)# 9# (0 or l)# Busy Override Receive: FF3 (ExtPort)# lO# (0 or l)# Page Group Extensions: FF3 (ExtPort)# 18# thru 25# (0 or l)# Page 1-22 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming System Installation Area Code Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 1# 18# (0 or l)# Description This address determines if the DBS site requires a “1” to be dialed before the area code to make long-distance calls. This setting will affect the way the DBS handles Toll Restriction (TRS) and Least Cost Routing (LCR) for longdistance calls. In almost all cases, the default setting (“1” must be dialed) should not be changed. Programming FFl 2# I# 18# (0 or l)# t O=“l” is not required before a long-distance call. t=“l” must be dialed before a long-distance call. Related Programming Toll Restrictions: FF7 Least Cost Routing: FF8 Notes Interaction With TRS and LCR. If “0” is selected above (,‘l” is uot required before a long-distance call), the system will look at the fiist three digits of the number dialed, whether it’s a “1” or not. This would severely limit the capability of TRS and LCR, which are based on 3-digit area codes. If “1” is selected (“1” is required before dialing a long-distance call), the system will ignore the first dialed digit (could be “0” or “1”) and look at the next three digits dialed as the area code. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-23 C h a p t e r SSD Name Display Software Version: AH Versions Address: FFl 2# l# 19# (0 or l)# Description TJse this address to determine how many SSD (System Speed Dial) names can be displayed at a time on large-display phones, whenever an SSD menu is displayed. When 5 names are displayed (default setting), the maximum length for each name is 16 characters. When 10 names are displayed, the maximum length for each name is 5 characters. Programming FFl 2# l# 19# (0 cy l)# O=Displays 5 SSD names. l=Displays 10 SSD names. Related Programming Override TRS with SSD Numbers: FFl 2# l# 3# (SSD)# SSD Display Restriction: FFl 2# l# 5# (0 or I)# SSD Menu display during call states: FF3 (ExtPort)# 26# thru 33# 3# System Speed Dial Names: FF6 2# (SSD)# CONF (Name)++ System Speed Dial Numbers: FFlO l# (SSD)# @ialedNo.)# Page 1-24 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Section 400-Programming APVAEC Slot Assignment software VetSiOn: CPC-A Version 3.3 or higher; CPC-All; and CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 1# 20# (2-9 or 2-18)# Description Programming This program is only used with third-party API applications. Its purpose is to designate which Analog Extension Card (AEC) is used for voice channel connections to the API product. 1 FFl 2# l# 20# (2-9 oy 2118)# t Analog Extension Slot used for voice paths to a third-party API product. NOTE: Do not set this to “1” (slot 1 must be a digital port). Valid Ranges -CPC-A and CPC-AII: 2-9 CPC-B: 2-18 I. Default: ** (no assignment) Related Programming Voice Mail Busy Tone: FFl 2# l# 21# (0 or l)# Terminal Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (21-28,31-38 or 41-48)# Notes Third-Party Voice Mail Systems Not Integrated With the DBS. In these systems, the API card is not required. Set up Call Forward ID codes so that the DTMF codes will be sent to the appropriate Voice Mail box (ON/OFF PROG - AUTO - * - [Ext] - [up to 16 char.] - HOLD). See Section 700Feantre Operation for more information. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-25 Chapter 1. System Programming (FF1) Section 400-Programming Voice Mail Busy Tone Software Version: All-Versions Address: FFl 2# 1# 21# (0 or l)# Description This address determines what is sent to a voice-mail uort at the conclusion of a call -- either silence or a busy tone. By default, the DBS sends silence. L Programming I FFl 2# l# 21# (0 or l)# O=Silence. 1 =B usy tone. Related Programming API/AEC Slot Assignment: FF1 2# l# 20# (2-18)# Page l-26 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 . Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Analog Transfer Ring Pattern Software Version: CPC-A Only (Version 3.21 or higher) Address: FFl 2# l# 22# (O-6)# Description This address determines which ringing pattern is used for transferred calls to devices connected to analog extension ports. By default, the ringing pattern is .4 seconds on 13.6 seconds off. This setting is typically used to assign specific ringing patterns for calls transferred to a modem, or for SLTs that require distinctive ringing for transferred calls. Programming FFl 2# l# 22# (O-6)# f Setting (in seconds): O= .4 on / 3.6 off l= .8 on I .2 off / .8 on / .2 off / .8 on / .2 off / 1 off 2= .8 on / .2 off / .8 on / 2.2 off 3= .8 on 12.2 off 4= .8 on 13.2 off 5= .8 on / 5.2 off 6= .8 on 13.2 off / .8 on / 7.2 off Notes DBS-70-400 Analog Transfer Ring Pattern Setting for CPC-AN and CPC-B. The Analog Transfer Ping Pattern for CPC-AI1 (all versions) and CPC-B (Version 2.11 orhigher)issetinFFl 2# 1#31#. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-27 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Attendant Overflow for Primary Attendant Software Version: CPC-B Version 1 .O only Address: FFl 2# l# 22# (l-15)# Description This address determines the maximum number of trunk calls that can be stacked at the Primary Attendant phone. By default, up to 8 calls can be stacked at a time. Calls exceeding the set limit are automatically transferred to other extensions. To determine which extensions receive ovefflow trunk calls, use the Day and Night Delayed Ring tables (FF4 5#, FF4 6#, and FF4 9# 2#). The following types of calls can be stacked at the Primary Attendant: Incoming trunk calls. Hold recalls. Transferred recalls. Hunt group recalls. Call reversions. l l l l l Programming FFl 2# I# 22# (l-15)# f Number of Calls That Can Be Stacked (default: 8) Related Programming Attendant Hold Recall Timer: FFl 3# 2# (0-12)# Extension Hold Recall Timer: FFl 3# 3# (0-12)# Attendant Transfer Recall Timer: FFl 3# 4# (0-12)# Extension Transfer Recall Timer: FFl 3# 5# (0-12)# Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer: FFl 3# 6# (0- 12)# Extension Hunt Group Recall Timer: FFl 3# 7# (0-12)# Attendant Call Reversion Timer: FFl 3# lO# (0-12)# Notes Overflow Intercom Calls. Intercom calls will automatically ovefflow to the Alternate Attendant, if enabled in FFl 2# I# 13#. Page 1-28 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Delayed Ring Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher FFl 2# l# 23# (0 or l)# Address: Description This address determines if delayed ringing is allowed for CO trunks. By default, delayed ringing is disabled. Delayed ringing is an automatic transfer of unanswered calls -- if an incoming call is not answered at one extension, the system will send the call to another extension (the first extension will cease ringing). Programming O=Delayed ringing is disabled. l=Delayed ringing is enabled. Related Programming CO Delayed Ring Timer (CPC-AI1 and CPC-B Ver 3.1 or higher): FFl 3# 26# (O-15)# CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments: FF4 5# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 5# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# CO Delayed Night 1 Ring Assignments : FF4 6# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# CO Delayed Night 1 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 6# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments: FF4 9# 2# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 9# 2# (Hun tGrp)# (Trunk)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-29 Chapter I. System Programming (FFI) Section 400-Programming AEC Disconnect Signal Duration Software Version: CPC-A Version 3.3 or higher Address: FFl 2# l# 23# (0115)# Description Use this address to set the AEC card (VB-43621A) to provide a positive disconnect signal, and determine the duration of the signal. By default, the disconnect signal is not sent. If set, analog extension ports will provide a disconnect signal (open loop) upon hangup. Sending this signal allows quick disconnect from third-party voice mail systems. Programming FFI 2# l# 23# (0-15)# t O=No disconnect signal. l=lOO ms signal will be sent. 2=200 ms signal will be sent. 3=300 ms signal will be sent. 4=400 ms signal will be sent. 5=500 ms signal will be sent. 6=600 ms signal will be sent. 7=700 ms signal will be sent. 8=800 ms signal will be sent. 9=900 ms signal will be sent. lO=l-second signal will be sent. 1 l=lS-second signal will be sent. 12=2-second signal will be sent. 13=2.5-second signal will be sent. 14=3-second signal will be sent. 15=3.5-second signal will be sent. Related Programming AEC Disconnect (CPC-A 3.3 or higher): FF3 (ExtPort)# 35# (0 or l)# AEC Disconnect (CPC-AIIB 5.0 or higher): FF3 (ExtPort)# 46# (0 or l)# Notes AEC Disconnect Signal Duration for CPC-B Versions. For CPC-B Version 5.0 and higher, the AEC Disconnect Signal Duration is set in FF12# l# 35#. Page l-30 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Second Attendant Position Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher FFI 2# I# 24# (11-69 or 10%699)# Address: Description This address assigns an extension number as the Second Attendant position. By default, the Second Attendant position is extension 101. When all line appearances at the Primary Attendant are busy, calls will transfer in sequence to the Second. Third, and Fourth Attendants. If all line appearances are busy on all Attendants, calls will transfer to the Attendant Transfer Extension (if assigned). Programming To assign a Second Attendant position . . . FFl 2# 1# 24# (11-69 or 101 to699)# + Extension Number (default: 11 or 101) To clear the Second Attendant position . . . FFl 2# 1# 24# CONF ON/OFF Related Programming Extension Number Digits: FFl 2# I# 12# (0 or l).## Third Attendant Position: FFl 2# 1# 2% (11-69 or lOl-699)# Fourth Attendant Position: FFl 2# l# 26# (1 l-69 or IO 1-699)# Attendant Transfer Extension: FFl 2# l# 27# (1 l-69 or lOl-699)# Extension Numbers (assigning to ports): FF3 (ExtPortj# l# (ExtNo.)# Notes Programming Restrictions. A telephone must be plugged into the Second Attendant port before its extension number can be programmed or cleared. Also, use another phone to program or clear its extension number (e.g., you can’t use ext. 101’s phone to program ext. 101 as the Second Attendant position). Limitations on Assigning Attendant Phones. It is recommended that you leave the Second Attendant at the default assignment (extension 11 or lOl>, so that a DSS/BLF console can be used. System default for the Primary Attendant phone is extension 10 or 100, assigned to port 1 -- and Primary Attendant assignments cannot be changed. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-31 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Third Attendant Position Sofhuare Version: CPC-Ail (all versions) and CPC-8 Version 2.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# l# 25# (11-69 or 101-699)# Description This address assigns an extension number as the Third Attendant position. By default, no extension is assigned as the Third Attendant. When all line appearances at the Primary Attendant are busy, calls will transfer in sequence to the Second, Third, and Fourth attendants. If all line appearances are busy on all Attendants, calls will transfer to the Attendant Transfer Extension (if assigned). Programming To assign a Third Attendant position . . . FFl 2# 1# 25# (11-69 or 101 to 699)# t Extension Number (default: no Third Attendant assigned) To clear the Third Attendant position . . . FFl 2# l# 25# CONF ON/OFF Related Programming Extension Number Digits: FFl 2# l# 12# (0 or l)## Second Attendant Position: FF 1 2# l# 24# (1 l-69 or lOl-699)# Fourth Attendant Position: FFl 2#, l# 26# (11-69 or lOl-699)# Attendant Transfer Extension: FFI 2# l# 27# (11-69 or lOl-699)# Extension Numbers (assigning to ports): FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)# Notes Programming Restrictions. A telephone must be plugged into the Third Attendant port before its extension number can be programmed or cleared. Also, use another phone to program or clear its extension number (e.g., you can’t use ext. 102’s phone to program ext. 102 as the Third Attendant I position). Limitation on Assigning the Third Attendant. The DBS system wili not allow you to assign extension 10 or 100 as the Third Attendant position. This is the system default for the Primary Attendant phone, which cannot be changed. Page 1-32 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Fourth Attendant Position Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 1# 26# (11-69 or 10%699)# Description This address assigns an extension number as the Fourth Attendant position. By default, no extension is assigned as the Fourth Attendant. When all line appearances at the Primary Attendant are busy, calls will transfer in sequence to the Second, Third, and Fourth Attendants. If all line appearances are busy on all Attendants, calls will transfer to the Attendant Transfer Extension (if assigned). Programming To assign a Fourth Attendant position . . . FFl 2# I# 26# (11-69 or 101 to 699)# f Extension Number (default: no Fourth Attendant assigned) To clear the Fourth Attendant position . . . FFl 2# l# 26# CONF ON/OFF Related Programming Extension Number Digits: FFl 2# l# 12# (0 or l)# Second Attendant Position: FFl 2# 1# 24## (1 l-69 or lOl-699)# Third Attendant Position: FFl 2# l# 25# (11-69 or 101-699)# Attendant Transfer Extension: FFl 2# l# 27# (11-69 or lOl-699)# Extension Numbers (assigning to ports): FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)# Notes Programming Restrictions. A telephone must be plugged into the Fourth Attendant port before its extension number can be programmed or cleared. Also, use another phone to program or clear its extension number (e.g., you can’t use ext. 103’s phone to program ext. 103 as the Fourth Attendant position). Limitation on Assigning the Fourth Attendant. The DBS system will not allow you to assign extension 10 or 100 as the Fourth Attendant position. This is the system default for the Primary Attendant phone, which cannot be changed. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-33 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Attendant Transfer Extension Sofhnrare Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.09 or higher FFl 2# 1# 27# (11-69 or lOl-699)# Address: Description If all line appearances are busy on all Attendants (Primary, Second, Third and Fourth), calls will transfer to the extension assigned in this address. Programming To assign an Attendant Transfer Extension . . . FFl 2# l# 27# (11-69 or 10%699)# t Extension Number (default: no Transfer Extension assigned) To clear the Attendant Tra.nsfer Extension . . . I Notes FFl 2# I# 27# CONF ON/OFF I Pilot Number Restriction. The overflow position must be an installed extension -- it cannot be a hunt group pilot number. Page 1-34 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi j Section 400-Programming Attendant Override Software Version: CPC-Ail (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.09 or higher Address: FFl 2# l# 28# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to enable or disable the Attendant Override feature. which allows an Attendant phone to “barge into” a trunk or intercom call in progress on any extension -- even if the extension has been programmed to block barge-ins. By default, Attendant Override is enabled. When a barge-in occurs, all three parties can hear and talk to each other. Programming FFl 2# l# 28# (0 or l)# O=Disables Attendant Override. l=Enables Attendant Override. Related Programming klert Tone for Busy Override & OHVA: FFl 2# l# 178 (0 or l)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com . Page l-35 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Section 400-Programming Attendant LED Alarm Indication Software Version: CPC-B Versions 2.09 to 4.0 (requires Attendant Feature Package) Address: FFl 2# l# 29# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to allow or disallow the Alarm feature (LED lights to indicate an alarm condition) to be assigned to an FF key on an Attendant phone. By default, the Alarm feature can be assigned. NOTE: The Attendant Feature Package (AFP) was discontinued in CPC-B Version 5.0. Programming I FFI 2# 1# 29# (0 or I)# f O=Alarm feature cannot be assigned to Attendant FF key. I=Alarm feature can be assigned to Attendant FF key. Related Programming AFP Key Assignn tents: FF5 ( 1 W 152)# ( 1-72)# (FF 12 4)# Notes InstaUing AFZ? Installation of the AFP software requires the replacement of EPROM Chip 1 on the CPC-B card with an AFP chip. Make sure the new chip is installed in the proper direction. See Technote 4 (September 1991) for complete infomlation. Page l-36 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Extension (BLF) Delayed Ring Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-6 Version 2.0 or higher Address: FFI 2# l# 30# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to enable or disable Delayed Ringing for intercom calls. By default, Extension (BLF) Delayed Ringing is disabled. Delayed Ringing is a call-forwarding feature for unanswered calls -- if an incoming call is not answered at one extension, the system will send the call to another extension. NOTE: The extension to which the call is forwarded must have a DSS/BLF key. Programming FFl 2# 1# 30# (0 or l)# t O=Extension Delayed Ringing is disabled. l=Extension Delayed Ringing is enabled. Related Programming Extension Delayed Ring Table: FF4 8# (ExtPort)# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)# Extension Delayed Ring Timer (CPC-B 2.0 or higher): FFl 3# 27# (0-15)# Call Forward-No Answer Timer (CPC-B prior to 2.0): FFl 3# 19# (0-lS)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-37 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Analog Transfer Ring Pattern Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.11 or higher Address: FFl 2# 1# 31# (016)# Description Use this address to choose a distinctive ringing pattern for calls transferred to analog SLT phones. This setting is typically used for calls transferred to a modem, or for SLT phones requiring distinctive ringing for transferred calls, There are 7 different patterns (numbered O-6) to choose from. The pattern for each setting depends on the analog connection -* an SLT phone connected directly to an AEC card; an SLT phone connected to an OPX Adapter; or an SLT phone connected to an SLT-A (6port Adapter). l l Programming FFl 2# I# 31# (0-6)# Transfer Ring Pattern setting (see table below) Table 1-2. Analog Transfer Ring Patterns (vary depending on analog connection) I Ring Pattern (no. of seconds on/off) for SLT phones connected to . . . I I OPX Adapter AEC Card SLT Adapter (SLT-A) Address Setting 0 son/40ff 5on135off 25 on I .25 off I 25 on I 3.5 off 1 lon/.25off/lon/.25off/ 3onlloff .25 on I 3.5 off 2 3 4 5 6 lon/.25off(lon/3off 2onl2off 1 on 13.5 off 1 on/2 off I on/3 off I 1 onl2off I lonl3off I I 1 on/ 3.5 off I lonl7off 1 onl6off 1 onl5off .50nl7 off 1 onl4offll onl7off 1 onl7off .25 on I .25 off / .25 on I 7 off Related Programming Analog Transfer Ring Pattern (CPC-A 3.21 or higher): FFI 2# 1# 22# (0-6)# Terminal Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (Type)# Extension Ring Pattern: FF3 (ExtPort)# 39# (O-9)# Page l-38 DBS Manual - Issued 811195 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com . DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Multiple DID/DNIS Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# l# 32# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to enable or disable Multiple DID for analog trunks, or Multiple DID and DNIS for Tl trunks. By default. Multiple DID/DNIS is disabled. With Multiple DID/DNIS enabled, one DID or DNIS number can be assigned to multiple extensions, which will simultaneously ring when an outside caller dials the DID or DNIS number. l l DID stands for “Direct Inward Dialing.” DID can be used only in systems using analog trunks exclusively (no other types of trunks are used in the system). Up to 500 DID numbers can be assigned to extension numbers in FFl 8# 3# (0000-9999)# (ExtNo.)#. DNIS stands for “Dialed Number Identification Service.” DNIS is available only with the Tl Interface. You can use DID and DNIS simultaneously in a Tl system. Up to 500 DNIS numbers can be assigned to extension numbers in FFl 8# 4# 7# (0000-9999)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)#, in addition to the 500 DID numbers allowed. Programming FFl 2# l# 32# (0 or l)# $ O=Disabies Multiple DID/DNIS ringing. l=Enables Multiple DID/DNIS ringing. Related Programming Inbound DID Dial Numbers: FFl 8# 3# (0000-9999)# (loo-699)## DID/DNIS (enabling trunks for): FFl 8# 4# 6# (Trunk)# 2# (0-2)# DNIS Number Setting: FFl 8# 4# 7# (0000-9999)# (lo-69 or 100-699)# DID Flexible Ringing Assignments: FFl 8# 5# (DIDNo.)# (ExtNo.)# (000000- 11111 l># DNIS Flexible Ringing Assignments: FFl 8# 6# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)# (000000-llllll)# Extension Numbers (assigning to ports): FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)# DES-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-39 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Notes Section 400-Programming Restrictiun Far CPC-B Version 3.1. This address is also present in CPC-B Version 3.1; however, it only controls Multiple DID (DMS cannot be used with this version). DID Hardware and Power Requirements. The DID trunk card is required: each card provides 8 ports. The card requires dial-pulse dialing and an external, -48V power supply. See Section 300-Installation for cabling instructions. DZDIDNZS Digit Length Requirement. The DBS only supports 4-digit DID/ DMS numbers. Central Oj’j?ce Requirement. When the CO sends a DID/DMS call to the DBS, it fist receives a wink from the DBS before sending the digits. Once the wink is received, the CO should wait at least 200 ms before sending the digits. Trunk Requirement. Individual trunks must be enabled for DID or DMS (see FP 1 8# 4# 6# Trunk# 2#). Simultaneous Ringing. If Multiple DID/DNIS is enabled, all extensions assigned the same DID/DNTS number will ring for the incoming DlD/DMS call. If you later disable Multiple DID/DNIS, only the extension at the lowest-numbered’port wi!l ring for the DID/DMS call. Call Forwarding Interaction.. If Multiple DID/DMS is enabled, and the DID/DXIS extensions are programmed to call-forward to different extensions. the simultaneous ringing will also apply to the call-forward destination extensions. In other words, all call-forward paths will be followed simultaneously for the same DID/DNIS call, until someone picks it up. If you later disable Multiple DlD/DNIS, only the call-forwarding path assigned to the extension at the lowest-numbered port will be followed. Page l-40 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Section 400~Programming Page Duration Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher FFI 2# l# 33# (0 or l)# Address: Description This address determines whether the DBS system will automatically close the paging circuit 60 seconds after a page is initiated. By default, the paging circuit is left open indefinitely, until the paging person closes the circuit by hanging up. Programming O=The page circuit remains open indefinitely. l=The paging circuit remains open for 60 seconds before the system closes it. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-41 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (ITI) SLT DISA Ring Pattern Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher Address: FFl 2# l# 34# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to specify a distinctive ring pattern for DISA calls on SLT phones, or follow the Analog Transfer Ring Pattern setting. By default, the pattern is 1 second on / 3 seconds off. Programming FFl 2# 1# 34# (0 or l)# 1 kl second on / 3 seconds off. i=Same as the Analog Transfer Ring Pattern. Related Programming Analog Transfer Ring Pattern Page 1-42 (CPC-AI1 and CPC-B): DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FFl 2# l# 31# (0-6)# DBS-70-400 3wau11 b11dp3 4uu-rluylatitiwlg I . 3yaica11 riuyiaii!~iiiiiy [t-r I; AEC Disconnect Signal Duration Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 1# 35# (0-15)# Description Use this address to set the duration of a positive disconnect signal sent from analog extension ports (VB-43621A version of the AEC card). Sending this signal allows quick disconnect from third-party voice mail systems. By default, no disconnect signal is sent. This address applies to CPC-AI1 and CPC-B. The AEC Disconnect Signal Duration address for CPC-A (Version 3.3 or higher) is FFl 2# l# 23# (0-15)#. The sending of the AEC disconnect signal can be enabled or disabled on individual extensions using FF3 (ExtPort)# 46#. Programming I FFl 2# l# 35# (O-1 5)# t AEC Disconnect Signal Duration setting Default: 0 (no signal sent) (see table below) Table 1-3. AEC Disconnect Signal Duration values Setting 0 1 I 2 3 4 5 6 7 Value No disconnect signal sent I 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms I 800 ms I 9 11 12 13 14 15 DBS-70-400 1 900 ms 1 1 second 1.5 seconds 2 seconds 2.5 seconds 3 seconds 3.5 seconds DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-43 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming DIDlDNlS to a Voice Mailbox Software Version: CPC-8 Version 6.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# l# 36# (O! 1 or 2)# Description This address determines whether (and how many) final digits of a DlD/DNTS phone number are transmitted to Voice Mail, in cases where the DID/DMS trunk is assigned to ring directly to Voice Mail (not to a DBS extension phone). This address allows DWDNIS calls to be routed to a Voice Mailbox system that is not connected to a physical extension. To implement this feature, assign the DID/DNIS trunks to ring at the Voice Mail system (using FF4 ring assignment addresses). Once Voice Mail answers, the DBS sends a DID/DMS Answer Code that signals the Voice Mail system to open the appropriate mailbox, plus the final DID/DNIS digits (if any) specified in this address. Programming I FFl 2# 1# 36# (0,l or2)# t O=No DID/DNIS digits are transmitted (only the Answer Code). l=Answer Code, then final 4 DID/DMS digits are transmitted. 2=Answer Code, then final 3 DBYDMS digits are transmitted. Related Programming DBXDMS Answer Code: FFl 2# l# 37# (NNNNNN)# DlD/DMS (enabling trunks for): FFl 8# 4## 6# (Trunk)# 2# (0-2)# Inbound DID Dial Numbers: FFl 8# 3# (0000-9999)# (loo-699)# DMS Number Setting: FFl 8# 4# 7# (0000-9999)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)# Terminal Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (Type)# Ringing Assignments (trunks to extensions): FF4 addresses Notes DIDIDNIS Digit Transmission. The DID/DNTS digits are sent only to ports that are assigned as Voice Mail. Voice Mail Ports and Hunt Groups. The DIDPMS digits can be sent to a specific Voice Mail port or a Voice Mail hunt group. Second Hunt Group. If the DID/DNIS call rings into a hunt group that is programmed to transfer calls to a second hunt group, the DtD/DMS call will not be transferred to the second hunt group. . Page 1-44 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Third-Party Voice Mail. This feature can be used with Panasonic’s Voice Mail system or with third-party Voice Mail systems. If the feature is used with third-party Voice Mail systems, the Voice Mail can be connected through analog extension ports or OPX ports. Call Forward ID Code for DIDfDNIS Calls To An Extension. If a DIDI DNIS call is assigned to ring an extension, and the extension is programmed to forward to Voice Mail, only the Call Forward ID Code will be transmitted to Voice Mail (the DID/DNIS digits will not). DZDfDNZS Data Transmission. The DID/DNIS digits are transmitted over the API link using the existing API key code packet. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-45 DID/DNIS Answer Code Software Version: CPC-6 Version 6.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# l# 37# (Code)# Description Use this address to specify a DID/DNIS Answer Code. The Answer Code is used for routing DID/DNIS calls to a Voice Mailbox system that is not connected to a physical extension. To implement this feature, assign DID/DNIS trunks to ring directly to the Voice Mail system using FF4 ring assignment addresses. Once Voice Mail answers, the DBS sends the DID/DNIS Answer Code, which signals the Voice Mail system to open the appropriate mailbox. Programming I FF1 2# 1# 37# (NNNNNN)# t DID/DNIS Answer Code (up to 6 characters) Valid Entries: O-9, *, #, or REDIAL (pause) Related Programming DID/DMS to a Voice Mailbox: FFl 2# l# 36# (0,l or 2)# DID/DNIS (enabling trunks for): FFl 8# 4# 6## (Trunk)# 2# (0-2)## Inbound DID Dial Numbers: FFl 8# 3# (0000-9999)# (loo-699)## DNIS Number Setting: FFl 8# 4# 7# (OOOO-9999)## (lo-69 or lOO-699)## Terminal Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (Type)# Ringing Assignments (trunks to extensions): FF4 addresses Notes Assigning the DIDIDNIS Answer Code When Not In Programming Mode. The DlD/DNIS Answer Code may be entered from an Attendant phone, or from a key phone where the programming access code has been entered. Press PROG ##!I5 NNNNNN HOLD -- where “NNNNNN” is the Answer Code of up to 6 characters, including O-9, *, #, or REDLAL (for “pause”). DIDIDNIS Digit Transmission. The DID/DNIS digits are sent only to ports that are assigned as Voice Mail. Page 1-46 DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Voice Mail Ports and Hunt Groups. The DIDIDNIS digits can be sent to a specific Voice Mail porr or a Voice Mail hunt group. Second Hunt Group. If the DID/DNIS call rings into a hum group that is programmed to transfer calls to a second hunt group, the DID/DNTS call will not be transferred to the second hunt group. Third-Party Voice Mail. This feature can be used with Panasonic’s Voice Mail system or with third-party Voice Mail systems. If the feature is used with third-party Voice Mail systems, the Voice Mail can be connected through analog extension ports or OPX ports. Call Forward ID Code for DZDIDNZS Calls To An Extension. Lf a DID/ DNIS call is assigned to ring an extension, and the extension is programmed to forward to Voice Mail, only the Call Forward ID Code will be transmitted to Voice Mail (the DID/DNIS digits will not). DZDIDNIS Data Transmission. The DIDPNIS digits are transmitted over the API link using the existing API key code packet. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-47 Sectlon 400~Programming Chapter 1. System PrOgrammIng (Wl ) LCD Timer for Caller ID Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 6.1 or higher Address: FFl 2# l# 38# (0,l or 2)# Description The LCD Timer determines how long the DBS waits before displaying call duration timing on the phone’s LCD. This Timer allows Caller ID information (if available) to appear before the call duration timing is displayed. For example, if the LCD Timer is set to 5 seconds (default), call duration timing will start displaying on the phone’s LCD 5 seconds after an outgoing number is dialed, or 5 seconds after an incoming call is answered. Programming FFl 2# l# 38# (0,l or 2)# 0=5 seconds 1= 16 seconds 2=30 seconds Related Programming Call Duration Display: FFl 2# l# l# (0 or l)## SMDR Display Start Timer for CO Calls: FFl 2# l# 2# (0, 1 or 2)# Notes SMDR Interaction. The LCD Timer only affects the display of call duration. The system begins the actual SMDR recording of the call according to the SMDR Start Timer address (FFl 2# l# 2#). In order for call duration to be displayed, the LCD Timer has to expire after the SMDR Start Timer -- which means the LCD Timer setting must be equal to or greater than the SMDR Start Timer. Caller ID Interaction. The LCD ‘Timer setting will be the actual length of time that Caller ID information is displayed before the LCD changes to call duration timing. However, the Timer also controls when call duration display begins for all types of trunk calls, not just Caller ID calls. Page 1-48 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Internal Hold Tone Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FF1 2# l# 39# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to enable or disable Internal Hold Tone, which is a doublebeep heard every 7 seconds by a caller on hold. Programming FFl 2# l# 39# (0 or I)# &Disabled (no Internal Hold Tone) l=Enabled (Internal Hold Tone heard) Notes MOH Override. Internal Hold Tone (if enabled) will override any MOH (Music-On-Hold) sound source installed. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 \ Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-49 Lnapter 1. System Programmtng (FFl) Section 400-Programming Door Opener Access Code Required Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-8, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# l# 40# (0 or l)# Description This address determines whether a Door Opener Access Code must be entered on an extension to unlock the Door Box. This applies to Door Boxes connected to digital extension ports (not trunk ports). Programming I FFl 2# l# 40# (0 or l)# t O=Not required 1=Required Related Programming Door Phone Extensions: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# l# (ExtPort)## Door Opener Access Code: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 3# (0000-9999)# Notes Unlocking the Door Box During a Door Phone Call. If this address is set to “1” (Required), an extension user answering a door phone call would unlock the door by pressing #3 NNNN * (where NNNN=Access Code). If set to “0” (Not required), the extension user answering the door phone call would simply press #3*. Unlocking the Door Box From Another Extension. The door can also be unlocked from any other extension not engaged in a door phone call. If this address is set to “1” (Required), dial ON/OFF #3 XXX NNNN * on any extension (where XXX=Door Box extension number, and NNNN=Access Code) to unlock the door. If set to “0” (Not required), dial ON/OFF #3 XXX * to unlock the door. Hardware Requirement. The Door Opener Access Code applies to door phone devices connected to the VB-437 11 Door Phone Adaptor, which connects the Door Box to a digital extension port Door Boxes connected to trunk ports use another Adaptor (VB-43701), and do not utilize the Access Code. Page l-50 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl j Section 400-Programming API Port Type Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-8, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 1# (41 or 42)# l# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to configure the appropriate API port for TSAPI protocol. Only one API port should be configured for TSAPI. Programming FFI 2# 1# (41 or 42)# 1# (0 or l)# + API Port Number: 41=API Port 1 42=API Port 2 -r Port Type: O=Standard API protocol l=TSAPIprotocol Related Programming API Baud Rate: FFl 2# I# (41 or 42)# 2# (0 or l)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-51 section 400~Programming Chapter 1. system rrogrammlng (t t 1) API Baud Rate Software Version: CPC-Ail and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 1# (41 or 42)# 2# (0 or l)# Description The baud rate for the TSAPI port can be set to either 9600 or 19200 bps. Programming FFl 2# 1# (41 or 42)# 2# (0 qr l)# API Port Number: 41=API Port 1 42=API Port 2 Baud Rate: 0=9600 bps 1=19200 bps Related Programming API Port Type: FFl 2# l# (41 or 42)# 1# (0 or l)# Notes Using Both API Ports. If both API ports are being used, both baud rates must be set to 9600 bps. , Page l-52 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 3eGu011 4uu-I- I uyl w~apiai al I I I I Ill ly I. ~y3~c111 rluyiaiiiiiwly it-r 11 Serial Port Parameters (TTY Settings) Parity Check Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 2# l# (0 or l)# Dbscription This address determines whether the DBS checks parity over serial port CN6. By default, parity checking is turned on. If parity checking is activated, select the parity count -- “Even” or “Odd” -- in FF12# 2# 2#. Serial Port CN6 is normally used for SMDR. Programming . FFl 2# 2# 1# (0 qr l)# O=Turns off the parity check. l=Turns on the parity check. Related Programming Odd/Even Parity: FFl 2# 2# 2# (0 or l)# Notes DBS-70-400 Checking Communications Parameters. If you later change this address value, be sure to check all Serial Port addresses -- FF12# 2# l# thru 9# -- to make sure they are set properly. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-53 Gnapter 1. system rrogrammtng p-1 ) sectron 400~Programming Odd/Even Parity Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 2# 2# (0 or l)# Description If parity checking for Serial Port CN6 was activated in FF12# 2# l#, this address (Odd/Even Parity) determines whether the check is based on an even count or an odd count. By default, the parity count is even. Programming FFl 2# 2# 2# (0 or l)# t O=Odd parity. l=E ven parity. Notes Page 1-54 Checking Communications Parameters. If you later change this address value, be sure to check all Serial Port addresses -- FF12# 2# l# thru 9# -- to make sure they are set properly. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Baud Rate Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 2# 3# (114)# Description Use this address to set data transmission speed (baud rate) between Serial Port CN6 and the peripheral equipment attached to it. By default, baud rate is set at 9600 bits per second. Programming I I FFl 2# 2# 3# (3;4)# 1=300 bps 2=1200 bps 3-4800 bps 4=9600 bps Notes Checking Communications Parameters. If you later change this address value, be sure to check all Serial Port addresses -- FFl 2# 2# I# thru 9# -- to make sure they are set properly. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-55 Stop Bit Length Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 2# 4# (103)# Description This address sets the length of the stop-bit parameter for transmitted data over Serial Port CN6. By default, the stop bit length is set to 1 bit. Programming FFl 2# 2# 4# (I- 3)# r l=l bit 2-1.5 b i t s 3=2 bits Notes Page 1-56 Checking Communications Parameters. If you later change this address value, be sure to check all Serial Port addresses -- FFl 2# 2# l# thru 9# -- to make sure they are set properly. DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 biiapiei I. r>ysittiii rruyrammlrig (rf I Data Length Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 2# 5# (3 or 4)# Description This address sets the length of the transmitted data string over Serial Port CN6. By default, data length is set to 8 bits. Programming FFl 2# 2# 5# (3 or 4)# t 3=7 bits 44 bits Notes Checking Communications Parameters. If you later change this address value, be sure to check all Serial Port addresses -- FFl 2# 2# 1# thru 9# -- to make sure they are set properly. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-57 j 3twu1 I 4uu-rrogrammlng SMDR Printing Mode 1: Outbound and Inbound Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 2# 6# (0 or l)# Description The SMDR data sent to Serial Port CN6 can be programmed to include both outbound and inbound calls, or it can be limited to outbound calls only. By default, both outbound and inbound calls are recorded. Programming FFl 2# 2# 6# (0 or 1 )# t O=Include outbound calls only. Hnclude both inbound and outbound calls. a Notes Bus Monitor Mode Interaction. If the DBS is switched to Bus Monitor mode for troubleshooting, the SMDR mode must be reactivated to resume SMDR output. The SMDR mode can be reactivated from any Attendant phone by pressing ON/OFF - #93 - ON/OFF. Page 1-58 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 SMDR Printing Mode 2: Long-Distance and Local Calls - Software Version: fii Versions Address: FFl 2# 2# 7# (0 or l)# Description The SMDR data sent to Serial Port CNh can be pro&rarnmed to include both local and long-distance calls. or it can be limited to !ong-distance calls only. By default, both local and long-distance calls are included. Programming . FFl 2# 2# 7# (0 or l)# U=Tnclude long-distance calls only. Mnclude local and long-distance calls. Notes DBS-70-400 Bus Monitor Mode Interaction. If the DBS is switched to Bus Monitor mode for troubleshooting, the SMDR mode must be reactivated to resume SMDR output. The SMDR mode can be reactivated from any Attendant phone by pressing ON/OFF - #93 - ON/OFF. DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-59 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming SMDR Printing Mode 3: Header Title Software Version: All Versions FFl 2# 2# 8# (0 or l)# Address: Description The SMDR data sent to Serial Port CN6 can be programmed to include a header title (inserted every 60 lines on the SMDR report); or the header title can be excluded from the report. By default, the header title is excluded. The header title identifies the SMDR information in each column on the report -- “Time,” “Duration,” “COW, etc. Programming I FFl 2# 2# 8# (0 or l)# t &Do not include the header title. l=Include the header title. Notes Bus Monitor Mode Interaction. If the DBS is switched to Bus Monitor mode for troubleshooting, the SMDR mode must be reactivated to resume SMDR output, The SMDR mode can be reactivated from any Attendant phone by pressing ON/OFF - #93 - ON/OFF. Page l-60 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 briaprer I. 3ysrem rrogrammlng (t-t1 ) wcnon 4uu-rwgramming Serial Port Flow Control (XON / XOFF) Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 2# 9# (0 or l)# Description If “XON/XOFF” is activated in this address, the DBS will stop the flow of data when the SMDR device’s memory buffer becomes full, and resume the flow when the buffer empties. “XON/XOFF” should be deactivated (default setting) if a flow control mechanism is present elsewhere in the interface (i.e., in the printer, or RTS and CTS lines). A flow control mechanism should always be present in order to prevent data from being lost during transmission. Programming FFl 2# 2# 9# (0 0’ I)# O=DBS does not use ‘6XON/XOFF’ (flow control is present elsewhere). l=DBS uses “XON/XOFF’. ’ Notes DBS-70-400 DBS Buffer Size. The size of the DBS buffer for SMDR is 8 kB. This is the maximum amount of data that the system can hold while the SMDR device is emptying its buffer. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-61 RAI Baud Rate Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 1.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 2# lO# (0 or l)# Description The baud rate used for the DBS’s internal RAI modem can be set to 300 or 1200 bps. By default, 300 bps is used for remote programming. Programming FFl 2# 2# lO# (0 or l)# f 0=300 bps 1=1200 bus Related Programming Remote Progamming ID Code: FFl 4# (0000-9999)# Notes Modem Card Requirement for Remote Programming. Remote programming is provided through a modem card installed on the SCC card. Two versions of the Remote Administration Interface (RAI) modem card are available: I&AI-A and RAI-B. The following table shows the transmission rate of each card, along with the SCC version with which it can be used: Table 14. RAI Modem Card Compatibility RAI Version/Part No. RAI-A (VB-43706) / RAI-B (VB-43707) Transmission Rate 300 bps 1 300 or 1200 bps SCC Compatibility SCC-A or SCC-B 1 SCC-B only Restrictions for Two-Cabinet Systems Using Voice Mail In dual-cabinet DES systems that have a Voice Mail system connected to an analog extension port, the RAI card’s baud rate must be set to 300 bps. See Technote 3 (April 1991) for complete information. RAI Data Communications Parameters. When using the lU1 card with CPC-A, set the Serial Port parameters as follows: Parity: None Data Length: 8 bits Stop Bit Length: 1 bit l l l In CPC-B configurations, the DBS will automatically set these parameters for the RAI card. Page l-62 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) PBX Settings PBX Access Code(s) Software Version: All VersionsAddress: FFl 2# 3# (l-8)# (O-999 or O*-99*)# Description Use this address to program PBX Access Codes for DBS systems installed behind a PBX or Centrex, with Toll Restriction (TRS) enabled. By default, no PBX Access Codes are created. Creating a PBX Access Code in this address will “activate” the PBX feature; the DBS will recognize the fist dialed digits as the PBX Access Code (separate from the outgoing phone number being dialed). Otherwise, the DBS will regard the Access Code as part of the outgoing phone number. . The DBS can use as many as 8 different PBX Access Codes. Each Access Code can be one, two, or three digits long. Programming To program a PBX Access Code . . . FFI 2# 3# (I-8)# (O-999 or O*-99*)# / t Access Code Required to Dial the PBX (*=wildcard; press FFll to enter it) Access Code Number To reset PBX Access Codes to default (*** no codes created) . . . FFl 2# 3# (l-8)# CONF ON/OFF Access Code Number f Related Programming Automatic Pause Position for PBX Access Codes: FFl 2# 3# (9- 18)# (I-3)# Trunk Port Type: FF2 (Trunk)# lO# (1 or 2)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-63 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Automatic Pause Position For PBX Access Codes Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 3# (9~18)# (l-3)## Description Use this address to insert a pause in the PBX Access Code (and in SSD and PSD codes) after the output of the first, second, or third digit. The pause ensures that the PBX has time to connect to the CO before the DBS sends the PBX any digits. If the pause is inadequate, the DBS will send digits to the PBX too quickly, causing the call attempt to fail. Different pause sequences can be assigned to each PBX Access Code. Programming To program an Automatic Pause . . . FFl 2# 3# (9-18)# (113)# f First Digit of PBX Access Code (see table below) Address No. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Page l-64 t 1 =Pause after 1 st digit 2=Pause after 2nd digit 3=Pause after 3rd digit Dialed Digit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) To clear an Automatic Pause from a PBX Access Code . . . FFl 2# 3# (9~18)# CONF ON/OFF t Pirst Digit of PBX Access Code (see table, previous page) Programming Examples Insetting a pause after PBX Access Code “9X” . . . To insert a pause after the PBX access code “9X” is dialed, enter this address (“X” represents the numbers O-9): ml 2# 3#/ 17# 2# This sequence will insert a pause between the “9X” and the rest of the dialed digits. For example, 91+PAUSE +404-555-5793 Inserting a pause after PBX Access Code “8” . . . To insert a pause after the PBX access code ?Y’ is dialed, enter this address: FFl2#3##16#1# This sequence will insert a pause between the “8” and the rest of the dialed digits. For example, 8+PAUSE+404-555-5793 Related Programming Automatic Pause Timer: FFl 3# 12# (0-15)# Automatic Pause for PBX Line: FF2 (Trunk)# 13# (0 or l)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-65 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FF1) External (UNA) Relay Control Ring Patterns For UNA Terminals (M, C and B) Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 4# l# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to set the ring pattern for incoming trunk calls sent to Universal Night Answer (UNA), where calls ring over a loudspeaker or amplifier. By default, the ring pattern is 1 second on / 3 seconds off. This address controls the UNA relay terminals labeled “M”, “C” and “B” on the DBS Connector Panel. A bell or tone device can be attached to these relay terminals to transmit incoming ring over the loudspeaker. See Section 300~Installation for more information about UNA. Programming FFl 2# 4# l# (0 or l)# f O=l second ON / 3 seconds OFF l=Continuous ring Related Programming CO Ring Assignments: FF4 addresses CO Ping Cycle Detection Timer: FFl 3# 15# (0-3)# Notes Port Assignments for UNA Ringing (FF4). With CPC-A and CPC-AII, use extension port 73 to assign ringing to UNA -- with CPC-B, use extension port 145. Page l-66 DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FIT j Section 400-Frogramming External Page Interface Control For Paging Groups Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 2# 4## (219)# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to activate external paging (e.g., loudspeaker installed in ceiling) for paging groups 00-04. Paging groups 05-07, although included in this address, cannot be activated for external paging. Internal paging, where a page is announced on the speakers of extension phones belonging to the page group dided, is activated with either setting. Proaramminrr Odnternal paging only. (see table below) Address Number (2-9) Page Group 2 3 00 01 4 5 02 03 6 7 8 9 04 05 06 07 l=Extemal and Internal paging (see table below). If External Paging is activated (“1” selected above) _. Audio Path Relay Contacts on DBS Connector Panel 20 activated 21 activated Audio path is . “M”. “B” and 22 activated “C” contacts are established via CN4 23 activated activated. (to which amplifier is connectedj. 24 activated Internal Paging Only (not ued with Extemai Paging) Related Programming Page Group Extensions: FF3 (ExtPort)# (18-25)# (0 or l)# Notes Puging Control. When a page is initiated, either zone paging or general paging occurs. For external paging, this is determined by the hardware connections to the DBS Connector Panel’s CN2 terminal block (see Section 300-Installation for instructions). For internal paging, this is determined by progamming (assigning extensions to page groups in FF3 ExtPort# 18-25#). Page Group 00. Pages to group 00 will be heard in all paging zones. D BS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-67 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Class of Service Extension Class Of Service Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher Address: FFl 2# 5# (1-8)# (l-21)# (0 or l)# Description This address allows you to define up to 8 different Classes of Service, by enabling or disabling the phone features of each. Up to 21 features are available (see table below). The definable Classes of Service are numbered 1-8. An additional Class of Service “0” automatically enables all features and cannot be changed. Classes of Service are assigned to extensions using FF3 ExtPort# 35# (0-8)#. Programming 7 . FFl 2# 5# (198)# (1121)# (0 or l)# /( + t( Class of Service Class of Service Features (see table below) &Off (disabled) ! =On (enabled) Note: All features are defaulted to “Off’ for Classes of Service l-8. Table l-5, Class of Service features I I I 1 I 1 Page 1-68 Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 Value (Feature Description) Dial Tone On/Off (#50) Head/Handset Exchange (#51) BGM On/Off (#53) 1 Absence Message Set/Reset (7 1) 1 Call Forward Set/Reset (72) I Do Not Disturb (73) 1 Station Lockout (74) 1 Park Access (75) . Park Pick Up (76) Meet Me Answer (77) UNA Pickup (78) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I -1 I I I I DBS-70-400 Section 400~Programming I 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Direct Pickup (79) Group Pickup (70) Tone/Voice Mode (1) Message Waiting Set (2) Busy Override (4) call waiting (3) Offhook Voice Announce (5) 1 Central Office Call Queuing (2) I forwarding for internal calls in CPC-B Related Programming Extension Class of Service Assignment: FF3 (ExtPort)# 3% Notes Interaction with Extension Class of Service Assignment. By default, every extension is assigned to Class of Service “0” (all 21 features are enabled). To restrict feature usage on the extension, assign another Class of Service (l-8) to it. Caution When Changing A Class of Service Feature Setting. If you disable a previously enabled feature for a Class of Service, make sure the feature is not currently being used on the extension(s) assigned that Class of Service. Otherwise, the extension user may not be able to deactivate the feature. For example, if you reset Feature No. 3 to “0” (disabled) while an extension has Background Music turned on, the extension user will not be able to turn it off. (If this occurs, re-enable Feature No. 3 for the Class of Service, then turn Backgound Music off at the extension -- then disable Feature No. 3 again.) Call Forward--Outside (21) Feature Expansion. Beginning with CPC-AI1 and CPC-B Version 7.0, any call (not just internal calls) can be call-forwarded to an outside number. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-69 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (F F1) Account Codes Verified Forced Account Codes Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-8 Version 3.1 or higher Address: FFl 2# 6# (10lOO)# l# (OOOl-9999)# Description Use this address to assign up to 100 four-digit verified account codes. Once the account codes are assigned, use address FE1 2# 6# (l-lOO)# 2# (0-7)# to assign a Toll Restriction Setting (TRS) value to the account code. Forcing the use of account codes, as well as system verification of the entered account code, can be enabled or disabled on individual extensions (see FF3 ExtI?ort# 5#). After verifying the entered account code, the DBS will allow or disallow an outgoing call based on the TRS type assigned to the account code. However, if the system does not find a match for the account code in this address, or if the TRS type restricts it, the user cannot make the call. Programming To assign an Account Code . . . FFl 2# 6# (l-l OO)# l# (OOOl -9999)# -f Account Code Entry Number t Account Code To clear an Account Code (reset to *** default) . . . FFl 2# W (11lOO)# l# CONF ON/OFF f Account Code Entry Number Programming Examples Assigning 1234 as Account Code 1 . . . To assign “1234” as Account Code 1, enter this address: FFl 2# 6# l# l# 1234# Page l-70 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400~Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Assigning 9999 as Account Code 100 . . . To assign “9999” as Account Code 100, enter this address: FFl 2# 6#! low l# 9999# Related Programming Toll Restriction For Verified Forced Account Codes: FFl 2# 6# (l- 1 OO)## 2# (O-7)# Forced Account Codes: FF3 (ExtPort)# 5# (0 or l)# Toll Resttiction Settings: FF7 addresses Notes Forced Unverij’ied Account Codes. With CPC-AII and CPC-B versions prior to 6.0, Unverified Account Codes can only be used on a voluntary basis -- Forced Unverified is not available. However, beginning with Version 6.0, Forced Unverified Account Codes can be used. See FF3 (ExtPort)## 5# (0-2)# for more information. TRS Interaction. The default TRS type for Verified Forced Account Codes is “0,” which generally allows intercom calling only. Therefore, if you assign an account code but do not assign a TRS value to it, the Account Code will restrict outside dialing. Assignment Restriction. “0000” cannot be assigned as an Account Code. SMDR Format. In the SMDR report, the Account Code that was used to access the CO trunk will appear starting in position 70 of the call record line. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - !ssued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-71 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Toll Restriction For Verified Forced Account Codes Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher Address: FFl 2# 6# (l-lOO)# 2# (017)# Description Use this address to assign toll restriction (TRS) types to Verified Forced Account Codes. A caller who enters the account code will be restricted by the TRS type assigned to the acccurzt code (not the TRS type assigned to the exterdion). Programming 1 FFl 2# 6# (1.f)O)# 2#‘,$ Account Code Entry Number TRS Types O-7 Default: TRS Type 0 Related Programming Forced Account Codes: FF3 (ExtPort)# 5# (0, 1 or 2)# Toll Restriction Settings: FF7 addresses Notes TRS Interaction. The default TRS type for Verified Forced Account Codes is “0,” which generally allows intercom calling only. Therefore, if you assign an account code but do not assign a TRS value to it, the code will restrict outside dialing. Page l-72 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Flexible Function Screens Flexible Function Screen Soft-Key Assignment Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 6.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 7# l# (Screen)# (SoftKey)# (Feature)# Description Use this program to create up to 15 menu screens for large-display phones. Each screen can contain up to 10 feature codes (one feature code per soft key). “Soft keys” are the 10 buttons located on the left and right sides of the LCD display window on the large-display phone (see figure below). Soft key 1 is the top left button; soft key 2 is beneath it; and so on. When creating these flexible function screens, you are programming the soft keys to perform one of the following special functions while the screen is displayed: * One-touch access to directories. Pressing the soft key will display a directory of extension numbers, Personal Speed-Dial numbers, or System Speed-Dial numbers. One-touch initiation of a specific feature. The soft keys can also execute any feature operation code except for “Conference” and “Flash”, which already have their own fixed keys on the phone. After the flexible function screens are built, you can assign them to display during different call states (phone idle, intercom dial tone, CO dial tone, during a CO call, etc.), using another programming address -- FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# (Screen)#. l l When deciding what feature codes to assign to the soft keys on the screens, keep in mind that the DBS system already has 24 preprogrammed menus (see Appendix A) that can also be assigned to display during different call states. Figure l-l. Soft ke lumbering on large-d&&y phones KeyI - DND OVERRIDE - Key 6 TAXBACK-KW7 P8D - K e y 8 Key3 a 8GM MulE Key4 0 #)RlAMD S S D - K e y 9 Key2 - 1 Key5 0 C O N F L O C K O U T - by 10 DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-73 Chapter 1. System Programminq (FFI) Section 400-Programming Programming FFl 2# 7# l# (2539)# (l-lO)# (xxxxxx)# t Screen Number: ’ 25=Flex.Func. Screen 1 26=Flex.Func. Screen 2 27=Flex.Func. Screen 3 28=Flex.Func. Screen 4 29=Flex.Func. Screen 5 30=Flex.Func. Screen 6 3 l=Flex.Func. Screen 7 32=Flex.Func. Screen 8 33=Flex.Func. Screen 9 34=Flex.Func. Screen 10 35=Flex.Func. Screen ! 1 36=Flex.Func. Screen 12 37=Flex.Func. Screen 13 38=Flex.Func. Screen 14 39=Flex.Func. Screen 15 Feature Code Soft Key Number (see figure, previous page) (see table below Table l-6. Feature codes for Flexible Function Screen soft keys Code to be assigned to soft key (FFll enters an asterisk *) (FF12 enters a pound sign #) Feature Absence Message Account Code Answer Key Any Key Attendant Park Hold BGM (Background Music) On/Off Busy Override Call Forward--Outside 71 PF12 7 (if using SLT or DSLT) or AUTO FF12 (all other phones) PFll 1 PROG PROG XXXXXX Note: The “Any Key” feature allows you to store digits other than extension numbers, CO trunks, or feature codes. For example, Any Key can be used to store an account code or a Voice Mail password. 75 (00-09) FF12 53 PROG PROG 4 723 ’ (CPC-AH/B versions prior to 7.0) Page 1-74 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Code to be assigned to soft key Feature Call Forward Call Forward--All Calls Call Forward--Busy/No Answer Call Forward--Busy Call Forward--No Answer Call Park Call Pickup Call Waiting Caller ID Log Day Mode Day/Night/Night:! Mode Toggle (CPC-AH/B Version 7.0 or higher) Dial Tone Off DND (Do Not Disturb) DP to DTMF Signal Conversion DSS/BLF Key (internal calls) Extension Directory Extension Lockout Group Call Pickup Headset Intercom Key Internal Dial Tone MC0 or ML Keys Meet-Me Answer Message Waiting Answer Mute Night Mode Night 2 mode (FFll enters an asterisk *) (FF12 enters a pound sign #) 72 720 721 722 724 Note: Beginning with CPC-AIL/B Version 7.0, you can call-forward to an outside phone number. Use an existing PSD or SSD code as the destination phone number, with a “CX-PhoneNo.” format (where C is the CONF key, and X is l-6 or 9 for trunk group 8 l-86 or 89). 75 79 PROG PROG 3 FFll 6 FF12 521 FF12 520 Note: The FF key LED will be off during Day mode: red during Night mode: and green during Night 2 mode. FFl2 50 ’ 73 PROG PROG FFl 1 -or- PROG PROG FF 12 PROG (lo-69 or 100-699) 900002 74 70 FF12 51 FF12 8 FF12 50 (8 1-86 or 89) Note: See “ML/MC0 Separation” (FF3 ExtPort# 44#) to determine which type of key is available with your software. 77 AUTO REDIAL FFll FF12 FF 12 52 (CPC-AII/B versions prior to 7.0) FFl2 522 (CPC-AU/B Version 7.0 or higher) FF12 523 (CPC-AII/B Version 7.0 or higher) DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1175 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) I Feature Offhook Voice Announce Offhook Voice Announce Answer Page Park Hold PSD (Personal Speed Dial) Directory PSD (Personal Speed Dial) Number Release Reminder Save Number Redial Access Save Number Redial Set SSD (System Speed Dial) Directory SSD (System Speed Dial) Number Tl Alarms -Frame Loss Red Alarm Signal Loss Slips Sync Loss Yellow Alarm Talkback Tone/Voice Calling Transfer Trunk Group Selection (same as “MC0 or ML Keys”) Trunk Queuing Trunk Selection UN.4 Pickup Voice Mail One-Touch Access Code to be assigned to soft key (FFll enters an asterisk *) (FF12 enters a pound sign #I PROG PROG 5 FFll 3 FFt2 (00-07) 75 900000 AUTO (90-99 or 900-909) FFll 2 FF12 4 AUTO FFll AUTO AUTO FFll 90000 1 AUTO (00-89 or 000- 199) (MasZrorSlave) (101 or 121) FF12 (103 or 123) FF12 (104 or 124) FF12 (102 or 122) FF12 (105 or 125) FF12 (107 or 127) FF12 FFll 3 PROG PROG 1 PROG PROG PROG (81-86 or 89) PROG PROG 2 (0 l-64) PROG AUTO NNN (XXX or AUTO SSD/PSD)# (CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher) 78 f VM Pilot Number Press the # key to register the string. Note: The password (if used) can be 1 to 3 digits long. If the password is over 3 digits, it must be assigned as a speed-dial code (be sure to include an ending pound # sign after the password when creating the speed-dial code). Voice Mail Transfer Password (optional) PROG AUTO AUTO NNN (NNN=VM Pilot Number) Page 1-76 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FF:) Section 400~Programming Related Programming Flex.Func. Screen Text: FFl 2# 7# 2# (Screen)++ (Key)# (Text)# Flex.Func. Screen Default: FF1 2# 7# 3# (Screen)++ (0 or l)# Flex.Func. Screens Default (All): FFl 2# 7# 4#I (0 or 1)k Display Screens During Call States: FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33Hf (Screen)# Notes FFll and FF12 in the Feature Codes. The * and # phone keys are used as movement keys (for scrolling through addresses) while in programming mode. Therefore, when programming feature codes for soft keys, FFl 1 and FF12 are used instead to represent * and # (FFll enters *; FF12 enters #). The phone will not display the symbol when you press FFll or FF12, but it will register * or # as part of the feature code. Initial Displays. The 15 flexible function screens are blank by default. Displaying Feature Codes. To display an existing feature code assignment for a soft key, use the same address (FFl 2# 7# l# Screen# SoftKey#). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-77 J~LLIUI I 4uwr I 0y1 al I II I III iy Flexible Function Screen Text Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 6.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 7# 2# (Screen)# (SoftKey)# (Text)# Description Use this program to create the text that identifies the soft keys on a flexible function screen for large-display phones. The text for each soft key can be up to 8 characters long. Use a DSW’2 console (with alphabetic keys) or the remote programming mode on a large-display phone (scroll through the alphabetic characters on the digital keypad) to assign the text in this address. Programming FFl 2# 7# 2# (2539)# (l-1 0)# (xxxxxxxx)# _ Screen Number: 25=Flex.Func. Screen 1 26=FlexFunc. Screen 2 27=Flex.Func. Screen 3 28=Flex.Func. Screen 4 29=Flex.Func. Screen 5 30=Flex.Func. Screen 6 31=Flex.Func. Screen 7 32=Flex.Func. Screen 8 33=Flex.Func. Screen 9 34=Flex.Func. Screen 10 35=Flex.Func. Screen 11 36=Flex.Func. Screen 12 37=Flex.Func. Screen 13 38=Flex.Func. Screen 14 39=Flex.Func. Screen 15 f Soft Key Number (see Figure l- 1 on page l-7 1) t Text (up to 8 char.) Related Programming Flex.Func. Screen for Soft Keys: FFl 2# 7# l# (Screen)# (Key)# (Code)# Flex.Func. Screen Default: FFl 2# 7# 3# (Screen)++ (0 or l)# Flex.Func. Screens Default (All): FFl 2# 7# 4# (0 or l)# Display Screens During Call States: FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# (Screen)# Page 1-78 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400~Programming Flexible Function Screen Default Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 6.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 7# 3# (Screen)# (0 or l)# Description Use this program to reinstate individual flexible function screens to the default value (blank: no features assigned to soft keys). Pr.ogramming FFI 2# 7# 3# (2539)# (0 or l)# Screen Number: 25=Flex.Func. Screen 1 26=Flex.Func. Screen 2 27=Flex.Func. Screen 3 28=Flex.Func. Screen 4 29=Flex.Func. Screen 5 3O=Flex.Func. Screen 6 3 1 =Flex.Func. Screen 7 32=Flex.Func. Screen 8 33=Flex.Func. Screen 9 34=Flex.Func. Screen 10 35=Flex.Func. Screen 11 36=Flex.Func. Screen 12 37=Flex.Func. Screen 13 38=Flex.Func. Screen 14 39=Flex.Func. Screen 15 t O=Do not rehrn to default setting. I=Rerurn to default setting. Related Programming Flex.Func. Screen for Soft Keys: FFl 2# 7# l# (Screen)# (Key)## (Code)++ Flex.Func. Screen Text: FFl 2# 7# 2# (Screen)# (Key)## (Text)# Flex.Func. Screens Default (All): FFl 2# 7# 4# (0 or l)# Display Screens During Call States: FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# (Screen)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-79 Section QOO-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Flexible Function Screens Default (All) Sofhrvare Version: CPC-AII and CPC-B, Version 6.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 7# 4# (0 or l)# Description Use this program to reinstate all 15 flexible function screens to the default value (blank; RO features assigned to soft keys). Programming FFI 2# 7# 4# (0 or l)# O=Do not return to default setting. l=Return to default setting. Related Programming Flex.Func. Screen for Soft Keys: FFl 2# 7# l# (Screen)# (Key)# (Code)# Flex.Func. Screen Text: FFl 2# 7# 2# (Screen)# (Key)# (Text)# Flex.Func. Screen Default: FFl 2# 7# 3# (Screen)# (0 or l)# Display Screens During Call States: FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# (Screen)# . Page l-80 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Caller ID Automatic DISA Automatic DISA Callers Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-8, Version 6.1 or higher Address: FFl 2# 8# (l-lO)# (PhoneNo.)# Dehcription Use this program to assign up to 10 phone numbers for the Caller ID Automatic DISA (Direct Inward System Access) feature. When a caller (e.g., company salesman) calls from one of the phone numbers assigned in this address, the trunk receiving the call will automatically switch to DISA without requiring the caller to enter an ID Code. The DISA feature gives the caller access to inside features normally available only to another extension. Note: In order to use the Automatic DISA feature, the DBS system must have a Caller ID package installed. See Caller ID Installation and Operation (Sectiun 510) for more information. Programming I FFl 2# 8# (l-lO)# (PhoneNo.)# Phone Number Assignment Notes I f + Caller’s Phone Number (up to 10 digits) Matching The Caller’s Phone Number. The caller’s phone number entered in this address must exactly match the phone number received by Caller ID (usually 10 digits). Enabling DISA on Trunks. If the Caller ID Automatic DISA feature is used, do not enable DISA on any trunks (see FF2 Trunl# 1 l#). The Caller ID feature will automatically switch the trunk to DISA based on the originating phone number. Hardware Requirement For DZSA. MFR Card VB-4343 1 is required for Caller ID Automatic DTSA, so that the system can interpret DTMF tones entered via the DISA connection. DES-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-81 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi) Door Phones A “Door Phone” (also called “Door Box”) is an intercom with a single button, installed on building entrance doors, that allows visitors to announce their presence by pressing the button. It is used with a Door Opener (not sold by Paruzsonic), which is an electronic lock that can be unlocked from an extension phone inside. The DBS supports two types of door phone connections -- one to trunk ports (using a VB-43701 Door Phone Adaptor) and the other to digital extension ports (using a VB-43711 Door Phone Adaptor). The extension port connection is supported beginning with CPC-AIIICPC-B Version 7.0, and is controlled by the FFl 2# P# addresses below. Door Phone Extensions Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# l# (ExtPort)# Description Use this address to establish the extension ports that are connected to door phones. Up to 4 door phones cam be assigned (one per extension port). Programming I FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 1# (3-72 or 39144)# t Door Phone Number (l-4) t Extension Port CPC-AII: 3-72 CPC-B: 3- 144 NOTE: Do not assign Extension Port 1 or 2 to a door phone. Related Programming Door Phone Access Code Required: FFl 2# l# 40# (0 or l)# Door Phone Ring Assignments: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 2# (ExtPort)# (0 or I)# Door Opener Access Code: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 3# (0000-9999)# Door Phone Tone Type: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 4## (0 or l)# Door Phone Ring Timer: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 5# (0-15)# Door Phone Ring Pattern: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 6# (0-5)# Door Opener Relay Timer: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 7# (0-5)# Extension Numbers: FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)# Page 1-82 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400~Programming Notes Reset Requirement. After setting FFl 2# 9# addresses, activate the door phones by unplugging them from their extension ports, then plugging them back in. Restiictions for Door Phones: l l l l l l l l * l Door phones cannot be Attendants (ports 1 or 2). Door phones cannot be included in a conference call. Door phones cannot be members of a hunt group or call coverage group. Door phone calls are not subject to barge-ins (Busy Override), regardless of the extension’s program settings. It is not possible to Call Forward to a door phone. It is not possible to Auto-Redial to a door phone. Door phone calls have the same priority as intercom extension calls. All calls to a door phone are established as voice calls, regardless of the extension’s program settings. The DTMF path is disabled during a door phone call. When the extension user dials the access code to unlock the door, the visitor will not hear the DTMF digits. Calling a Door Phone from an Internal Extension. Any extension can establish a call to a door phone by dialing the door phone’s extension number. Extension numbers can be assigned to door phone ports using the ‘Extension Numbers” address, FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)#. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-83 Door Phone Ring Assignments Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-6, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 2# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to determine which extension(s) will ring when a door phone caller initiates a call. This applies to door phones connected to digital extension ports only (,not trunk ports). It is possible to assign several or all extensions to ring for a door phone call. Programming I FFl 2# 9# fl-4)# 2# (l-72 or l-144)# (0 or l)# f Door Phone Number (l-4) 4 Extension Port CPC-AII: l-72 CPC-B: l- 144 + O=Do not ring. l=Ring. Related Programming Door Opener Access Code Required: FFl 2# l# 40## (0 or l># Door Phone Extensions: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)## l# (ExtPort)# Door Opener Access Code: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 3# (0000-9999)# Door Phone Tone Type: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 4# (0 or l)# Door Phone Ring Timer: .FFl 2# 9# (l-4)## 5# (0-15)# Door Phone Ring Pattern: FFl 2# 9# ( l-4)# 6# (0-5)# Door Opener Relay Timer: FF1 2# 9# (l-4)# 7# (0-5)# Notes Power-Cycling Requirement. ln order for changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. Programming Restriction. Programming an extension to ring for a door phone call must be performed from another extension. Interaction With SLT Phones. An SLT phone (no speaker) can receive a door phone call (same ring pattern as a normal intercom call). Interaction With ML Keys. If the extension is programmed as an ML key, it can receive a door phone call while the extension is on another call (the phone will “buzz”j. However, the door phone call will not transfer to another Page 1-84 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400~Programming extension, even if the phone is programmed to transfer (the phone will continue to buzz, until the user picks it up). Restrictions for Door Phone Calls: l l l l l Door phones cannot be included in a conference call. Door phones cannot be members of a hunt group or call coverage group. Door phone calls are not subject to barge-in (Busy Override), regardless of the extension’s program settings. Door phone calls have the same priority as intercom extension calls. The DTMF path is disabled during a door phone call. When the extension user dials the access code to unlock the door, the visitor will not hear the DTMF digits. Receiving a Door Phone Call. When a visitor presses the door phone button, an intercom call is generated automatically to the extension(s) assigned to ring for a door phone call. l l DBS-70-400 If the extension is on-hook, the visitor will hear ringing tones. The tones will stop when the extension user answers the door phone call. If the extension is busy, the door phone call will ring in as a normal call (for example, the extension user will hear a “beep” in the receiver, indicating another call) -- and the visitor will hear silence. When the extension user hangs up, a call will be established between the door phone and the extension (it will either ring or establish an intercom voice path, depending on the extension’s programming). DBS Manual - issued 8/t/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-85 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. system rrogrammlng (I-Fl) Door Opener Access Code Software Version: CPC-Ail and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 3# (OOOO-9999)# Description Use this address to establish a 4-digit door opener access code that can be entered on any extension phone to unlock the door. This applies to door phones connected to digital extension ports only (not trunk ports). NOTE: To require the use of the access code to unlock the door, address FF12# l# 40# must be enabled. Programming I FFl 2# 9# (114)# 3f (OOOO-9999)# f Door Phone Number (l-4) t Door Opener Access Code Default: 9999 Related Programming Door Opener Access Code Required: FFl 2# l# 40# (0 or l)# Door Phone Ring Assignments: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 2# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)# Door Opener Relay Timer: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 7# (O-5)# Notes Unlocking the D.oor With the Access Code. If Access Code NNNN is established in this address, and “Door Opener Access Code Required” is enabled, the extension user receiving the door phone call can press #3 NNNN l (while still engaged in the call) to unlock the door. Or, from any other extension not engaged in a door phone call, press ON/OFF #3 XXX NNNN * (where “XXX” is the extension number assigned to the door phone port). Unlocking the Door Without the Access Code. If an access code is not established (and its use is not required), extension users can still unlock the door by pressing #3* (if engaged in a door phone call) -- or, ON/OFF #3 XXX l (from another extension). Setting the Amount of Time the Door Will Remain Unlocked Use the “Door Opener Relay Timer” address (FF12# 9# l-4# 7#) to set the number of seconds the door will remain open after it is unlocked. Page 1-86 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 ---..-.. .-- -~ .-........, v.,y .“. . . -,-.-... . .-= .- . . . . . . . . . . Door Phone Tone Type Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# M (0 or l)# Description This address specifies the type of tone heard by the cal,led extension when a visitor presses the door phone button. This appiies to door phones connected to digital extension ports only (not trunk ports). Prdgramming 1 FFI 2# 9# (I-4)# 4# (0 or I)# f Door Phone Number (l-4) 4 I Tone Type: (heard by extension) O=Slow chime l=Fast chime Related Programming Door Phone Ring Assignments: FFI 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 2# (Extl?ort)# (0 or l)# Door Phone Ring Timer: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 5# (C- 15)# Door Phone Ring Pattern: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 6# (0-W Notes DBS-70-400 Reset Requirement. Jf changing the Tone Type setting, activate the change by unplugging the door phone from its port and plugging it back in. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-87 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Door Phone Ring Timeout Timer Software Version: CPChl and CPC-6, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 5# (O-15)# Description This address sets the amount of time (in seconds) that a door phone will ring an extension before it goes on-hook (extension stops ringing). This applies to door phones connected to digital extension ports only (not trunk ports). If the door phone caller re-initiates the call before this Timer is up, the Timer will automatically reset and the extension will begin ringing again. Programming I FFl 2# ,,%,, 5# (Oi15p Door Phone Number U-4) . Ring Timer Default: 3 (20 seconds) (see table below) Table l-7. Door phone ring timer values Setting 1 Value 0 1 5 seconds 1 10 seconds 2 15 seconds 3 20 seconds I 4 5 6 25 seconds 30 seconds 35 seconds Setting V a l u e 8 45. seconds 9 1 50 seconds 10 55 seconds 11 60 seconds 12 13 14 65 seconds 70 seconds 75 seconds I Related Programming Door Phone Ring Pattern: FFl 217 9# (DoorPhone)# 6# (0-5)# Notes Page 1-88 Reset Requirement. If changing the Ring Timer setting, activate the change by unplugging the door phone from its port and plugging it back in. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Section 400-Programming Door Phone Ring Pattern Software Version: CPC-AlI and CPC-8, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 6# (O-5)# Description This address specifies the ring pattern heard at the extension receiving a door phone call. This applies to door phones connected to digital extension ports only (not trunk ports). This address specifies the number of seconds between rings (4 seconds by ’ default). The ring itself has a fixed duration of approximately 3 seconds. Programming I FFl 2#74)# 6# (Of)# Door Phone Number (l-4) Number of Seconds Between Rings: O=Rings one time only (no repeat ringing) 1=4 seconds between rings 2=6 seconds between rings 3=8 seconds between rings 4=10 seconds between rings 5=12 seconds between rings Related Programming Door Phone Ring Timer: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 5# (0-15)# Notes DBS-70-400 Reset Requirement. If changing the Ring Pattern setting, activate the change by unplugging the door phone from its port and plugging it back in. DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1 -a9 Door Opener Relay Timer Sofhnfare V&ion: CPC-Alland CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 7# (*5)# Description Use this address to determine the number of seconds a “buzzing” (unlocked) door will remain unlocked for the visitor to enter the building (4 seconds by default). This applies to door phones connected to digital extension ports only (not trunk ports). This Relay Timer begins immediately after an extension enters the appropriate codes (#3*, #3 NNNN *, #3 XXX *, or #3 Xxx NNNN *) to unlock the door. Programming I FFl2#!3#/ -4)#3#/5)# Door Phone Number U-4) Number of Seconds Door Will Remain Open 0=2 seconds 1=4 seconds (default) 2=6 seconds 3=8 seconds 4=10 seconds 5=12 seconds . Related Programming Door Opener Access Code Required: FFl 2# l# 40## (0 or l># Door Opener Access Code: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 3# (0000-9999)# Page I-90 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi j Section 400~Programming System Timers Automatic Night Mode Start Time Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 3# 1# (OOOO-2359)# Description Set the time when the DBS will automatically switch from Day to Night mode. Use the 24-hour military time format (e.g.. enter “1700” for 5:00 pmj. You can program trunks to ring incoming calls at different extensions when the system is in Night mode (see FF4 addresses). And different TRS types can be programmed to be used during Night mode (see FF8 addresses). NOTE: Starting with Version 7.0 of the CPC-AII and CPC-B cards, a second Night mode is also available -- see FFl 3# 30# for more information. Programming To set the Automatic Night Mode start time . . . FFI 3# I# (OOOO-2359)# t Night Mode Start Time (in 24-hour military format) To clear the start time (disable Automatic Night Mode) . . . I--- FFl 3# 1# CONF ON/OFF Related Programming Time Setting: FFl I# 2# HHMM# Automatic Day Mode Start Time: FFl 3# 29# HHMM# Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time: FFl 3# 30# HHMM# CO Ring Assignments: FF4 addresses Toll Restriction: FF8 addresses Notes DBS-70-400 System Clock. The Automatic Night Mode start time depends on the DBS system clock being set correctly. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-91 bnaprer I. 3ystw11 rrogrammlrly (rr I 1 3ec11on 4uu-rrogrammlng NIGHT Key Operation. If only one of the Auto Mode Start Times is set, the Attendant NIGHT key can be used to manually switch to another mode. For instance, if Night mode has been activated automatically, the Attendant can press the NIGHT key to go into Day mode. (However, the Attendant must wait at least 3 minutes after the mode is automatically activated, before using the NIGHT key to switch the mode again.) In CPC-AU/B versions prior to 7.0, if both Auto Day and Auto Night Mode Start Times are set, the Attendant NIGHT key cannot be used to manually switch modes. (However, it will work in Version 7.0 or higher; or press #520 to toggle between Day, Night and Night 2 modes.) SUGGESTION (for versions prior to 7.0): Set only the Auto Night Mode Start Time, so that the DBS will automatically switch to Night mode each night -- and each morning the Attendant phone user can press the NIGHT key to manually switch to Day mode. Required Intervak Between Auto Day and Night Modes. If you set both Auto Mode Start Times, it is recommended that the start times differ by at least 1 hour. Page l-92 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Attendant Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 3# 2# (O-12)# Description This timer determines how long a trunk call can be held by an Attendant phone before it will recall (20 seconds by default). Programming I FFl 3# 2# (0112)# t Attendant Hold Recall Timer setting for CO calls Default: 1 (20 seconds) (see table below) Table l-8. Attendant Hold Recall Timer values for CO calls 7 . Setting 0 2 3 5 t I I 6 7 8 9 Value No recall i 20 seconds I 40 seconds 1 60 seconds 1 80 seconds 100 seconds 120 seconds 1I 140 seconds 1I 160 seconds 1 180 seconds 1 200 seconds 1 220 seconds 240 seconds I 1 1 1 I t 11 12 Related Programming Attendant Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls: F’Fl 3# 22# (0-12)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-93 Section 400-Programming Chapter I. System Programming (FFi) Extension Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl W 3#! (O-12)# Description This timer determines how long a trunk call remains on hold at an extension before it recalls (starts ringing the extension again; 140 seconds by default). Programming FFl 3# 3# (092)# Extension Hold Recall Timer setting for CO calls Default: 7 (140 seconds) (see table below) Table l-9. Extension Hold Recall Timer values for CO calls Related Programming Attendant Call Reversion Timer for c.0 Calls: FFl 3# lO# (0-12)# Notes Recall Treatment for CO Calls. If a trunk recall is unanswered, it will revert to the Attendant phone after ringing for the amount of time set in the Attendant Call Reversion Timer. Page 1-94 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls Sofhrvare Version: All Versions Address: FFl 3## 4# (0112)# Description When an Attendant phone transfers a trunk call to an extension or hunt group, the transferred call will recall to the Attendant if it is not answered. This timer determines how long a transferred trunk call will go unanswered before it recalls (20 seconds by default). Programming I 1 FFl 3# 4# (0112)# t Attendant Transfer Recall Timer setting for CO calls Default: 1 (20 seconds) (see table below) Table I-10. Attendant Transfer Recall Timer values for CO calls Setting 0 I 2 3 5 6 7 Value No recall / 20 seconds I 1 40 seconds 1 60 seconds 1 I 1 100 seconds 120 seconds 140 seconds / 160 seconds 1 180 seconds I200 seconds 1 220 seconds 1 240 seconds I I 12 Related Programming Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Calls: FFl 3# 24f# (0-l2)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-95 Gnapter 1. system rrogrammlng [i-i-i ) Extension Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls Software Version: All Versions Address: FFI 3## 5# (O-12)# Description When an extension transfers a trunk call to another extension or to a hunt group, the transferred call will recall to the extension if it is not answered. This timer determines how long a transferred trunk call will go unanswered before it recalls (140 seconds by default). Programming r FFl 3# 5# (0112)# Extension Transfer Recall Timer setting for CO calls Default: 7 (140 seconds) (see table below) Table I-l.!. Extension Transfer Recall Timer values for CO calls I I Setting 0 I 1 t- 3 4 Value , No recall I 20 seconds I 1 60 seconds 1 80 seconds 1 100 seconds 1 120 seconds 1 140 seconds II 160 seconds 1 180 seconds 1 200 seconds 1 220 seconds I 240 seconds I I 40 seconds I I I 6 I 12 Related Programming Attendant Call Reversion Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 10# (O-l 2)# Notes Recall Treatrnentfor CO Calls. If a trunk recall is unanswered, it will revert to the Attendant phone after ringing for the amount of time set in the Attendant Call Reversion Timer. Page 1-96 DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 3#I 6# (O-12)# Description Programming When an Attendant phone transfers a trunk call to a hunt group, the transferred call will recall to the Attendant if it is not answered, This timer determines how long the call will go unanswered before it recalls (20 seconds by default). I FFI 3# 6#/ CO-12)# Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer setting Default: 1 (20 seconds) (see table below) Table l-12. Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer values for CO calls Setting 0 Value i No recall I 20 seconds 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 DBS-70-400 i 40 seconds 1 60 seconds ’ 80 seconds 100 seconds 120 seconds 140 seconds 160 seconds 180 seconds 200 seconds I 220 seconds 1 240 seconds DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-97 Extension Hunt Group Recall Timer Software Version: All Versions A d d r e s s : FFl 3## 7# (O-12)# Description When an extension transfers a trunk call to a hunt group, the transferred call will recall to the extension if it is not answered. This timer determines how long a transferred trunk call will go unanswered before it recalls (140 seconds by default). Programming I FFl 3# 7# (0112)# Extension Hunt Group Recall Timer setting Default: 7 (140 seconds) (see table below) Table I-13. Extensizyz Hunt Group Recall Timer values for CO calls Setting 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 Page l-98 Value No recall 1 20 seconds 1 40 seconds 60 seconds 80 seconds 100 seconds 120 seconds 140 seconds 160 seconds 180 seconds 200 seconds 1 220 seconds 1 240 seconds DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400~Programming Attendant Park Hold Recall Timer Software Version: Ali Versions Address: FFl 3# 8# (0112)# Description An Attendant phone can use up to 10 call park numbers (00-09) to hold trunk calls. These park numbers can be assigned to an FF key or accessed by placing a call on hold, then dialing 7500-7509. Anyone can pick up the call by dialing 7600-7609. This address determines how long a parked call will be held before it recalls (20 seconds by default). Programming 1 FFl 3# 8# (0912)# Attendant Park Hold Recall Timer setting Default: 1 (20 seconds) (see table below) Table l-14. Attenaht Park HoM Recall Timer values Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 DBS-70-400 Value No recall 20 seconds 40 seconds , 60 seconds 80 seconds 100 seconds 120 seconds 140 seconds 160 seconds 180 seconds 200 seconds 220 seconds 240 seconds DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-99 _..I .I. .- -, ----.. . ._ ._.... . _ . -_..-.. .__ ..I........._ Extension Park Hold Recall Timer Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 3# 9# (0112)# Description If an extension parks a trunk call, the parked call will recall (start ringing at the extension) if it is not picked up. This address determines how long the parked call remains on hold before it recalls (140 seconds by default). Programming 1 I FFl 3# 9# (0912)# Extension Park Hold Recall Timer setting Default: 7 (140 seconds) (see table below) Table I-15. Extension Park Hold Recall Timer values 11 12 220 seconds 240 seconds Related Programming Attendant Call Reversion Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# lO# (0-12)# Notes Recall Treatment for CO Calls. If a trunk recall is unanswered. it will revert to the Attendant phone after ringing for the amount of time set in the Attendant Call Reversion Timer. Page1-100 DBS Manual- Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Attendant Call Reversion Timer for CO Calls Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 3# lO# (O-l 2)# Description By default, the DBS will ultimately revert unanswered trunk recalls on extensions to the Attendant phone. This timer determines how long an unanswered trunk recall will ring at the last possible answering position (extension) before it reverts to the Attendant phone (180 seconds by default). This applies to trunk calls in the following states: l l l Programming Hold recalls that are unanswered on the holding extension. Transfer recalls that are unanswered by the transferring extension. Park recalls that are unanswered by the parking extension. I FFl 3# lO# (O-1 2)# 4 Attendant Call Reversion Timer setting Default: 9 (180 seconds) (see table below) Table l-16. Attendant Call Reversion Timer values L I Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Value No recall j 20 seconds 1 40 seconds 60 seconds 80 seccnds 100 seconds 120 seconds 140 seconds 1 160 seconds 180 seconds 200 seconds 220 seconds 240 seconds 1 Related Programming Extension Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 3# (0-12)# Extension Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 5# (0-12)# Extension Park Hold Recall Timer: FFl 3# 9# (0-12)# Night Mode Restiction. This feature is not available when the DBS is in “Night” or “Night 2” mode. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-101 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl ) Unsupervised Conference Timer Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 3## ll# (0115)# Description This address determines how long a conference call can continue between two trunks after the DBS extension drops out of the conference (10 minutes by default). When the timer expires, the DBS will automatically disconnect the conferenced trunks. This timer also determines how long outbound trunk calls made through DISA can last. Programming FFI 3# 11# (0115)# f Unsupervised Conference Timer setting Default: 2 (10 minutes j (see table below) Table l-17. Unsupervised Conference Timer values Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 . Value Unlimited (DBS will not disconnect the two conferenced trunks) 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 20 minutes 25 minutes 30 minutes 35 minutes 40 minutes 45 minutes 50 minutes 55 minutes 60 minutes 65 minutes 70 minutes 75 minutes Related Programming Unsupervised Trunk Conference: FF2 (Trunk)# 16# (0 or l)# Unsupervised Conference: FF3 (ExtPort)# 13# (0 or l)# Page l-102 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 4uu-rrogramming Uiapter 1. system Progfammrng (FFl) Automatic Pause Timer Software Version: All Versions Address: FFI 3# 12# (0-15)# Description When users program their phones with PBX access codes, Personal Speed Dial numbers, or System Speed Dial numbers, they can insert pause(s) in these numbers (by pressing the REDIAL key for each pause) so the system will dial the numbers correctly. This address determines the length of each pause inserted by the REDIAL programming key (3.5 seconds by default). Programming FFl 3# 12# (0115)# f Automatic Pause Timer setting Default: 7 (3.5 seconds) (see table below) Table 1-18. Automatic Pause Timer values s I--+ I+I It+10 E= 1.5 seconds 2 seconds 2.5 seconds 3 seconds 3.5 seconds 4.0 seconds 4.5 seconds 5 seconds 5.5 seconds 6 seconds 6.5 seconds 7 seconds 7.5 seconds Related Programming Automatic Pause for PBX Line: FF2 (Trunk)++ 13# (0 or l)# PBX Access Codes: FFl 2# 3# (l-8)# (O-999 or 0*-99*)# Automatic Pause Position for PBX Access Codes: FFl 2# 3# (9-18)# (l-3)4+ Speed Dial Programming: FFlO addresses DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-103 wmpia~ I. oya~t311 riuyialIIiIIiIiy GG~LIUI I Lcuu-r I uyl ai I II IIII iy \r-r- 11 CO Flash Timer Software Version: All Versions A d d r e s s : FFl 351 13# (O-15)# Description A DBS phone user can press the FLASH key to disconnect from and then reseize a CO loop-start trunk (this operation is called a “flash”). Pressing the REDIAL key also performs a flash before automatically redialing a phone number. This CO Flash Timer determines how long the flash will last if FLASH or RED&IL is depressed (1 second by default). Exceptions: If the FLASH key is pressed and held down, the flash signal will last as long as the key is pressed. (The flash generated by pressing REDIAL is always controlled by the CO Flash Timer, regardless of how long REDIAL is held down.) Also, if you are using a PBX or Centrex line, the FLASH key will place the call on hold. Programmjng , FFI 3# 13# (0115)# $ CO Flash Timer setting Default: 9 (1 second) (see table below) NOTE: Settings 11 to 15 are available with CPC-A Version 3.3 or higher, and CPC-AU/B 5.0 or higher. These settings require Loop-S tart Trunk Card VB-435 1 OA or VB -435 11 A. Table I-19. CO Flash Timer values Page l-104 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 maprer I. oysiwi rrograrrwwig (t-t i 1 Yectton 4uwrrogrammtng I 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 1.1 seconds 1 1.5 seconds 2 seconds 2.5 seconds 3.0 seconds 1 3.5 seconds I 1 I 1 I Related Programming PBX Flash Timer: FFl 3# 18# (0- lO)# Auto Flash Redial: FFl 2# l# 6# (0 or l)# Trunk Circuit Type: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0 or l)# Dialing Restriction During Inbound Trunk Calls for TRS Types 3-6: FF7 l# 2# (0 or l)# Notes Circuit Card Requirements. Timer settings 1 l- 15 are only available with the loop-start trunk card (Part No. VB-435 10A or VB-435 11A). Phone Type Restriction. The FLASH key function applies only to digital and digital single-line telephones. Tnrnk Type Restriction. This timer only applies to loop-start trunks. . FLASH and REDZAL Restriction. FLASH and REDIAL features are not available with ground-start trunks. See Technote 13 (March 1992) for further information. SLT Flash Operation. Single-line telephones must press the hookswitch and dial “87” to activate this feature. Using FLASH Key With PBX or Centrex Lines. If you are using a PBX or Centrex line, the FLASH key places the call on hold. See PBX Flash Timer address (FFl 3# 18#) for more information. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-105 SLT Onhook Flash Timer Software Version: All Versions Address: Ffl 3# 14## (0-6)# Description This timer determines how long an SLT user must hold down the switchhook before the DBS recognizes a hookflash (200 ms by default). This address also includes a setting that prevents hookflashes from being performed on SLTs. If you change ,this setting, you must turn the system off, then back on to activate the change. Programming I FFl 3# 14# (0-6)# t SLT Onhook Flash Timer setting Default: 4 (valid flash=200 to 1500 ms) (see table below) Table l-20. SLT Onhook Flash Timer values Address Setting I Notes Page l-106 0 1 2 3 4 I 5 I 6 Flash Treatment V&d Flash Disconnect No Detection Greater than 500 ms Less than 200 ms 200 to 500 ms Greater than 700 ms Less than 200 ms 200 to 700 ms Less than 200 ms 200 to 1000 ms Greater than 1000 ms 1I Less than 200 ms 1 I200 to 1200 ms 1 Greater than 1200 ms I I Less than 200 ms 200 to 1500 ms Greater than 1500 ms II Greater than 200 ms I II LCSS than 200 ms II None Greater than 500 ms Less than 200 ms 200-500 ms Power-Cycling Requirement. In order for changes to this program to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl j CO Ring Cycle Detection Timer Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 3# 15# (0-3)# Description This timer determines how long the DBS attempts to detect an incoming CO ring cycle (6 seconds by default). To ensure that the DBS can recognize incoming trunk calls, set this timer to equal the duration of the ring cycle -- including the first “on” period and the first “off’ period. For example, if the ring cycle for an incoming trunk is 2 seconds on/ 4 seconds off, this parameter should be set to at least 6 seconds to detect the full cycle. If this timer is set too short, the DBS will not recognize valid CO ring signals. See Figure 1-2 below for an example of proper CO ring cycle detection timing for an incoming pattern of 2 seconds on/4 seconds off. Figure 1-2. Example of a CO Rinn Cycle and its Detection Timer 2 seconds on 2 saconcis on . Lisecondsoff n Incoming Ring Cycle I CO Ring - Cycle Detection Timer Programming FFI 3# 15# (O-3)# A I CO Ring Cycle Detection Timer setting: Od seconds I=6 seconds 2=8 seconds 3=10 seconds Related Programming Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer: FFl 3# 16# (0-15)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-l 07 section 400~Programming Chapter 1. system rrogrammlng (t-k1 ) Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 3## 16# (0-15)# Description If the incoming ring pattern for an extension (FF3 ExtPort# 39#) is set to emulate CO ringing, an extension may sometimes receive a very short ring burst when a trunk call begins ringing. This short ring burst occurs because the DBS received only part of the first “on” burst (see Figure l-2, previous page) from the trunk. To eliminate these short rings, this timer can be used to expand initial ring bursts. For example, if the timer is set to 350 ms and the first ring burst only lasts 50 ms, the fist ring burst sent to the extension will be 350 ms. If the first ring burst is over 350 ms, the timer is ignored and the DBS emulates the initial CO ring. Programming FFl 3# 16# (0115)# 4 Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer setting Default: 7 (350 ms) (see table below) . Table l-21. Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer valaes Value Setting 0 I--- 2fi 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Page I-108 1 Synchronizes to the incoming call signal 50 ms i iOOms 150 ms 200 ms 250 ms I 300 ms 350 ms 400 ms 450 ms 500 ms 550 ms 600 ms 650 ms 700 ms 750 ms DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS -70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Dial Pause Timer Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 3# 17# (O-15)# Description Use this address to insert a pause (1.5 seconds by default) before outpulsing dialed digits, once a CO trunk is accessed. The pause is used in speed-dialing (SSD and PSD) and in Least Cost Routing uw. Programming I FFl 3#I 17# (045)# Dial Pause Timer setting Default: 1 (1.5 seconds) (see table below) Tdle I-22. Dial Pause Timer values 1 Value 1 1.2 seconds 1.5 seconds 2 seconds 1 3 seconds I ! 4 seconds 5 seconds 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 seconds 8 seconds I9 seconds 10 seconds 11 seconds 12 seconds 13 seconds 14 seconds 15 seconds Setting 1 2 3 4 1 t I DBS-70-400 5 .7 .8 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I Page l-109 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming PBX Flash Timer Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 3#I 18# (0-lO)# Description When a DBS trunk is defined as a PBX trunk, the FLASH key can be used to place a call on hold. This timer determines how long the flash signal will last if the FLASH key is pressed then immediately released (.8 seconds by default). If the FLASH key is pressed and held down, the flash signal will last as long as the key is pressed. Programming I FFl 3# 18# (0-lO)# f PBX Flash Timer setting Default: 7 (.8 seconds) (see table below) Table l-23. PBX Flash Timer values Value Setting 0 No flash .2 seconds seconds seconds .5 seconds .6 seconds .7 seconds 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 .3 .4 4 5 6 1 7 1 8 I 1 9 10 .8 1 .9 seconds I seconds 1 second 1.1 seconds I Related Programming Auto Flash Redial: FFl 2# l# 6# (0 or l)# Trunk Port Type: FF2 (Trunk)# lO# (1 or 2)# Page l-110 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Call Forward-No Answer Timer Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 3# 19# (O-15)# Description The Call Forward-No Answer Timer determines how long an unanswered call will ring at an extension before it is sent to a secondary destination (12 seconds by default). NOTE: Although this address is present in all CPC versions, it controls different ringing features in different versions (see table below): Table I-24. King control for Call Forward-No Answer Timer Ring Feature Address ’ CPC-A (aI4 CPCAll WV CPC-B CPC-B (prior to 3.1) (3.1 or higher) YES YES YES YES YES I 1 (not available) 1 NO NO 1 (not available) 1 NO FFl 3# 19# CallForward-No Answer ] FFl 3# 28# 1 Hunt Group-No Answer 1 FFl 3# 26# FFi 3# 27# 1 CO Delaved Rim Extension Delayed Ring 1 I YES I 1 YES i YES NO I NO I NO i YES = The Call Forward-No Answer Tier controls this ring feature. NO = The Call Forward-No Answer Timer does nrit control this feature -- it has its own address (see “Address” column). (not available) = Contml of this ring feature is not available in this CPC version. Programming . 1 FFI 3# 19# (0-15)# t Call Forward-No Answer Timer setting Default: 2 (After 12 seconds) (see table below) Table l-25. CaU Forward-No Answer Timer values Setting 1 Value 0 After 4 seconds 1 After 8 seconds I After 12 seconds 2 3 1 After 16 seconds 4 After 20 seconds 5 After 24 seconds 6 After 28 seconds 7 After 32 seconds 8 After 36 seconds I I DBS-70-400 Setting II I, 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Value After 40 seconds After 44 seconds I After 48 seconds 1 After 52 seconds After 56 seconds After 60 seconds After 64 seconds I Page l-111 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer Software Version: @PC-B Version 1.0 or higher Address: FFl 3## 20# (1-8)# Description This timer determines how long the DBS waits for the CO to ground the Tip side of a trunk (4 seconds by default). before establishing a connection between the extension and the CO. When an extension attempts to place an outgoing call on a ground-start trunk, the DBS grounds the Ring side of the trunk. in response, the CO grounds the Tip side of the trunk. When the DBS detects the Tip ground, it will establish the connection (the extension user will hear dial tone). If the Tip ground is not received within the time set in this address, the DBS will treat the trunk as unavailable (the extension user will hear busy signal). Programming I I FFi 3# 20# (108)# f Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer setting Default: 4 (4 seconds) (see table below) I Table l-26. Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer values Setting Value 1 2 3 4 1 second 1 2 seconds 1 3 seconds 1 4 seconds I I 5 seconds 1 6 seconds I 7 8 I 7 seconds I 1 8 seconds Related Programming Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer: FFl 3# 21# (l-8)# Trunk Circuit Type: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-4)# Page l-112 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer Software Version: CPC-B Version 1 .O or higher Address: FFl 3## 21# (l-8)# Description This timer determines how long a CO Tip ground signal must be present before the DBS recognizes it as a valid incoming call (4 seconds by default). When the CO sends a call to a ground-start DBS trunk, it signals the incoming call by grounding the Tip side of the trunk. In most cases, this timer should be set to 3 seconds or longer. Otherwise, the DBS may generate false ringing when Tip ground is not quickly removed at the end of a call. Programming FFl 3# 21# (118)# f Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer setting Default: 4 (4 seconds) (see table below) Table l-27. Inbound Ground Start Detecfion Tinier values 1 Setting 1 Value 1 second 6 1 6 seconds 7 seconds 8 seconds 7 8 I Related Programming Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer: FFl 3# 20# (l-8)# Trunk Circuit Type: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-4)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-113 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Attendant Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls Software Version: CPC-Ail (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FFl 3## 22# (0-12)# Description This timer determines how long an intercom call will remain on hold at an Attendant phone before it recalls (20 seconds by default). Programming I FFl 3# 22# (0;12)# I Attendant Hold Recall Timer setting for Intercom Calls Default: 1 (20 seconds) (see table below) I Table l-28. Attendant Hold Recall Timer values for intercom tails Setting 0 1 t 2 3 4 11 12 Vaiue No recall 20 seconds 40 seconds 60 seconds 80 seconds 1 100 seconds 1 120 seconds 1 140 seconds 1 160 seconds 1 180 seconds 1 200 seconds 220 seconds 240 seconds Related Programming Attendant Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 2# (0-12)# Page 1-114 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1 System Programming (FFl) Extension Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls Software Version: CPC-All (ail versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FFl 3# 23# (0-12)# Description This timer determines how long an intercom call will remain on hold at an extension phone before it recalls (140 seconds by default). Programming FFl 3# 23# (0-12)# f Extension Hold Recall Timer setting for intercom calls Default: 7 (140 seconds) (see table below) Table l-29. Extension Hold Recall Timer values for intercom calls I Setting I Value 1 No recall I 20 seconds 1 40 seconds 1I 60 seconds .I.80 seconds 1 100 seconds I 120 seconds I1 140 seconds I 160 seconds 1 180 seconds 1 200 seconds 11 220 seconds 1 240 seconds I t t i 3 4 5 6 I 8 I 1 I I I I I Notes t 10 I 12 Recall Treatment for Intercom Calls. Unanswered recalls for intercom calls will ring indefinitely at the extension. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-115 Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Cdls Software Version: CPC-Ail (ail versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FFI 3## 24# (0-12)# Description This timer determines how long an Attendant-transferred intercom call will ring at an extension before it recalls to the Attendant (20 seconds by default). Programming FFl 3# 24# (0912)# f Attendant Transfer Recall Timer setting for intercom calls Default: 1 (20 seconds) (see table below) Table l-30. Attendant Transfer Recall Timer values for intercom calls Setting 0 I 6 Value No recall 1 20 seconds 1 40 seconds I 60 seconds 80 seconds 100 seconds 120 seconds 9 10 11 12 180 seconds 2 0 0 seconds 2 2 0 seconds I 240 seconds 1 2 3 4 5 I Related Programming Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 4# (0-12)# Notes Call Forward Interaction. If a call is transferred to an extension that has Call Forwarding turned on, the call will follow the call forwarding path if the Call Forward-No Answer Timer is less than the Recall Timer. Page l-116 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Extension Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Calls Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FFl 3# 25# (0-12)# Description This timer determines how long a transferred intercom call will ring at another extension before it recalls back to the transferring extension (140 seconds by default). Programming FFI 3# 25# (0912)# f Extension Transfer Recall Timer setting for intercom calls Default: 7 (140 seconds) (see table below) T&le l-31. Extension Transfer Recall Timer values for intercom calls Setting 0 1 2 3 4 11 12 Value No recall 20 seconds I 40 seconds 60 seconds 80 seconds I 100 seconds 1 120 seconds 1 140 seconds 1 160 seconds 1 180 seconds 1 200 seconds 220 seconds 240 seconds Related Programming Extension Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 5# (0- 12)# Notes Call Forward Interaction. If a call is transferred to an extension that has call Forwarding turned on, the call will follow the call forwarding path if the Call Forward-No Answer Timer is less than the Recall Timer. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-117 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi) ,, . . CO Delayed Ring Timer Software Version: CPCill (all versions) and CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher Address: FFl 3f# 26# (O-15)# Description Programming CO Delayed Ringing allows a second extension to ring when an incoming trunk call is not answered at the first extension. This timer determines how long a CO trunk call will ring at the first extension before it begins ringing at the second extension. (When the second extension begins ringing, the first extension will stop ringing.) I I FFl 3# 26# (0115)# t CO Delayed Ring Timer setting Default: 2 (after 12 seconds) (see table below) Table l-32. CO Delayed Ring Timer values Sktting 0 1 2 I 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Page 1-118 Value After 4 seconds After 8 seconds 1 After 12 seconds 1 After 16 seconds 1 After 20 seconds 1 After 24 seconds 1 After 28 seconds After 32 seconds After 34 seconds After 36 seconds After 44 seconds After 48 seconds After 52 seconds After 56 seconds After 60 seconds After 64 seconds I I I DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com D68-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Related Programming Delayed Ring: FFl 2# 1# 21# (0 or l)# CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments : FF4 5# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 5# (HuntGrp)# U’~W+ CO Delayed Night 1 Ring Assignments: FF4 6# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# CO Delayed Night 1 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 6# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments: FF4 9# 2# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)#/ CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 9# 2# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)## Notes DES-70-400 CO Delajed Ring Cot&o1 in Older CPC-B Versions. In CPC-B versions prior to 3.1, CO delayed ringing is controlled by the Call Forward-No Answer Timer (FF13# 19#0-1%). DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-119 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Extension (DSS/BLF) Delayed Ring Timer Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher Address: FFl 3# 27# (O-15)# Description Extension Delayed Ringing allows a second extension to ring when an intercom call is not answered at the first extension. This timer determines how long the intercom call will ring at the first extension before it begins ringing at the second extension. (When the second extension begins ringing, the first extension will stop ringing.) Note: The covering station needs a DSS/BLF key. Programming I FFl 3# 27# (0115)# f Extension Delayed Ring Timer setting Default: 2 (after 12 seconds) (see table below) Table l-33. Extension Delayed Ring Timer values 11 12 13 14 15 Page l-120 After 48 seconds After 52 seconds After 56 seconds After 60 seconds After 64 seconds DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400~Programming Related Programming Extension (BLF) Delayed Ring: FFl .2# l# 30# (0 or l)# Extension Delayed Ring Table: FF4 8# (ExtPort)# (ExtPort)## (0 or l)# Notes Extension Delayed Ring Control in Older CPC-B Versions. In CPC-B versions prior to 3.1, extension delayed ringing is controlled by the Call Forward-No Answer Timer (FF13# 19# 0-15#). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-121 section 4uu-Programming Lnapter 1. system rrogrammrng (t-I-1 ) Hunt Group No Answer Timer Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher Address: FFl 3# 28# (0-15)# Description If a call has entered a hunt group and the first extension to ring is not answered, this timer determines how long the extension will ring before the next idle extension in the hunt group begins ringing (12 seconds by default). Programming I FFl 3# 28# (0115)# f Hunt Group No Answer Timer setting Default: 2 (after 12 seconds) (see table below) Table l-34. Hunt Group No Answer Timer values Setting 0 1 2 3 Notes ! Value After 4 seconds After 8 seconds After 12 seconds After 16’ seconds Extension Delayed Ring Control in Older CPC-B Versions. In CPC-B versions prior to 3.1, extension delayed ringing is controlled by the Call Forward-No Answer Timer (FFl 3# 19# 0- 1%). Page 1-122 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Automatic Day Mode Start Time Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 3## 29# HHMM# Description Setting the Automatic Day Mode Start Time allows the DBS to switch from Night mode to Day mode automatically. You can program trunks to ring incoming calls at different extensions during Day or Night mode (see FF4 addresses). And different TRS types can be programmed for use in each mode (see FF8 addresses). i To set the automatic start time for Night mode, use FFl 3# l# HHMM. A second Night mode is also available in Version 7.0 or higher of CPC-AII or CPC-B -- see FFl 3# 30# HHMM. Programming To set the Automatic Day Mode Start Time . . . Enter the time using the 24-hour format. The following example sets the time . to 8:30 a.m.: I I FFl 3# 29# 0830# Time Setting (8330 a.m.) (in 24-hour format) To clear the Start Time (disable Day Mode) . . . I FFl 3# 29# CONF ON/OFF I Related Programming Time Setting: FFl l# 2# HHMM# Automatic Night Mode Start Time: FFl 3# l# HHMM# Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time: FFl 3# 30# HHMM# CO Ring Assignments: FF4 addresses Toll Restriction: FF8 addresses DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 , Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-l 23 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Notes Section 400-Programming System Clock. The Automatic Day Mode start time depends on the DBS system clock being set correctly. NIGHT Key Operation. If only one of the Auto Mode Start Ties is set, the Attendant NIGHT key can be used to manually switch to another mode. For instance, if Night mode has been activated automatically, the Attendant can press the NIGHT key to go into Day mode. (However, the Attendant must wait at least 3 minutes after the mode is automatically activated, before using the NIGHT key to switch the mode again.) In CPC-AU/B versions prior to 7.0, if both Auto Day and Auto Night Mode Start Times are set, the Attendant NIGHT key cannot be used to manually switch modes. (However, it will work in Version 7.0 or higher; or press #520 to toggle between Day, Night and Night 2 modes.) SUGGESTION (for versions prior to 7.0): Set only the Auto Night Mode Start Xme, so that the DBS will automatically switch to Night mode each night -- and each morning the Attendant phone can press the NIGHT key to manually switch to Day mode. Required Intervals Between Auto Day and Night Modes. If you set both Auto Mode Start Times. it is recommended that the start times differ by at least 1 hour. Page l-124 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl ) Section 400-Programming Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time Scftware Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FFl 3#! 30# HHMM# Description In this address, you can activate a second Night mode by setting the Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time. This allows the DBS to switch from Night to Night 2 mode automatically at the time set in this address. You can program trunks to ring incoming calls at different extensions during Day or Night mode (see FF4 addresses). And different TRS types can be programmed for use in each mode (see FF8 addresses). To set the automatic start time for Night mode, use FF13# l# HHMM. To set the Automatic Day Mode Start Time, use FF13# 29# HHMM. Programming To set the Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time . . . I FFl 3# 30# (OOOO-2359)# Night 2 Mode Start Time (in 24-hour format) To clear the start. time (disable Night 2 Mode) . . . I FFl 3# 30# CONF ON/OFF I Related Programming Time Setting: FFl l# 2# HHMM# Automatic Day Mode Start Time: FFl 3# 29# HHMM# Automatic Night 1 Mode Start Time: FFl 3# l# HHMM# CO Ring Assignments: FF4 addresses Toll Restriction: FF8 addresses Notes DBS-70-400 System Clock. The automatic start time for Night 2 depends on the DBS system clock being set correctly. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-125 NIGHT Key Operation. If only one of the Auto Mode Start Times is set, the Attendant NIGHT key can be used to manually switch to another mode. For instance, if Night mode has been activated automatically, the Attendant can press the NIGHT key to go into Day mode. (However, the Attendant must wait at least 3 minutes after the mode is automatically activated, before using the NIGHT key to switch the mode again.) In CPC-AII/B versions prior to 7.0, if both Auto Day and Auto Night Mode Start Ames are set, the Attendant NIGHT key cannot be used to manually switch modes. (However, it will work in Version 7.0 or higher; or press #520 to toggle between Day, Night and Night 2 modes.) SUGGESTION (for versions prior to 7.0): Set only the Auto Night Mode Start Time, so that the DBS will automatically switch to Night mode each night -- and each morning the Attendant phone can press the NIGHT key to manually switch to Day mode. Required Intervals Between Auto Day and Night Modes. If you set both ,4uto Mode Start Times, it is recommended that the start times differ by at least 1 hour. Page 1-126 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Programming and DISA Codes Remote Programming ID Code Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 4## (0000-9999)# Description The Remote Programming ID Code allows you to enter the terminal programming mode. This programming mode is used to enter programming commands from a remote PC or a local PC connected directly to the SMDR port (CN6). You can enter the remote programming mode through any of these three methods: By dialing into the system through a direct DISA trunk By dialing into the system through a regular CO trunk, then recjuesting the operator to enter the Remote Programming ID Code By using a local PC and communications package to connect directly to the DBS serial port. For more information on the terminal programming mode. see Appendix B. l l l Programming To set the Remota Programming ID Code . . . To reset the ID Code to the default (9999)... FFl 4## CONF ON/OFF DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I Page l-l 27 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) DISA Inbound Call ID Code Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 5## (0000-9999)# Description Use this address to set a valid ID code for inbound DISA (Direct Inward System Access) callers. By default, no ID code is defined. which means a caller who dials a DISA trunk will receive intercom dial tone immediately without entering an ID code. If you define a DISA Inbound Call ID Code in this address, callers dialing in on the DISA trunk will receive a fast-busy tone. The caller must then dial the DISA Inbound Call ID Code to receive the intercom dial tone. Programming To set the DISA ID Code . . . I FFI 5# (0000;9999)# J-Digit DISA Inbound ID Code (Default: ****> To clear the DISA ID Code . . . FFl 5# CONF ON/OFF Related Programming DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1: FFl 6# l# (0000-9999)# DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2: FFl 6# 2# (0000-9999)# DISA Start lime: FF2 (Trunk)!+ 19# HHMM# DISA End Time: FF2 (Trunk)# 20# HHMM# DISA Auto Answer: FF2 (Trunk)# 1 l# HHMM# Page 1-128 DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1 Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 6## l# (0000-9999)# Description Once a caller has dialed in on the DISA trunk and accessed intercom dial tone, he/she can access a trunk line by dialing #7, then the ID code set in this address (1111 by default), then 9 or 81-86 to access the MC0 trunk. Programming To set DISA Outbound ID Code 1 . . . I FFl 6# l# (0000;9999)# 4-Digit DISA Outbound ID Code 1 (Default: 1111) To reset DISA Outbound ID Code 1 to default “1111” . . . I FFI 6# 1# CONF ON/OFF I Reiated Programming DISA Auto Answer: FF2 (Trunk)# ll# (0 or l)# DISA inbound Call ID Code: FFl 5# (0000-9999)# DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2: FFl 6# 2# (0000-9999)# DISA Start Time: FF2 (Trunk)# 19# (HHMM)# DISA l&d Time: FF2 (Trunk)# 20# (HHMM)# Notes -. DISA Limitations -1) A 16-second timer is set between the dialing of the DISA Outbound ID Code. If a time-out results, the DISA call is treated as a normal call. 2) The DBS supports up to two valid 4-digit DISA Outbound ID Codes, so that you can track two different groups of DISA callers on SMDR reports. 3) Accessing trunks via DISA can take place only on trunk (MCO) groups. 4) LCR (Least Cost Routing) is not supported on DISA trunks. 5) Trunk calling with DISA will override all TRS. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-l 29 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi) Section 400-Programming DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2 Software Version: All Versions Address: FFl 6## 2# (OOOO-9999)# Description Once a caller has dialed in on the DISA trunk and accessed intercom dial tone, he/she can access a trunk line by dialing #7, then the ID code set in this address (9999 by default), then 9 or 81-86 to access the MC0 trunk. Programming To set DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2 . . . FFl 6# 2# (OOOO-9999)# t 4-Digit DISA Outbound ID Code 2 (Default: 9999) To reset DISA Outbound ID Code 2 to default “9999” . . . I FFl 6# 2# CONF ON/OFF 1 Related Programming DISA Auto Answer: FF2 (Trunk)# ll# (0 or l># DISA Inbound Call ID Code: FFl 5# (0000-9999)# DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1: FFl 6# l# (0000-9999)# DISA Start Time: FF2 (Trunk)# 19# (HHMM)# DISA End Timei FF2 (Trunk)## 20# (HHMM)# Notes DISA Limitations -1) A 16-second timer is set between the dialing of the DISA Outbound ID Code. If a time-out results, the DISA call is treated as a normal call. 2) The DBS supports up to two valid 4-digit DISA Outbound ID Codes, so that you can track two different groups of DISA callers on SMDR reports. 3) Accessing trunks via DISA can take place only on trunk (MCO) groups. 4) LCR (Least Cost Routing) is not supported on DISA trunks. 5) Trunk calling with DISA will override all TRS. Page 1-130 DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400~Programming Chapter I. System Programming (FFl) ID Code For System Programming Software Version: Ail Versions Address: FFl 7# (0000-9999)# Description This program assigns an ID code that can be dialed from a non-Attendant phone to enter the programming mode (9999 by default). Non-Attendant extensions enter the programming mode by dialing #98 and then the ID Code entered in this address. Programming To assign the ID Code for system programming . . . FFI 7# (OOOO-9999)# f 4-Digit ID Code for System Programming (Default: 9999) To reset the ID Code to default “9999” . . . FFI 7# CONF ON/OFF Notes DBS-70-400 Entering the Programming Mode. Oniy one extension can be in programming mode at a particular time. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-131 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) New Function Reset New Function Reset Software Version: CPC-B Only, Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFI 8# 1# (0 or l)# (to select the reset) FFI 8# 2# (0 or l)# (to complete the reset) Description Perform this address if you are upgrading CPC-B software to a new release (such as from 5.0 to 6.0). However, it is not necessary if you are upgrading to a “point” release (such as 6.0 to 6.1). New Function Reset should be performed immediately after changing-out the EPROM chips on the CPC-B card. New Function Reset initializes SRAM (Static Random Access Memory). It clears unused registers and adds new programs, but retains all current DBS program settings. Exception: If you are upgrading from a CPC-B version prior to 3.1, New Function Reset will clear existing DID numbers (which are extension-based -- see FF3 ExtPort## 3%). Beginning with Version 3.1, DID numbers are stored in the ‘Inbound DID Numbers” table (see FFl 8# 3# address). New Function Reset will erase extension-based DID numbers, but it will not erase the Inbound DID Numbers table. Prdgramming FFl 8# l# (Oor l)# + O=Do not perform New Function Reset. l=Perform New Function Reset. NOTE: If you enter “1” (to reset), the following displays: ir%EE-j This is to confirm that you want to reset the data before the DBS actually performs the reset. Press one of the following: O=Do not complete the reset. 1 =Complete the reset. Related Programming CO Ring Assignments: FF4 addresses CO Ring Cycle Detection Timer: FFl 3# 1% (0-3)# Page 1-132 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com . DBS70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming DID/DNIS and Tl Settings Inbound DID Dial Numbers Software Version: CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher Address: FFl 6# 3## (OOOO-9999)## (IO-69 or lOO-699)# Description Use this address to assign DID number(s) to extension(s). Up to 500 DID numbers can be assigned. One DID number can be assigned to multiple extensions (this will take up only one entry in the 500 available entries). One extension can have multiple DID numbers assigned to it. (The number of entries taken up is equal to the number of DID numbers assigned to the extension.) Programming I I FFl 8# 3# (OOOO-9999)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)# + + 4-D&$ DID Number I Extension Number I Related Programming Multiple DID,DNIS: FFl 2# l# 32# (0 or l)# DID/DNIS (enabling trunks for): FFl 8# ## 6# (Trunk)# 2# (0-2)# DID Flexible Ringing Assignments: FFl 8# 5# (DIDNo.)# (ExtNo.)# (0000[00]-1111[11])# . DID Immediate or Wink Start: FF2 (Trunk)# 22# (0 or l)# Wink Start Timer: FF2 (Trunk)# 23# (0-15)# Time Out for Dialed DID Digits: FF2 (Trunk)# 24# (0-15)# DID Interdigit Timeout: FF2 (Trunk)++ 25# (0-15)# Extension Numbers: FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)# Notes DID Number Assignment in Older CPC-B Version. In CPC-B Version 2.0, DID numbers were stored with extension port settings, rather than in a separate table (see FF3 ExtPort# 35# for more information). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-133 DID Hardware and Power Requirements. The DID trunk card is required (each DID card provides 8 ports). The DID trunk card requires an external, -48V power supply. Also, SCC-B Card Version 1.2 or higher is required. See Section 300~Installation for cabling instructions. Dial Pulse Requirement. Ti:e DID trunk card requires dial-pulse dialing. Digit Length Requirement. The DBS only supports 4-digit DID numbers. DID Ring Control. Ringing for the DID number at the assigned extension(s) is controlled by the DID Flexible Ringing Assignments address (FFl 8# 5#). Page 1-134 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) System Configuration Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher A d d r e s s : FFl 8# 4## l# 1# (0-8)# Description Use this address to identify the DBS system configuration in which the Tl interface is installed (DBS 40 by default). This is one of the required addresses to make Tl operational. See YHinimum Tl Programming” below for more information. Programming System Configuration Default: 0 (DBS 40) (see table below) Table l-35. System ConfQzuatitm for TI installation Setting I Notes 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Value DBS40 DBS 72 1 DBS 96 1 DBS 40 + DBS 40 DBS 72 + DBS 40 DBS 72 + DBS 72 1 DBS 96 + DBS 40 1 DBS 96 + DBS 72 1 CBS 96 + DBS 96 ’ Notes 1 / TI must be in slave cabinet 1 Tl is not supported Tl must be in slave cabinet Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. Minimum Tl Programming. The following table (see next page) lists the programs that need to be set in order to make Tl operational. Default settings appear in bold. In most cases, you do not have to change the defaults for any remaining Tl programs. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-135 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Table l-36. Minimum Tl programming (default settings appear in bold) STEP 1 -- NEW FUNCTION RESET Address: Description: Options: , FFl 8# l# (0 or l)# (to select the reset) FFl 8# 2# (0 or l)# (to complete the reset) Must be performed if you are installing Tl while upgrading to a new CPC-B release (e.g., from 6.2 to 7.0). Not needed if you are upgrading to a “point” release (e.g., from 6.0 to 6.2). O=Do not reset l=Reset STEP 2 -- SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FFl 8# 4# l# l# (O-8)# Enter the DBS cabinet configuration. \ I O=DBS 40 l=DBS 72 2=DBS 96 3=DBS 40 + DBS 40 (Tl must be in slave cabinet) 4=DBS 72 + DBS 40 (Tl is not supported) 5=DBS 72 + DBS 72 (Tl must be in slave cabinet) 6=DBS 96 + DBS 40 7=DBS 96 + DBS 72 S=DBS 96 + DBS 96 STEP 3 -- SYNC SOURCES FFl 8# 4# l# 2# (l-3)# for Sync Source 1 FFl 8# 4# l# 3# (0-3j# for Sync Source 2 FFl 8# 4# l# 4# (0-3)# for Svnc Source 3 Assign the sync sources. The Sync Card (installed on the CPC-B) provides a method of synchronizing the DBS with the public network. If the first sync source fails, the DBS will switch to the second sync source, and will then attempt to return to the first source based on the “Network Re-Sync Timer” value. If the second source fails and the first source is not working, the system will switch to the third source. The DBS considers a clock source to have failed when the ‘Slip Rate Error Counter” is exceeded within a 24-how period. (continued) Page 1-136 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming iddress: continued) Iescrip tion: continued) lp tions: Zxamples: Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) FFl 8# 4# l# 2# (l-3)# for Sync Source 1 FFl 8# 4# I# 3# (0-3)# for Sync Source 2 FFl 8# 4# l# 4# (0-3)# for Sync Source 3 The “Free run” setting is the only setting that can be entered for more than one sync source. One of the three sync sources should be set to “Free run”, so that the Tl can provide its own clocking if the network clock fails. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be Powered down. then Dowered back UD. O=None (default for Sync Sources 2 and 3) l=Tl of the master cabinet 2=Tl of the slave cabinet 3=Free run (internal clocking) (default for Sync Source 1) In most cases, the sync sources should be set as follows for these system configurations: Tl in a Single Cabinet, or Tl in a Master Cabinet: Sync Source 1 = 1 (Tl of the master cabinet) Sync Source 2 = 3 (Free run) Sync Source 3 = 0 (None) Tl in a Slave Cabinet: Sync Source 1 = 2 (Tl of the slave cabinet) Sync Source 2 = 3 (Free run) Sync Source 3 = 0 (None) Tls in the Master and Slave Cabinets: Sync Source 1 = 1 (Tl of the master cabinet) Sync Source 2 = 2 (Tl of the slave cabinet) Svnc Source 3 = 3 (Free run) STEP 4 -- TRUNK CONFIGURATION Address: Description: op tions: DBS-70-400 I FFl 8# # 4## l# l# (0 or l)# for Master Cabinet lFF1 844 # 5# l# l# (0 or l)# for Slave Cabinet Specify the trunk configuration. O=Analog only l=Tl and analog trunks DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I I Page 1-137 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl ) Section 400-Programming STEP 5 -- NUMBER OF Tl CHANNELS Address: Description: FFl 8# # 4# l# 2# (0-24)# for Master Cabinet FFl 8# 4# 5# l# 2# (0-24)# for Slave Cabinet Specify the number of Tl channels used when “Fractional Tl” is needed (using only a portion of the 24 available channels on the Tl card). Options: 0 = None (no Tl channels are used) 1 thru 24 = Number of Tl channels used STEP 6 -- FRAME FORMAT iddress: Jescription: Options: FFl 8# # 4# l# 3# (0 or l># for Master Cabinet FFl 8# 4# 5# l# 3# (0 or l)# for Slave Cabinet Specify the framing format used by the Tl. Be sure to match the framing format ordered from the CO. In most cases, SF (SuperFrame; also known as D4) is used. SF consists of 12 frames, with each frame including 192 information bits. ESF (Extended SuperFrame) can also be selected. ESF consists of 24 frames, and supports monitoring and mainte nance capabilities not available in the SF format. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then powered back up. 0 = SF (D4) l=ESF STEP 7 -- LINE CODING (CLEAR CHANNEL) FORMAT Address: Description: Options: FFl 8# 4#/ 4# l# 4# (0 or l)# for Master Cabinet FFl 8# 4## 5# l# 4## (0 or l)# for Slave Cabinet Specify the clear channel format used by the Tl for line coding. Be sure to match the clear channel format ordered from the CO. In most cases, AM1 (Alternate Mark Inversion) is used. B8ZS (Binary 8-Zeros Suppression) can also be selected. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then powered back up. O=AMI 1 = B8ZS Page 1-138 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFC Section 400-Programming STEP 8 -- TRUNK CIRCUIT TYPE Iddress: >escription: 1p tions: FF2 (l-64)# 21# (0-4)## Specify which trunk channels are used for Tl. When assigning trunks as circuit type “3” (Tl), start from the highest-numbered trunk port in the DBS cabinet structure, and move down sequentially from there. If Fractional Tl is used, make sure that the number of trunks assigned to circuit type “3” (Tl) matches the “Num ber of Tl Channels” setting (see STEP 5 above). Also, if your CPC-B version is 5.0 to 6.02, make sure the remaining trunk ports on the TRK card are opened for analog usage in the “Tl Trunk Closure” address (see FFl 8# 7# in this DBS Manual). For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then powered back up. 0 = Loop Start 1 = Ground Start 2 = Analog DID 3=Tl 4 = Caller ID (loop start) (available only with CPC-B Version 6.1 or higher) STEP 9 -- Tl TRUNK TYPE EMULATION Address: Description: Options: DBS-70-400 FFl 8# 4#! 6# (l-64)# l# (0-3)## Specify the type of trunk signaling that each Tl channel emulates. Be sure to match the signaling ordered from the CO. If your system uses Tl COP Version 1.1 or 1.2 and you wish to use the “Ground Start” setting, it must be upgraded to Version 1.4 or higher. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then powered back up. 0 = Loop Start emulation 1 = (reserved for future use) 2 = Ground Start emulation 3=E&M DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-139 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi) Section 400-Programming STEP 10 -- OUTGOUNG SIGNALING TYPE Address: Description: FFl 8# # 6# (l-64)# 3# (0-2)# Specify the outgoing signaling type used by the Tl. Be sure to match the signaling ordered from the CO. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then powered back up. Options: 0 = Immediate Start l=WinkStart 2 = Dial Tone Start STEP 11 -- INCOMING SIGNALING TYPE 4ddress: Description: FFl 8# 4#/ 6# (l-64)# 4# (0\ or l)# Specify the incoming signaling type used by the Tl. Be sure to match the signaling ordered from the CO. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then powered back up. 3ptions: 0 = Immediate Start/Ringdown 1 =WinkStart Page l-1 40 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Sync Source 1 Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8## 4# 1# 2# (l-3)## Description The Sync Card (installed on the CPC-B) provides a method of synchronizing the DBS with the public network. This address determines the first clocking source for network synchronization (internal clocking by default). If the first clocking source fails, the system wili switch to the second source. The system will attempt to go back to the fist source based on the Network Re-Sync Timer setting (see FFl 8# 4#/ 2# l# 0-25#). The system considers a clock source to have failed when the Slip Counter is exceeded within a 24hour period. See FFl 8# 4## 4/5# 3# 2# (0-9000)# for instructions on setting the Slip Counter. Typically, Sync Source 1 is Tl of the master cabinet. See “Notes” below for a list of typical sync source settings for single- and double-cabinet systems. Programming I FFl 8# 4# I# 2# (193)# f l=Tl of the master cabinet 2=Tl of the slave cabinet 3=Free run (internal clocking) Note: Settings 1 and 2 synchronize Tl clocking with the public network. Notes Typical Sync Settings. In most cases, sync sources should be set as follows for these configurations: Tl in a Single Cabinet -- or -- Tl in a Master Cabinet Source 1: Source 2: Source 3: 1 (Tl of the master cabinet) 3 (Free run) 0 (None) Tl in a Slave Cabinet Source 1: Source 2: Source 3: 2 (Tl gf the slave cabinet) 3 (Free run) 0 (None) Tls in the Master and Slave Cabinets Source 1: Source 2: Source 3: DBS-70-400 1 (Tl of the master cabinet) 2 (Tl of the slave cabinet) 3 (Free run) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-141 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Restriction on Duplicate Sync Settings. “Free run” is the only setting that can be entered for more than one sync source. Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. Page l-142 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Sync Source 2 Software Version: WC-6 Version 4.0 or higher A d d r e s s : FFl 8# 4# l# 3# (O-3)# Description Determines the source of clocking for the second sync source, which is used if the first sync source fails. If the second sync source is used, the DBS system will attempt to switch back to the first source based on the value set for the Network Re-Sync Timer (see FFl 8# 4# 2# l# 0-25#). If the second source fails and the first source is not working, the system will switch to the third source. In most cases, a system with one Tl has the second sync source set to “3” (Free run). Systems with two Tls normally have the second sync source set to “2” (Tl of the slave cabinet). NOTE: One of the three sync sources should be set to “3” (Free run), so that the Tl can provide its own clocking if the network clock fails. See the Sync Source 1 address for an introduction to Tl clocking, and a list of typical sync source settings in single-cabinet and double-cabinet systems. Programming kF1 8# 4# 1# 3# (093)# P O=None (default) l=Tl of the master cabinet 2=Tl of the slave cabinet 3=Free run (internal clocking) Note: Settings 1 and 2 synchronize Tl clocking with the public network. Notes Restriction on Duplicate Sync Settings. “Free run” is the only setting that can be entered for more than one sync source. Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-143 waprer I. sysrem rrogrammlng (t-r I 3ecIion 4uu-rrogrammwig 1 Sync Source 3 Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFI 8# 4# 1# 4# (0-3)# Description Deterrnines the source of clocking for the third sync source, which is used if both the first and second sources fail. If the third sync source is used, the DBS system will attempt to switch back to the first source based on the value set for the Network Re-Sync Timer (see FFl 8# # 2# l# O-2%). In most cases, a system with one Tl has the third sync source set to “0” (None). Systems with two Tls normally have the third sync source set to “3” (Free run). NOTE: One of the three sync sources should be set to “3” (Free run), so that the Tl can provide its own clocking if the network clock fails. See the Sync Source 1 address for an introduction to Tl clocking, and a list of typical sync source settings in single-cabinet and double-cabinet systems. Programming FFI 8# 4# l# 4# (093)# O=None (default) l=Tl of the master cabinet 2=Tl of the slave cabinet 3=Free run (internal clocking) Note: Settings 1 and 2 synchronize Tl clocking with the public network. Notes Restriction on Duplicate Sync Settings. “Free run” is the only setting that can be entered for more than one sync source. Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. Page 1-144 DBS Manual - issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Network Re-Sync Timer Sofhwate Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# M 2# 1# (O-25)# Description If one clock source fails, the system will switch to another clock source. The Network Re-Sync Timer determines how many times (once an hour) the system attempts to return to the original clock source. For example, if the first clocking (sync) source fails, the system will switch to the second source, and then will attempt to return to the first source once an hour for the number of times set in Network Re-Sync Timer. Likewise, if the system switches to the third source (after the first and second sources fail), the Network Re-Sync Tier determines how many times the system will attempt to return to the original clocking source. Programming I FFI 8# 4# 2# 1# (0925)# Y O=Immediate (DBS attempts to return to first sync source immediately). 1-24=Number of hours the DBS attempts to return to first sync source (once an hour). ~&NO retries (DBS does not attempt to switch to first sync source). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-145 Disconnect Timer Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4# 2# 2# (0112)# Description Determines how long the DBS waits before sending a disconnect signal from the Tl to the CO (200 ms by default). NOTE: The CO Disconnect Timer (FF2 Trunks 18# O-l%) determines how long the system waits to receive a disconnect signal from the CO. Programming FFl 8# 4# 2# 2# (0112)# ;I Disconnect Timer setting Default: 1 (200 ms) (see table below) Table l-37. TI Disconnect Timer values Setting 0 2 3 4 II 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Notes Value 150 ms I 200 ms 250 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms 2000 ms 2500 ms 3000 ms 3500 ms Off (DBS does not automatically send a disconnect signal) Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. Page 1-146 DBS Manual - Issued 811195 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi) Section 400-Programming Guard Timer Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4# 2# 3# (0-15)# Description Determines how long the system guards a Tl circuit (1200 ms by default). When the DBS “guards” a circuit, it holds the circuit after it has been released to make sure the previous call is properly disconnected. This means the channel cannot be used for another call until the Guard Timer has expired. Programming I FFI 8# 4# 2# 3# (O-15)# Guard Timer setting Default: 6 (1200 rns) (see table below) Table l-38. Tl Guard Timer values Notes DBS-70-400 Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-147 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Release Acknowledge Timer Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4## 2# 4# (0-15)# Description Determines how long the DBS waits for the CO to acknowledge a disconnect signal (240 seconds by default). Once this timer expires, the DBS will abandon the call even if the CO has not acknowledged the disconnect. This allows the DBS to disconnect idle Tl trunks if the CO is not signaling properly. Programming FFl 8# 4# 2# 4# (0-15)# f Release Acknowledge Timer setting Default: 9 (240 seconds) (see table below) I Table l-39. Release Acknowledge Timer values Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 I I 11 Value 1 second 2 seconds 5 seconds 1 10 seconds 20 seconds 30 seconds 60 seconds 90 seconds 120 seconds 240 seconds 11 480 seconds 1 960 seconds 1 1,080 seconds 1 1,420 seconds 1,920 seconds An infinite number of seconds I I t Page 1-148 13 14 15 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 c;napter 1. system rrogrammlng (FFI) Section 4uo-rrogrammtng Outpulse Delay Timer Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8## 4# 2# 5# (0-S)## Description Determines how long the system waits before outpuising dialed digits to the network (500 ms by default). Programming FFl 8## 4# 2# 5# (018)# f Outpulse Delay Timer setting Default: 2 (500 ms) (see table below) Table l-40. Outpulse Delay Timer values DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-149 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Wink Timeout Timer Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4# 2# 6# (O-15)# Description When wink-start signaling is used, the DBS waits for a wink signal from the CO when an extension user goes off-hook. Once a wink signal is received, the DBS sends CO dial tone to the extension. This timer determines how long the DBS waits for a wink signal once an extension user goes off-hook (5500 ms by default). If the DBS does not receive a wink signal before the timer expires, the DBS disconnects the Tl channel and returns busy tone to the user. Programming I FFl 8# 4# 2# 6# (0115)# f Wink Timeout Timer setting Default: 15 (5500 ms) (see table below) Table 1-41. Wink Timeout Timer values Page l-l 50 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Incoming Detection Timer Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4## 2# 7# (0-15)# Description Once an incoming call seizes a DBS Tl trunk, this timer determines how long the DBS waits before recognizing the seizure as an incoming call (90 ms by default). The purpose of this timer is to prevent false incoming ringing. This parameter only applies when E&M signaling is used. Programming 1 1 FFl 8# 4# 2# 7# (0-15)# f Incoming Detection Timer setting Default: 7 (90 ms) (see table below) Table l-42. Incoming Detection Timer values Setting 0 1 2 3 4 ! 5 r D&-70-400 ~~ 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 15 4 Value 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms 70 ms 80 ms 90 ms 100 ms 110 ms 120 ms 130 ms 140 ms 150 ms 160 ms 170 ms DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com ! Page 1-151 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Answer Supervision Timer Sofhvare Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4## 2# 8# (0-8)# Description When the DBS generates a call over the Tl. answer supervision is provided to determine if the call is actually answered. This timer determines how long the offhook signal from the called party must last before the DBS treats the offhook signal as an answer. Programming I FFl 8# 4# 2# 8# (018)# f Answer Supervision Timer setting Default: 3 (600 ms) (see table below) Table l-43. Answer Supervision Timer values Setting 0 1 2 7 8 Page l-152 Value 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms . 1 1000 ms ] 2000 ms I3000 ms 4000 ms 10,000 ms DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-TO-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Immediate Glare Timer Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4## 2# 9# (0115)# Description “Glare” occurs when both ends of the same trunk are seized simultaneously, resulting in connection between an incoming call and a DBS phone user attempting to access an outside line. Use this address to prevent glare when immediate-start signaling is used. This timer determines how long the DBS will search for an incoming call on a trunk channel before connecting a DBS extension user to it (60 ms by default). The timer begins when the extension goes off-hook. Programming FFI 8# 4# 2# 9# (O-15)# f Immediate Glare Timer setting Default: 3 (60 ms) fsee table below) Table l-44. Immediate Glare Timer values DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com . Page 1-153 Section 400-Programming Chapter I. System Programming (FF’l) Wink Glare Timer Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4# 2# 10# (0-15)# Description “Glare” occurs when both ends of the same trunk are seized simultaneously, resulting in connection between an incoming call and a DBS phone user attempting to access an outside line. Use this address to prevent glare from occurring when wink-start signaling is used. This timer determines how long the DBS will search for an incoming call on a trunk channel before connecting a DBS extension user to it (60 ms by default). The timer begins when a wink is received. Programming FFl 8# 4# 2# lO# (O-15)# t Wink Glare Timer setting Default: 3 (60 ms) (see table below) Table l-45. Wink Glare Timer values Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Page l-1 54 Value . The DBS does not check for glare 20 ms 40 ms 6Oms 80 ms 100 ms 120ms 140 ms 160 ms 180 ms 200 ms 250 ms 300 ms 350 ms 400 ms 1 450 ms DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I DBS-70400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400~Programming Digital Pad Settings Software Version: CPC-Bversion 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4## 3# (l-12)# (l-12)# (0-30)# Description Adjusts the volurne of connections made via the Tl. Default volume levels are included for connections between different types of terminals or circuits. For example, a KTel-to-T1 connection may use one volume setting, while an SLT-to-T1 connection may use another. The volume settings are controlled by changing a pad number, which in turn changes the loss or gain of the connection. In most cases, the default pad settings do not need to be changed. If the volume level of a connection is unsatisfactory, include the Receiving and Sending circuit types in this program, and then adjust the volume by assigning a new pad number. Programming FFl 8# 4# 3# (l-12)# (I-12)# (0130)# f f Receiving Sending Circuit Type Circuit Type (“To” Side) (“From” Side) (see table below) t Pad No. (see table, . next page) Table l-46. Digital Pad Settings - circuit types Circuit Type Setting 1 2 3 4 DBS-70-400 Value K-Tel SLT Data Analog CO Trunk 8 Option 2 9 10 11 12 DTMF CON-F (SCC) Tone 1 (MFR 1) Tone 2 (MFR 2) Notes Reserved for future use. .~I pad levels to circuits that require Reserved for future use. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-155 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Table l-47. Digital Pad Setthgs - pad numbers and related dB levels Table l-48. Digital Pad Settings - default values Related Programming Trunk Port Class: FF2 (Trunk)# 26# (4-8)# Station Port Class: FF3 (ExtPort)# 37# (l-2 or 7-8)# Page 1-156 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Notes Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Example Digital Pad Adjustment. If calls to SLTs via a master Tl have low volume levels, the pad levei for connections from the master Tl to all SLTs can be changed. By default, the pad level for connections from the master Tl to all SLTS is 16 (or -2 dB). To raise the volume by 2 d.B, change the pad value to 0 (or 0 dB) by programming the following: FFl 8# 4# 3## 2# !5f# O## where: DES-70-400 2% is the circuit type for SLTs; 5# is the circuit type for Tl in the master cabinet; and O#I is the pad number for 0 dB loss/gain. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-l 57 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Trunk Configuration Software Version: CPC-B Versions 4.0 to 6.02 Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4## 1# I# (0 or l)# FFl 8# 4# 5# 1# 1# (0 or l)# Slave Cabinet: Description Specifies the trunk combinations used in the DBS system (analog trunks only by default). Setting this address to “Tl and Analog trunks” tells the DBS system that Tl and analog trunks are being used in the same cabinet. (Each Tl channel uses up one trunk port on the analog trunk card.) Programming I FFI 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 1# 1# (0 or l)# + 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet + O=Analog trunks only. l=Tl and Analog trunks. Related Programming Number of Tl Channels: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# l# 2# (0-24)# Tl TrunkClosure: FFl 8# 7# (1 or 2)# (l-4)# (l-8)# (0 or l)# Trunk Circuit Type: F’F2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-3)# Notes Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must,be turned off, then back on. CPC-B Versions Beginning With 6.03. The Trunk Configuration address is no longer present -- simply use the Trunk Circuit Type address to assign trunk ports as Loop-Start, Ground-Start, DID or Tl trunks. Page 1-158 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Number of Tl Channels Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4## 1# 2# (0-24)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 5# l# 2# (O-24)# Description This program determines how many TI channels will be used in the DBS system. This address provides “Fractional Tl” capability -- using only a portion of the 24 available channels on the Tl card. Since each Tl channel used will need one analog trunk port dedicated to it, this setting will decrement the number of available analog trunk ports -- in other words, each Tl channel used will subtract from the total number of trunk ports available for analog usage. In CPC-B 4.x versions (prior to 5.0), the entry for Number of Tl Channels must be in increments of 8. This is because the entire analog trunk card (all 8 trunk ports on the same card) must be dedicated to Tl, even if only some of the ports are used for Tl channels. In other words, the remaining (unused) ports on the card are not available for use as analog trunks. In CPC-B Version 5.0 and above, those remaining ports cuz be used as analog trunks. Make sure the Number of Tl Channels setting equals the number of trunks programmed for Tl in Trunk Circuit Type (FF2 Trunk# 21#). Programming I I FFI 8# 4# (4 or 5)# I# 2# (0-24)# $ + 4=Master Cabinet Number of Tl Channels Used 5=Slave Cabinet NOTE: In CPC-B versions prior to 5.0, this setting must be an increment of “8” (0, 8, 16 or 24). Related Programming Trunk Configuration: FFl 8# # (4 or 5)# l# l# (0 or l)# Tl Trunk Closure: FFl 8# 7# (1 or 2)# (l-4)# (l-8)# (0 or l)# Trunk Circuit Type: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-3)# Notes Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. Closing Analog Trunk Ports for Tl Usage. In CPC-B Versions 5.0 to 6.02; make sure the trunk ports reserved for Tl are “closed” from loop-start usage in the Tl Trunk Closure address (FFl 8# 7#). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-159 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Frame Format Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# l# 3# (0 or l)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 5# l# 3# (0 or l)# Description Selects the framing format used by the Tl. Either “Superframe” (SF) or “Extended Super-frame” (ESF) can be selected. The SF consists of 12 frames, with each frame including 192 information bits and 1 framing bit. The ESF consists of 24 frames (double the length of the SF format). ESF also supports monitoring and maintenance capabilities that are not available with the SF format. Programming FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# l# 3# (0 or l)# f 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet Notes t O=Superframe (SF) l=Extended Super-frame (ESF) Central Office Requirement. The framing format must match what is ordered from the CO. Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. Page l-160 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Section 400-Programming Line Coding Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher. Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 1# 4# (0 or I)# FFl 8# 4## 5## l# 4# (0 or l)# Slave Cabinet: Description Programming Selects the line coding format used by the Tl. Either “BSZS” (binary g-zeros suppression) or “AMP (Alternate Mark Inversion) can be selected. In most cases (and by default), AMI is used. I ~ FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# l# 4# (0 or l)# f f 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet Notes O=AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) l=B8ZS (binary g-zeros suppression) Central Ofice Requirement. The framing format must match what is ordered from the CO. Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, .the system must be turned off. then back on. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-161 sectlon 400~Programming Lnapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Failure Mode Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4## I# 5# (0 or l)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 5# l# W (0 or l)# Description Determines the way the system responds to alarms. By default, the system will continue to operate even if errors are detected. Programming I FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 1# 5# (0 or I)# f 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet Notes P?ge l-l 62 f O=Mode 1 (the Tl continues to operate even if errors are detected) l=Mode 2 (the Tl shuts down if errors are detected) Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FF1) Remote Loopback Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4#I 4# l# 6# (0 or l)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 5# l# 6# (0 or l)# Description DBS-70-400 This address is reserved for future use. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-163 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Yellow Alarm Send Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4# 1# 7# (0 or l)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 5# 1# 7W (0 or l)# Description Determines whether the DBS sends a yellow alarm signal to the CO. A yellow alarm is sent to the distant end of the Tl link to indicate that a red alarm has occurred. If a red alarm occurs at the CO, the CO sends a yellow alarm to the DBS. If a red alarm occurs at the DBS, the DBS sends a yellow alarm to the CO. Programming I FFl 8# 4# (4 or5)# l# 7# (0 or l)# + 4==Master Cabinet 5=S1 ave Cabinet f O=No l=Yes Related Programming Yellow Alarm Detection: FFl’ 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 2# (0-15)# Yellow Alarm Recovery: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 3# (0-15)# Yellow Alarm Counter: FFl 8# # (4 or 5)# 3# 6# (0-15)# Yellow Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# l# (0-15)# Yellow Alarm FF Key: FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)# CONF (107# or 127#)# Page 1-164 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Flash Key Operation Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8## 4## 4## l# 8# (0 or l)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8## 4# 5# 1# 8# (0 or l)# Description In the current version of DBS Tl, a “switchhook flash” releases and reseizes the Tl line. Programming 1 $ 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet DBS-70-400 1 FFl 8# 4#I (4 or 5)# l# 8# (0 or l)# DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com $ O=Release and reseize l=Reserved for future use Page 1-165 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi) Section 400-Programming Red Alarm Detection Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 2# 1# (015)# Slave Cabinet: FFI 8# 4## 5# 2# 1# (015)# Description The default value for this parameter is determined by network specifications. It should not be changed. If a red alarm occurs, the “CFA” LED on the Tl card lights. Also, if the Red Alarm Relay (FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 4# 2#) is enabled, the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card closes. Programming I FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# l# (O-5)# $ 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet $ 0=4 1=6 2=8 3=10 4=12 5=14 Related Programming Red Alarm Counter: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 3# (0-9000)# Red Alarm Relay: FFl 8# # (4 or 5)# 4# 2# (0 or l)# Red Alarm FF Key: FF5 (ExPort)# (Key)# CONF (103# or 123#)# Page l-l 66 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Prcgramming tFF1) Section 400-Programming Yellow Alarm Detection Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4## 2# 2# (0-15)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8## 4# 5# 2# 2# (0-15)# Description Programming Determines how long a yellow alarm signal must be on before the system detects a yellow alarm. When a yellow alarm occurs, the “YEL” LED on the Tl card lights. Also, if the Yellow Alarm Relay (FFl 8i: 4# 4/5n” 1# l#) is enabled, the alarm relay on the TI MDF card closes. I 1 FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 2# 2# (045)# 7 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet $ I Yellow Alarm Detection timer setting Default: 1 (50 ms) fsee tabie below! Table I-49. Yellow Alarm Detection timer values I Setting ! Value ( 150 ms 4 1 200 ms 5 1250ms I 1 [ 3OOms I350 ms 1 400 ms I450 ms DBS-70-400 10 500 ms 11 550ms 12 600 ms 13 650 ms 14 ,700 ms 15 750ms DBS Manual- Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page1 -167 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Related Programming Yellow Alarm Send: FFl 8# 4#/ (4 or 5)# l# 7# (0 or l)# Yellow Alarm Recovery: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 3# (0-15)# Yellow Alarm Counter: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 3# 6# (0-9000)# Yellow Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# # l# (0 or l)# Notes Page 1-168 Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Section 400-Programming Yellow Alarm Recovery Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4## 2# 3# (0115)# FFl 8# 4#I 5# 2# 3# (0115)# Slave Cabinet: Description Determines how long the DBS tries to recover from a yellow alarm before it re-syncs the Tl trunk. Programming FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 3# (0115)# 7 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet f Yellow Alarm Recovery timer setting Default: 1 (10 rns) (see table below) I Table l-50. Yellow Alarm Recovery timer values I Setting Value 0 Orlis 1 1 1oms 2 20 ms 3 30 ms 4 5 40 ms 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DBS-70-400 I 50 ms 60 ms 70 ms 80 ms 90 ms 110 ms 120 ms 130 ms 140 ms 150 ms 160 ms DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-169 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi) Section 400-Programming Related Programming Yellow Alarm Send: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# l# 7# (0 or l)# Yellow Alarm Detection: FF1 8# # (4 or 5)# 2# 2# (0-15)## Yellow Alarm Counter: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 6# (0-9000)# Yellow Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4## l# (0 or l)# Notes Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. Page l-l 70 DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 _ Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Other Alarms Detection Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4# 2# 4# (0-15)# FFl 8# 4# 5# 2# 4# (0015)# Slave Cabinet: Description Determines how long an out-of-frame (OOF), loss of signal, sync loss, or AIS signal must be on before the system generates an alarm. If an OOF, Sync Loss, or AIS alarm occurs, a corresponding LED on the Tl card lights. (Sync Loss alarms light the “SLIP” LED.) The alarm relay on the Tl MDF card will also close if the corresponding relay parameter is enabled. Programming I I FFI 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 4# (0-15)# 7 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet t Other Alarms Detection timer setting Default: 1 (250 rns) (see table below) Table l-51. Other Alarms Detection timer values Setting 0 Value Oms I 250ms I I I 2 3 4 5 6 I1 500 ms I 750 ms 1000 ms I 1250 ms I 1500 ms I 1750ms 1 2000 ms II 2500 ms I 3000 ms I 3500 ms 4000 ms 4500 ms 5000 ms I 5500 ms 1 1 I 8 10 12 13 14 15 DBS-70-400 I DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 1 Page l-171 C h a p t e r Related Programming Other Alarms Recovery: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 2# 5# (0-15)# Notes Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. Page 1-l 72 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com . DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Other Alarms Recovery Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4#I 4# 2# 5# (O-15)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8## 4# 5# 2# 5# (O-15)# Description Determines how long the DBS tries to recover from an Out-Of-Frame (OOF), Loss of Signal, Sync Loss, or AIS alarm before it re-syncs the Tl trunk. Programming I FFI 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 2# 5# (0115)# 7 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet Other Alarms Recovery timer setting Default: 1 (250 ms) (see table below) Table I-52. Other Alarms Recovery timer values Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Value Oms 250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms 2000 ms 2500 ms 3000 ms 4000 ms 5000 ms 6000 ms 7000 ms 8000 ms 9000 ms 10000 ms Related Programming Other Alarms Detection: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 2# 4## (0-15)# Notes DBS-70-400 Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-173 3ection 4uwrrogrammlng bikiprer I. 3ysrerr1 rrogrammwg \rr I) Frame Loss Counter Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4## 3# 1# (019000)# FFl 8# 4# 5# 3# 1# (O-9000)# Slave Cabinet: Description Determines how many frame losses occur before a Frame Loss Alarm FF key is lit. The FF key lights when the counter exceeds the specified number within a 24-hour period. For instructions on programming Tl alarm keys, see the TI Reference Manual (Section 500). Programming FFl 8# 4#/ (4 or 5)# 3# l# (019000)# f 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet Number of Frame Losses that occur within a 24-hour period before a Frame Loss Alarm FF key is lit Default: 9000 Related Programming Frame Loss Relay: FFl’ 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# 4# (0 or l)# Page l-l 74 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Slip Counter Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 3# 2# (0-9000)# FFl 8# 4#I 5# 3# 2# (0-9000)# Slave Cabinet: Description Determines how many slips occur before a Slip Alarm FF key is lit. (“Slips” are losses of data bits due to framing errors.) The FF key lights when the counter exceeds the specified number within a 24-hour period. This parameter also determines the number of slips that can occur before the system switches to the next clock source, at which time the slip error counter for the first clock source is reset, and all phone calls in progress are disconnected. It takes 20 seconds for the Tl to reboot. For instructions on programming Tl alarm keys, see the Tl Reference Manual (Section 500). Programming I FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 2# (O-9000)# f 4=Mas ter Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet Number of Slips that must occur within a 24-hour period before a Slip Alarm FF key is lit Default: 9000 Related Programming Sync Source 1: FFl 8# 4# l# 2# (l-3)# Sync Source 2: FF1 8# # l# 3# (0-3)# Sync Source 3: FFl 8# 4# l# 4# (0-3)# Slip FF Key: FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)# CONF ( 102# or 122#)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-175 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Red Alarm Counter Software Version: WC-6 Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 3# 3# (019000)# FFl 8# 4# 5# 3# 3# (O-9000)# Slave Cabinet: Description Determines how many red alarms occur before a Red Alarm FF key is lit. The FF key lights when the counter exceeds the specified number within a 24-hour period. For instructions on programming Tl alarm keys, see the TI Reference Manual (Section 500). Programming FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 3# (O-9000)# f 1 f 4=Master Cabinet Number of Red Alarms that must occur 5=Slave Cabinet within a 24-hour period before a Red Alarm FF key is lit Default: 9000 Related Programming Red Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# # 2# (0 or l)# Red Alarm Detection: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# l# (0 or l)# Red Alarm FF Key: FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)# CONF (103# or 123#)# Page l-l 76 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Loss of Signal Counter Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 3## 4# (O-9000)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 5# 3# 4#I (0-9000)# Description Determines how many instances of loss of signal must occur before a Signal Loss Alarm FF key is lit. Signal loss occurs when the incoming Tl signal is not received for more than 150 ms. The FF key lights when the counter exceeds the specified number within a 24-hour period. For instructions on programming Tl alarm keys, see the TI Reference h4anuai (Section 500). Programming FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 4# (0=9llOO)# 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet Instances of Signal Loss that must occur within a 24-hour period before a Signal Loss Alarm FF key is lit Default: 9000 Related Programming Red Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# 2# (0 or l)# Red Alarm Detection: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 2# l# (0 or l)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-1 77 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Sync Loss Counter Software Version: CPC-8 Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 3# 5# (O-9000)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 5# 3# 5# (019000)# Description Determines how many instances of sync loss must occur before a Sync Loss Alarm FF key is lit. The FF key lights when the counter exceeds the specified number within a 24-hour period. For instructions on programming Tl alarm keys, see the Tl Reference Manual (Section 500). Programming FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 5# (019000)# /f &Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet $ Instances of Sync Loss that must occur within a 24hour period before a Sync Loss Alarm FF key is lit Default: 9000 Related Programming Sync Loss Relay: FFl 8# # (4 or 5)# 4# 3# (0 or l)# Page 1-178 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Yellow Alarm Counter Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 3# 6# (O-9000)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 5# 3# 6# (0-9000)# Description Determines how many yellow alarms must occur before a Yellow Alarm FF key is lit. The FF key lights when the counter exceeds the specified number within a 24-hour period. For instructions on programming Tl alarm keys, see the TI Reference Manual (Section 500). Programming FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 6# (0-9000)# 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet Number of Yellow Alarms that must occur within a 24-hour period before a Yellow Alarm FF key is lit Default: 9000 Related P ogramming Yellow Alarm Send: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# l# 7# (0-15)# Yellow Alarm Detection: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 2# (O-15)+/ Yellow Alarm Recovery: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 3# (0-15)# Yellow Alar-n-t Relay: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 4# l# (0-15)# Yellow Alarm FF Key: FF5 (ExtF’ort)# (Key)# CONF (107# or 127#)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-179 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl ) Yellow Alarm Relay Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4## 4# l# (0 or l)# FFl 8# 4# 5# 4# l# (0 or l)# Slave Cabinet: Description Determines whether the system closes the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card in the event of yellow alarms. The alarm relay can be connected to an external alarm device such as a buzzer. (This device must be purchased separately; it is not provided with the DBS Tl.) The Yellow Alarm Detection address (FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 2# 2# 0-15#) determines how many yellow alarms occur before the relay closes. Programming FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# l# (0 or l)# 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet f O=Off (Yellow Alarm relay does not close) l=On (Yellow Alarm relay closesj Related, Programming Yellow Alarm Send: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5j# l# 7# (0-15)# Yellow Alarm Detection: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 2# 2# (0-15)# Yellow Alarm Recovery: FF 1 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 3# (0- lS)# Yellow Alarm Counter: FFl 8# 4#+ (4 or 5)# 3# 6# (0-15)# Yellow Alarm FF Key: FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)# CONF (107# or 127#)# Page l-180 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/35 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DES-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Red Alarm Relay Software Version: C&-B Version 4.0 or higher. Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8## 4# 4# 4#/ 2# (0 or l)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8# 4#I 5## 4## 2# (0 or l)# Description Determines whether the system closes the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card in the event of red alan-ns. A red alarm indicates that a loss of frame (OOF) or loss of signal has continued for more than 2.5 seconds. The alarm relay can be connected to an external alarm device such as a buzzer. (This device must be purchased separately; it is not provided with the DBS Tl.) The Red Alarm Detection address (FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 2# l# 0-5#) determines how many red alarms occur before the relay closes. Programming I I FF1 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# 2# (0 or I)# f 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet O=Off (Red Alarm relay does not close) l=On (Red Alarm relay closes) Related Programming Red Alarrn Detection: FFl 8# 4## 4/5# 2# l# (0-15)# Red Alarm Counter: FFl 8# 4## 4/5# 3# 3# (0-9000)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-181 Chapter 1. System PrOgrammIng (Wl) Sectlon 400~Programming Sync Loss Relay Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4## 4#I 3# (0 or l)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8W 4# 5# 4#I 3# (0 or l)# Description Determines whether the system closes the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card in the event of sync loss alarms, which result from clocking errors. The alarm relay can be connected to an external alarm device such as a buzzer. (This device must be purchased separately; it is not provided with the DBS Tl.) Programming FFI 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# 3# (0 or l)# f 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet O=Off (Sync Loss relay does not close) l=On (Sync Loss relay closes) Related Programming Sync Loss Counter: FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 3# 5# (0-9000)# Page 1-182 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-IO-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI ) Section 400-Programming Frame Loss Relay Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher Address:. Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4# 4#! 4# (0 or l)# FFl 8# 4## 5# 4# 4## (0 or l)# Slave Cabinet: Description Determines whether the system closes the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card in the event of frame loss alarms. The alarm relay can be connected to an external alarm device such as a buzzer. (This device must be purchased separately: it is not provided with the DBS Tl.) Programming FFI 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# 4# (0 or l)# I 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet f O=Off (Frame Loss relay does not close) l=On (Frame Loss relay closes) I Related Programming Frame Loss Counter: F?Fl 8# 4# 4/5# 3# l# (0-9000)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-l 83 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) AIS Relay Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 4# 5# (0 or l)# FFl 8# 4# 5# 4# 5# (0 or I)# Slave Cabinet: Description Determines whether the system closes the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card in the event of Alarm Indication Signals (AIS), which are comprised of all l’s and are unframed. The alarm relay can be connected to an external alarm device such as a buzzer. (This device must be purchased separately; it is not provided with the DBS Tl.) Programming I FFI 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# 5# (0 or I)# I 4=Master Cabinet5=Slave Cabinet f O=Off (AIS relay does not close) l=On (AIS relay closes) Related Programming Other Alarms Detection: FFL 8# 4## 4/5# 2# 4# (0-15)# Other Alarms Recovery: FFl 8# # 4/5# 2# 5# (0-15)# Page 1-l 84 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI) Section 400-Programming Relay Reset Sofhwak Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4## 4# 6# (0 or I)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 5## 4#/ 6# (0 or l)# Description Determines whether the Tl alarm relay is cleared (opened) automatically or manually. l l If cleared automatically, the relay is opened approximately one second after the alarm condition ceases. If cleared manually, the relay can be opened by entering the Alarm Relay Clear code: - First, enter the programming authorization code -#98 9999 - Then enter one of the following codes: ON/OFF #94 8 (for Master Cabinet) ON/OFF #95 8 (for Slave Cabinet) Programming I I FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 4## 6# (0 for l)# 4=Master Cabinet 5=Slave Cabinet . O=Automatically cleared l=Must be manually cleared Related Programming Yellow Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4#I 4/5# 4# l# (0-15)# Red Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 4#+ 2# (0-15)# Sync Loss Relay: FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 4# 3# (0-15)# Frame LossRelay: FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 4# 4# (0-15)# AIS Relay: FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 4## 5# (0- 15)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-l 85 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Tl Trunk Type Emulation Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4# 6# (Trunk)## 1# (OS)# Description Programming Determines the type of trunk signaling that each Tl channel emulates (E&M by default). I FFl 8# 4## 6# (1164)# l# (013)# f Trunk Number (l-64) Notes + O=Loop start 1 =ireserved for-future use) 2=Ground Start (used for ground start emulation) 3=E&M Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. Ground Start Requirement. If your system uses Tl COP (Central Office Protocol) Version 1.1 or 1.2, it must be ,upgraded to Version 1.4 or higher if you wish to use the “Ground Start” setting. Page l-l 88 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl ) Section 400-Programming DID/DNS Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: IFFi W 4# W (Trunk)# 2# (O-2)# Deskiption Use this address to enable trunks for DID or DNIS calls. l l If DID is seiected, the system will use the DID Numbers Table (see FFl 8# 3#) to detemine which extension(s) will receive the DID call. If DNTS is selected (available only with Tl interface), the system will use the DNIS Numbers Table (see FFl 8# 4# 7#) to determine which extension(s) will receive the DNIS call. The DID Numbers Table can be used for DID or DNIS. Therefore, ifall 500 entries in the DNIS Numbers Table are filled, a Tl channel can be set to DID, and DNIS service can still be used. Programming i FFI 6# 4# 6# (1-64)# 2# (0-2)# f Trunk Number (l-64) 4 O=Neith& DID nor DNIS is used. l=DID is used. 25DNIS is used. Related Programming Inbound DID DialNumbers: FFl 8# 3# (DIDNo.)# (ExtNo.)# DNIS Number Setting: FFl 8# # 7# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)# DIDIDNIS Flexible Ringing Assignments: FFl 8# (5# or 6#) @lD/DNIS No.)# (ExtNo.)# (OOOO[OO]-l l l l [ 1 l])# Notes Digit Length Requiremen& The DBS only supports 4digit DIDAlMS numbers. CO Requirement When the CO sends a DIDIDNIS call to the DBS, it first receives a “wink” signal &om the DBS before sending the digits. Once the wink is received, the CO should wait at least 200 ms before sending the digits. Power-C’chg Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be tumed off, then back OIL DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 DBS-70-400 ;.. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-1 87 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Soha= k~;xi~n: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: #-I T r;a# 4# 6# (Truwk)# 3# (012)# Description Determines the signaling class used by Tl channels on outgoing calls (Immediate Start by de&&). ’ Programming FFI 8# 4# 6# (144)# 3# (0-2)# f Trunk Number (l-64) O=Immediate Start. l=Wink start. 2=Dial Tone Start. CO Requirement. The Outgoing Type setting must match what is ordered f?om the CO. . Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Page 1-188 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Incoming Signaling Type Software Version: CPC-8 Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFI 8# 4# 6## (Trunk)# 4#I (0 or I)# Description Determines the signaling class used by Tl channels on incoming calls (Immediate Start/Ringdown by default). Programming r FFI 8# 4# 6# (I-64)# 4# (0 or l)# f Trunk Number (l-64) Notes + O=Immediate Start/ Ringdown. l=Wink Start. CO Requirement. The Incoming Type setting must match what is ordered from the CO. Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-189 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FF’l) Trunk Mode Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFI 8# 4#I 6# (Trunk)# 5# (0 or l)# Description Determines whether Tl channels are used for only outgoing calls, or for both incoming and outgoing calls. Programming I FFI 8# 4# 6# (l-64)# 5# (0 or l)# f Trunk Number (l-64) Notes + O=Incoming and Outgoing. l=Outgoing only. Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. Page l-190 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Robbed Bit Setting Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4## 6# (Trunk)# 6# (0 or l)# Description The Robbed Bit Setting determines if AB or ABCD signaling is used. AB/ABCD signaling robs bits from the Tl channels, and uses those bits to transmit signaling information. SF (SuperFrame) normally uses AB signaling; ESF (Extended SuperFrame) normally uses ABCD signaling. Programming I FFl 8# 4# 6# (l-64)# 6# (0 or l)# i( Trunk Number ( l-64)- Notes lr O=Robbed Bit Off (AB/ABCD signaling not used) l=Robbed Bit On (AB/ABCD signaling is used) Yower-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-191 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Incoming Dialing Method Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4# 6# (Trunk)# 7# (0 or l)# Description Programming Determines whether the system expects dial-pulse or DTMF digits for incoming DID or DNIS calls over the Tl. I FFl 8# 4# 6# (1164)# 7# (0 or l)# f Trunk Number (l-64) Notes f O=Dial-Pulse (10 PPS) l=DTMF Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off..then back on. Hardware Requirement. An MFR card is required for DID/DNIS if DTMF signaling is used. Page l-l 92 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Dial Tone Transmission Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher. Address: FFl 6# 4# 6# (Trunk)#I W (0 or l)# Description DBS-70-400 This address is reserved for future use. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-193 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Busy Tone Transmission Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4# 6# (Trunk)# 9# (0 or l)# Description Page 1-194 This address is reserved for future use. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com . DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi) Dial Tone Receive Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8# 4# 6# (Trunk)# lO# (0 or l)# Description Determines whether dial tone is transmitted from the DBS Tl channel to DBS stations. Set this address to “On” only if the far end does not provide Tl dial tone. Programming I I FFl 8# 4# 6# (l-64)# 1 O# (0 or l)# f Trunk Number (1-64) Notes + O=Off l=On Or&ring Tones From Carrier. If a carrier is supplying Tl services, always order Dial Tone and Ringback Tones from the carrier. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 1-195 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Ringback Tone Transmission Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8## 4#I 6# (Trunk)# 11# (0 or l)# Description Determines whether ringback tone is transmitted from the DBS Tl channel to the CO. Set this address to “On” only if the far end does not provide ringback tone. Programming I 1 FFI 8# 4# 6# (l-64)# 11# (0 or l)# + /4 Tmnk Sumber i l-64) &Off l=On Notes Page l-196 Or&ring Tones From Currier. If a carrier is supplying Tl services, always order Dial Tone and Ringback Tones from the carrier. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400~Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) DNIS Number Setting Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FFl 8## 4## 7# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)# Description Use this address to assign DNIS number(s) to extension(s). l l l Up to 500 different DNIS numbers can be assigned. One DNIS number can be assigned to multiple extensions (this takes up only one entry in the 500 available entries). One extension can have multiple DNIS numbers assigned to it. (The number of entries taken up is equal to the number of DNIS numbers assigned to the extension.) Programming I FFl 8# 4# 7# (0000-9999)# (1 O-69 or 1009699)# f 4-digit DNIS Number I + Extension Number Related Programming . Multiple DID/DNIS: FFl 2# l# 32# (0 or l)# DlD/DNIS (enabling trunks for): FFl 8# # 6# (Trunk)# 2# (0-2)## DNIS Flexible Ringing Assignments: FFl 8# 6# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)# (0000[00]-llll[ll])# Extension Numbers: FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)# Notes DZVZ,S Requiremenf. DNIS is available only with the Tl interface. Digit Length Requirement. The DBS supports 4-digit DNIS numbers with either dial pulse or DTMF transmission. DlVZ,S Ring ControL Ringing for the DNIS number at the assigned extension(s) is controlled by the next address (FFl 8# 6#). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-197 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) DlDlDNlS Flexible Ringing Assignments Sofbvare Version: CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher Address: for DID: FFl 8# 5# (DIDNo.)# (ExtNo.)# (OOOO[OO]-llll[Sl])# for DNIS: FFl 8# 6# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)# (OOOO[OO]-llll[ll])# Description This address allows you to enable or disable ringing for specific DID/DNTS numbers during Day, Night and Night 2 modes. This also applies to delayed ringing. Note: The DID/DNIS number must already be assigned to an extension number before you can assign it for flexible ringing. See FFl 8# 3# (for DID) and FFl 8# 4# 7# (for DNIS). Programming FFl 8# (5 or 6)# (XXXX)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)# (OOOO[OO-llll[ll])## f 5=DID 6=DNTS 1 + + Extension Number Ring Settings 4-digit DID or that will receive (see table below) DNIS number ringing (must already O=Disabled be assigned to 1=Enabled an extension, or the system won’t Default: Ringing enabled; accept the number Delayed ringing disabled. here) L Table l-53. DIDIDNIS Flexible Ring settings in different CPC-B versions Ring Control for each digit setting 1st digit 2nd digit 3rd digit 4th digit 5th digit 6th digit Default Setting: CPC-B Version 5.0 to 6.1 Day ring Night ring Delayed Day ring Delayed Night ring [not available] [not available] 1100 CPC-B Version 7.0 or higher Day ring Night ring Night 2 ring Delayed Day ring Delayed Night ring / Delayed Night 2 ring 111000 Related Programming Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 23# (0 or l)# Page l-l 98 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com D BS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl 3# 26# (0-15)# Inbound DID Dial Numbers: FFl 8# 3# (D1DNo.H (ExtNo.)# DID/DNIS (enabling trunks for): FFl 8# 4# 6# (Trunk)# 2# (0-2)## DNIS Number Setting: FFl 8# # 7# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)# Notes Delayed Ring Timing. Timing for DID/DNIS delayed ringing is controlled by the CO Delayed Ring Timer (FFl 3# 26# O-l%). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-199 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming . Tl Trunk Closure Software Version: WC-B Versions 5.0 to 6.02 Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 7# 1# (l-4)# (118)# (0 or l)# Slave Cabinet: FFl 8# 7# 2# (l-4)# (1,8)# (0 or l)# Description In CPC-B Versions 5.0 to 6.02, use this address to facilitate Fractional Tl, where not all of the 24 available channels on the Tl card are used. Lf the trunk ports on the highest-numbered analog trunk card are divided between Tl and analog, use this address to close the trunk ports dedicated to Tl -- and open the trunks to be used for analog. (see illustration below for an example) Use the “Number of Tl Channels” address (FFl g# 4# 4/5# l# 2#) to tell the system how many channels you want to use. The system will automatically assign one analog trunk port for each Tl channel used. Channel #l automatically uses the highest-numbered port on the highest-numbered trunk card; Channel #2 uses the next highest port; etc. Figure 1-3. Trunk Cl we Eramnle in a Trunk Cards (each card has 8 trunk ports, numbered as shown) Card 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Ca;d 2/ I[ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 In this example, the following was programmed: Trunk Configuration set to “Tl and Analog” (see FFl 8# 4## 4# 1# l#). Number of Tl Channels set to “12” (see FFl 8# 4## 4# l# 2#). Tl Trunk Closure set Tl trunks 5-8 on Card 3 to “Close”: FFl 8# 7# l# 3# (5 thru 8)# l# Page l-200 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl) Section 400-Programming Programming I r FFl 8# 7# l=Master Cabinet 2=Slave Cabinet Trunk Slot T&k Port on Card O=Open l=Close Related Programming Trunk Configuration: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# l# l# (0 or l)# Number of Tl Channels: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# l# 2# (0-24)# Trunk Circuit Type: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-3)# Notes Loop-Start Card Version Requirement. This Tl Trunk Closure address can only be used with the VB-435 10A or VB-43511A versions of the loopstart card. CPC-B Versions Beginning With 6.03. The Tl Trunk Closure address is no longer present. Instead, simply use the Trunk Circuit Type address (FF2 Trunk# 21#) to assign trunk ports as Loop Start, Ground Start, DID or Tl. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page l-201 2. Trunk Programming (FF2) Use the FF2 programming addresses in this chapter to set parameters for the CO trunks of the DBS system. Most of these FF2 addresses require a trunk number and/or extension port entry. The acceptable range of trunks/extension ports varies according to the configuration of your DBS system. In this chapter, the range used for trunks is l-64. which is the maximum available number of trunks in a DBS 96 + DBS 96 system with a CPC-B card. The range used for extension ports is 1-144, which is also the maximum in a DBS 96 + DBS 96 with CPC-B. For more information, see Section 300-Installation. This chapter covers the following FF2 program addresses: FF Key Address Topic Page FF2 (Trunk)# I# (O-l)# Trunk Port Operation 2-3 12-4 FF2 (Trunk)# 2% (O- l)# DTMF/Pulse Dialing for Trunks FF2 (Trunk)# 3# (O-l)# Pooled Trunk Access for Group “9” 2-5 FF~ (TnnrH# 4+~ thru 9# (o-l)# Pooled Trunk Access for Groups - “81-86” , 2-6 FF2 (Trunk)# lo# (l-2)# 1 Trunk Port Type 1 2-7 J?F2 (Trunk)# 11# (0-I)# DISA Auto Answer 1 2-8 FF2 VrunH# 12# (Ext.Pon)# Private Trunk Line I 2-9 FF2 (Trunk)#’ 13# (0-l)# Automatic Pause for PBX Line 2-10 FF2 (Trunk)# 14# (0-l)# Dial Tone Detection 2-11 FF2 (Trunk)# 1% ( I-3)# Outbound DTMF Signal Duration for Auto-Dialed Digits FF2 (Trunk)# 16# (0- I)# Unsupervised Trunk Conference 1 FF2 (Trunk)# 17# (0-l)# 1 Inbound Ring Pattern 12-14 JYF2 (Trunk)# 18# (0-15)# 1 Trunk Disconnect Detection Timer t 2-15 FF2 (Trunk)# 19# HHMM# DISA Start Time 1 2-16 1 FF2 (Trunk)# 20# HHMM# I DISA End Time 12-17 FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-4)# Trunk Circuit Type (CPC-AII/B) 2-18 FF2 (Trunk)# 22# (0-l)# DID Immediate or Wink Start (CPC-B only) 2-21 FF2 (Trunk)# 23# (0-15)# 1 2-22 Wink Start Timer (UC-B only) FF2 (Trunk)# 24# (O- 15)# 2-23 Time Out for Dialed DID Digits (CPC-B onb) FF2 (Trunk)# 25# (O- 15)# 2-24 DID Interdigit Timeout (CPC-B only) FF2 (Trunk)# 26# (4-8)# 2-25 Trunk Port Class (WC-B only) I I I DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 2-l ’ 1 1 I I Page 2-2 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 ‘\ Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com * DE!%70-400 Trunk Port Operation Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# l# (0 or l)# Description Use this feature to put a CO trunk in service or “busy it out”. Programming FF2 (li”” 1# (0 y l)# Trunk Nuniber Notes O=Place trunk in service. l=Busy-out the trunk. Precaution on Putting Lines Out of Service. If you busy-out a trunk, an incoming caller on that trunk will still hear ringing, even though the trunk is not functional. D BS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 2-3 DTMF/PuIse Dialing for Trunks Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 2# (0 or l)# Description Use this feature to set a trunk for DTMF or pulse dialing (10 pulses per second). Programming I Trunk Number O=DTMF l=Pulse dialing (10 pps) Notes -Door Box Adapter Setting. CO trunk ports used for Door Box Adapter Sensors should be set for “Pulse dialing”. Page 2-4 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 3ecuon 4uu-rrogramming c;naprer 2. i runK rrogramming (i-q Pooled Trunk Access for Group “9” Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 3# (0 or l)# Description Use this feature to place a trunk in a group from which trunks are automatically chosen for outbound dialing. When you dial “9” from an SLT or digital extension, or press an FF key that is set as a pooled trunk key, any available trunk in the group will be accessed. The trunk selection is made from the highest trunk number in the group to the lowest. Programming t FF2 (l-64)# 3# (0 or I)# f t Trunk Num bkr O=Trunk is not included in access group “9”. l=Trunk is included in access group “9”. Related Programming LCR Access: FFl 2# l# 3# (0 or l)# Notes Interaction with LCR. Set the “LCR Access” option (address FF12# l# 3#) so that dialing “9” indicates a Pooled Trunk call. If this option is set so that dialing “9” indicates an LCR call, trunk selection will default to pooled trunk line access group 9 if all lines that could be used for LCR access are busy. Required Hardware Setting. To use pooled trunks, Strap S 1 on the CPC card must be cut. See Section 300~Installation for instructions. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 2-5 Section 400-Programming Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2) Pooled Trunk Access for Groups 1L81-86” Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# (419)# (0 or I)# Description Use this feature to place a trunk in a group from which trunks are automatically chosen for outbound dialing. When you dial 81,82,83,84,85, or 86 from an SLT or digital extension, or press an FF key that is set as a pooled trunk key, any available trunk in the group will be accessed. The trunk selection in a particular group is made from the highest available trunk number to the lowest available trunk number. Programming y-64)# (i,', (0 orf# Trunk Number Notes Pooled Trunk Group: 4==Group 81 5=Group 82 6=Group 83 7=Group 84 8=Group 85 9=Group 86 O=The trunk is not included. l=The trunk is included. Placing Trunks In More Than One Group. The same trunks may appear in more than one pooled trunk group, including trunk group 9. Required Hardware Setting. To use pooled trunks, Strap S 1 on the CPC card must be cut. See Section 300~Installation for instructions. Page 2-6 DES Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2) Section 400-Programming Trunk Port Type Software Version: -All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# lO# (1 or 2)# Description Each trunk port must be identified as a regular CO trunk or as a PBX line. Programming . FF2 (I-64)# lO# (1 or 2)# t Trunk Number t l=Regular (CO) trunk 2=PBX line Related Programming Auto Flash R&al: FFl 2# l# 6# (0 or l)# PBX Access Codes: FFl 2# 3# (l-8)# (O-999 or 0* to 99*)# Automatic Pause Position for PBX Access Codes: FFl 2# 3# (9-18)# (l-3)# Automatic Pause Timer: FFl 3# 12# (0- 15)# PBX Flash Timer: FFl 3# 18# (O-10)+! Trunk Port Type: FF2 (l-64)# lO# ( 1 or 2)# Automatic Pause For PBX Line: FF2 (l-64)# 13# (0 or l)# Notes Toll Restriction Interaction. TRS settings (FM addresses) can be affected by this parameter. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 2-7 Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2j Section 400-Programming DISA Auto Answer Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# ll# (0 or l)# Description Use this feature to set a trunk(s) to automatically provide DISA tone upon connection with an inbound caller. (However, after hearing the DISA tone, the caller will still have to enter an ID code in order to use DISA.) If a trunk is set to provide DISA tone, you can limit DISA operation on that trunk to a certain number of hours each day, using the DISA Start Time and DISA End Time addresses. Programming FF2 (l-64)# 11# (0 or l)# t Trunk Number t O=DI!SA tone is not provided. l=DISA tone is urovided. Related Programming Caller ID Automatic DISA: FFl 2# 8# (l-lO)# (PhoneNo.)# Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ID Code: FFl 5# (0000-9999)# DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1: FFl 6# l# (0000-9999)# DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2: FFl 6# 2# (0000-9999)# DISA Start Time: FF2 (Trunk)# 19# (HHMM)## DISA End Tie: FF2 (Trunk)# 20# (HHMM)# Notes Caller ID Znferaction. If your DBS system supports Caller ID, do not enable DISA on any trunk using this address. (Caller ID will automatically enable or disable DISA to the caller based on the phone number he is calling from.) DZSA Hardware Requirement. An MFR card is required for DISA, so that the system can interpret DTMF tones entered via the DISA connection. Page 2-8 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2) Section 400-Programming Private Trunk Line Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 12# (ExtPort)# Description Use this address to assign a private trunk line to an extension. A number of private trunks can belong to one extension. Once a private trunk is assigned to an extension, other extensions cannot make outbound calls or receive inbound calls on that trunk (the system wili assign Toll Restriction Type 0 to the trunk on all other extensions). The system will assign TRS Type 7 (no restrictions) to the private trunk assigned to the extension. Programming To assign a Private Trunk Line(s) to an exterision . . . FF2 (l-64)# 12# (11144)# t Trunk Number f Extension Port Number To cancel Private Trunk assignment(s) for an extension . . . I FF2 (l-64)# 12# (19144)# CONF ON/OFF I Related Programming Day TRS Types O-7 for Trunks: FF7 7# (ExtPort)## (Trunk)# (0-7)# Night TRS Types O-7 for Trunks: FM 8# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)++ (0-7)# Notes DBS-70-400 Reprogramming Toll Restrictions for Disabled Private Trunks. If a private trunk setting is enabled and then later disabled, the system will not automatically make that trunk available to other extensions. (TRS Type 0 will apply to that trunk on all extensions.) Therefore, the trunk’s TRS type must be manually reprogrammed for each extension wishing to use that trunk (using addresses FF7 7# and FF7 8#). DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 2-9 bnaprer 2. I ruiln rrogrammlng (rrq 3ecwtl 4uu-rrogrammlng Automatic Pause for PBX Line Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 13# (0 or l)# Description This address determines if a pause is automatically inserted during the dialing of a PBX access code. If this address is enabled, the system will automatically pause after dialing the first, second, or third digit of the PBX access code. See the PBX Access Code(s) address (FFl 2# 3# 9-18# l-3#) for more information. If this address is disabled (default setting), the phone, user must manually insert a pause by pressing REDIAL. The length of the pause (whether inserted manually by the user or automatically by the system) is determined by the Automatic Pause Timer, which isset at address FFl 3# 12#. Note: Before assigning the automatic pause, you must first designate the trunk as a “PBX line” (FF2 Trunk# lO# 2#). Programming FF2 (l-64)# 13# (0 or l)# Trunk Number O=Automatic pause is enabled. l=Automatic pause is disabled. Related Programming Automatic Pause Position for PBX Access Codes: FFl 2# 3# (9-18)# (l-3)# PBX Flash Timer: FFl 3# 18# (0-lO)## Trunk Port Type: FF2 (Trunk)# lO# (1 or 2)# Page 2-10 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Dial Tone Detection Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 14# (0 or l)# Description This program determines when dialed digits are outpulsed -- either according to the Dial Pause Timer setting (FFl 3# 17#), or after the DBS detects dial tone. Programming FF2 (I-64)# 14#I (0 or l)# Trunk Number O=Digits are outpulsed according to the Dial Pause Timer. l=Digits are outpulsed after dial tone is detected. . Related Programming Dial PauseTimer: FFl 3# 17# (0-15)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 2-11 Outbound DTMF Signal Duration for Auto-Dialed Digits Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 15# (1.3)# Description This address controls DTMF signal duration when digits are dialed automatically by the system rather than the user. Examples of DBS dialing include: l l l l Redial Saved Number Redial Speed Dialing Adding LCR digits Programming I FF2 (I-64)# 15# (113)# t Trunk Number t 1=75 ms on/50 m off 24125 ms on/125 ms off 3=250 ms on/250 ms off Notes DTMF Tone for Manual Dialing. If you dial manually (press a digit key), the DTMF tone will emit until the button is released. Page 2-l 2 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DES-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2) Unsupervised Trunk Conference Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 16# (0 or l)# Description Use this feature to enable trunk(s) to be used in an unsupervised conference call. Pro,gramming FF2 (l-64)# 16# (0 or l)# f Trunk Number t O=The CO’trunk cannot be used for an unsupervised conference. l=The CO trunk can be used for an unsupervised conference. Related Programming Unsupervised Conference Timer: FFl 3# 1 l# (0-15)# Unsupervised Conference: FF3 (ExtPortj# 13# (0 or l)# Notes DES-70-400 Unsupervised Conference Timer Operation. A conference call will be automatically disconnected according to the Unsupervised Conference Timer setting (FF13# ll# O-l.%). DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 2-13 bIlaprttr L. I runK rrograrrwaiiy 3w.xu11 4uu-rroyrairirriirig \tt-2) Inbound Ring Pattern Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 17# (0-9)# Description Each CO trunk can be assigned a distinctive ring pattern for easy recognition of the trunk during an incoming call. Up to 9 different ring patterns are available. Programming r FF2 (1164)# 17# f Trunk Number Inbound Ring Pattern Default: 0 (determined by CO) (see the following table) Table 2-1. Ring P&ems for inbound trunk calls I 1 Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 I 6 I 7 I Value Synchronize (ring pattern determined by CO) 3 sec. on’1 sec. off 1 2 sec. on/2 sec. off 1 sec. on/l sec. off 1 sec. on/2 sec. off 1 sec. on/3 sec. off .5 sec. on/S sec. off 1 .5 sec. on/.5 sec. off/.5 sec. on/%.5 sec. off. 1 .5 sec. on/3.5 sec. off 1 1 sec. on/7 sec. off I I Notes Transferred Calls. This setting does not affect transferred calls. The ring pattern for transferred calls can be set in the Transfer Ring Pattern address (FFl 2# l# 31# 0-6#). Precedence of Extension Ring Pattern Setting. The ring pattern (if any) assigned to the extension (FF3 ExtPor# 39# Pattem#) will override this Inbound Ring Pattern for incoming trunk calls. Page 2-l 4 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2) Seotion 400~Programming Trunk Disconnect Detection Timer Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 18# (O-15)# Description When the trunk side of a CO call disconnects, the CO sends the DBS a disconnect signal by opening the loop (cutting voltage) for a specified length of time. This timer determines how long the DBS expects the disconnect signal to last. By default, an open loop of 350 ms or more will be interpreted as a disconnect signal. The standard range for CO disconnect signals is 350 to 600 ms. Programming FF2 (1164)# 16# (0115)# t f Trunk Number Trunk Disconnect Detection Timer setting Default: 7 (over 350 ms) (see table below) Table 2-2. Trunk Disconnect Detection Timer values Setting 0 1 2 3 4 13 14 15 DBS-70-400 Value I_gnore disconnect Over 50 ms Over 100 ms Over 150 ms Over 200 ms I Over 250ms I Over 300ms 1 Over 600 ms Over 650 ms Over 700 ms Over 750 ms DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 2-15 Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2)’ Section 400-Programming DISA Start Time Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 19# (HHMM)# Description Use this address to program a DISA trunk to begin DISA operation at a specified time each day. Trunks are enabled for DISA using the DISA Auto Answer address (FF2 Trunk# 1 l#). Use this DISA Start ‘lime address, and the DISA End Time address following, to limit DISA operation on a trunk to a certain time period each day. Programming To set the DISA Start Time . . . Enter the time using the 24-hour format. For example, enter 1515 to set the time to 3:15 p.m. FF2 (l-64)# 19# (HHMM)# t Trunk Number t Time Setting (24~hr. format) Default: **** (not set) To clear the DISA Start Time . . . I -1 FF2 (1164)# 19# CONF ON/OFF Related Programming Time Setting: FFl l# 2# (HHMM)# DISA Inbound Call ID Code: FFl 5# (0000-9999)# DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1: FFl 6## l# (0000-9999)# DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2: FFl 6# 2# (0000-9999)# DISA Auto Answer: FF2 (Trunk)# 1 l# (0 or l># DISA End Time: FF2 (Trunk)# 20# (HHMM)# Notes DISA Operation With Default Setting. If DISA Start Tiie is not set in this address (left at default ****), DISA operation will be on all the time. Caller ID Automatic DZSA. This DISA Start Time setting does not affect Automatic DISA operation with Caller JD (FF12# 8# 1-W PhoneNo.#). Page 2-l 6 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2) Section 400-Programming DISA End Time Software Version: All Versions Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 20# (HHMM)# Description Use this address to program a DISA trunk to stop DISA operation at a specified time each day. Trunks are enabled for DISA using the DISA Auto Answer address (FF2 Trunks 1 l#). Use this DISA End Tiie address, and the DISA Start Time address (previous page), to limit DISA operation on a trunk . to a certain time period each day. NOTE: The DBS will disable DISA to the trunk one minute after the time set in this address. (For example, if DISA End Time is set to 0815, DISA will actually end when the system clock reaches 8: 16 am.) Programming To set the DISA End nrne . . . Enter the time using the 24-hour format. For example, enter 0815 to set the time to 8:15 a.m. DISA will actually end when the system clock reaches 8: 16 a.m. FF2 (l-64)# 20# (HHMM)# Trunk Number I Time Setting (in 24-hr. format) Default: **** (not set) I To clear the DISA End Time . . . I FF2 (1164)# 20# CONF ON/OFF I Related Programming Time Setting: FFl l# 2# (HHMM)# DISA Inbound Call ID Code: FFl 5# (0000-9999)# DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1: FFl 6# l# (0000-9999)# DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2: FFl 6# 2# (0000-9999)# DISA Auto Answer: FF2 (Trunk)+/ ll# (0 or l)# DISA Start Time: FF2 (T&nk)# 19# (HHMM)# Notes Caller ID Automatic DZSA. This DISA End Time setting does not affect Automatic DISA operation with Caller ID (program address FFl 2# 8# l-10++ PhoneNo.#). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 2-17 Trunk Circuit Type Software Version: CPC-Ail and CPC-B (all versions) Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (Type)# Description This program determines the type of circuit for each trunk (Loop Start by default). NOTE: The circuit types available in each system depend on the CPC card version. See “Notes” below for more information. Programming FF2 (1164)# 21# (0-4)# + Trunk Number + O=Loop Start l=Ground Start 2=Analog DID 3=Tl 4=Caller ID (loop start) Related Programming Call Duration Timer (for Caller ID): FFl 2# l# 38# (0-2)# Caller ID Automatic DISA Callers: FFl 2# 8# (l-lO)# (PhoneNo.)# Tl settings: FFl 8# # thru 7# addresses Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer: FFl 3# 20# (l-8)# Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer: FFl 3# 21# (l-8)# DID Immediate or Wink Start: FF2 (Trunk)# 22# (0 or l)# Wink Start Timer: FF2 (Trunk)# 23# (0-15)# Time Out for Dialed DID Digits: FF2 (Trunk)# 2# (0-15)# DID Interdigit Timeout: FF2 (Trunk)# 25# (0-15)# Notes Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. Loop Sturt Circuit Type Considerations: 1. Loop Start is the most common type of CO line. 2. If a Ground Start Trunk Card is used, individual trunk ports on that card can be set to “Loop Start”. Page 2-18 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2) Section 400~Programming Ground Start Circuit Type Considerations: 1. Not available with CPC-AIL 2. Ground Start lines perform similarly to Loop Start: however, in terms of positive disconnect signals, Ground Start lines provide the most reliable connection between the CO and the DBS, with the least possibility of call collision or “glare”. 3. The Ground Start Trunk Card (VB-4353 1) is required for ground-start operation. 4. The Ground Start Trunk Card requires a -48 volt power supply, which must be properly connected to the DBS backplane terminals -- see Section .?OO-Installation for instructions. Misconnection of the power supply e result in serious damage to DBS equipment. 5. The FLASH and REDIAL features are not available on ground-start trunks. Analog DID Circuit Type Considhtions: 1. Not available with CPC-AIL 2. Available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher. 3. Requires DID Trunk Card (VB-43541). 4. Requires SCC-B card Version 1.27 or higher. 5. DID (Direct Inward Dialing) lines are beneficial in that the CO can place multiple inbound trunk calls (with different phone numbers) over the same circuit. These numbers can also be programmed to appear on multiple DBS extensions. 6. DID circuits can only be used for inbound calls (not for outbound). 7. The DBS supports 4-digit DID numbers with either Dial Pulse or (more commonly) Wink Start Tl Circuit ZQpe Considerations: 1. Not available with CPC-AII. 2. Available only with CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher. 3. Tl requires the following cards: Tl Interface (VB-43561) Tl MDF Card (VB-43562) Tl Sync Card (VB-43563) 4. When assigning trunks as Circuit Type “Tl”, you must start from the highest-numbered trunk port in the DBS cabinet structure, and move down sequentially from there. For more information, see the trunk assignment charts in the Tl Reference Manual (Section 500). l l l DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 2-I 9 5. If Fractional Tl (using only a portion of the 24 available Tl channels) is implemented, make sure that the number of trunks set to Circuit Type “Tl” matches the programmed Number of Tl Channels (FFl 8# # 4/5# l# 2# O-24+0. 6. In CPC-B Versions 5.0 to 6.02, if trunk usage on an analog trunk card is divided between Tl and analog, make sure that the Tl trunks are closed from analog usage in the Tl Trunk Closure address (FFl8# 7# l-2# l-# l-8# 0-l#). Caller ID Circuit Type Considerations: 1. Available only with CPC-AII and CPC-B Version 6.1 or higher. 2. Caller ID requires the following cards: 8-port Loop Start Trunk Card (VB-435 11A) Caller ID Card (VB-43551) MFR Card (VB-4343 1) (if using Caller ID Automatic DISA) CPC-B Card (VB-43411) or CPC-AII Card (VB-43412) 3. Caller ID refers to calling party information transmitted from a local CO to the DBS. Calling party information transmitted in ANI format from interexchange carriers @XC’s) is not supported by the DBS at this time. 4. Caller ID data is transmitted from the local CO to the DBS between the first and second rings. The Caller ID Card and the Loop Start Trunk Card collect the data and distribute it to the appropriate extension via the CPC Card. The extension displays the Caller ID information (if the phone has an LCD) for a programmable length of time. 5. See Caller ID Installation and Operation (Section 510) for complete instructions and ordering specs. l l l l Page 2-20 DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70400 - - . - - DID Immediate or Wink Start Software Version: CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 22# (0 or l)# Description This address determines the type of signaling used with DID trunks (Wink Start by default). If “Wink Start” is selected, the CO seizes the DID trunk. Then the DBS sends a wink signal to the CO. At the end of the wink signal, the CO transmits the DID digits. If “Immediate” is selected, the CO seizes the DID trunk. Then the DBS waits 65 milliseconds before accepting the digits of a dialed number. Programming FF2 (1164)# 22# (0 or l)# r . Trunk Number 4 O=WinkStart l=Immediate Start I Related Programming Multiple DID/DNIS: FFl 2# l# 32# (0 or l)## DID/DNIS to a Voice Mailbox: FFl 2# l# 36# (0-2)# DID/DNIS Answer Code: FFl 2# l# 37# (6 char.)## DID/DNIS: FFl 8# 4# 6# (l-64)# 2# (0-2)# DID Flexible Ringing Assignments: FFl 8# 5# (0000-9999)# ExtNo.)# (000000-llllll)# Trunk Circuit Type: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-4)# wink Start Timer: FF2 (Trunk)# 23# (0-15)# Time Out for Dialed DID Digits: FF2 (Trunk)# 24## (0-15)# DID Interdigit Timeout: FF2 (Trunk)# 25# (0-15)# Notes Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be turned off, then back on. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 2-21 -..-r.-. C. I,“,,... “J..d’,,,,, “‘J, . - W”V..V.. ‘f .“” , I” I-.....,.,, Wink Start Timer Software Version: CPC-6 Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 23# (0-15)# Description This timer determines the duration of the “wink” that is sent to the CO following the CO’s seizure of a DID trunk (200 ms by default). At the conclusion of the wink, the CO transmits the DID digits to the DBS. Programming FF2 (1164)# 23# (O-1 5)# A t Trunk Number Wink Start Timer setting Default: 3 (200 ms) (see table below) Table 2-3. Wink Start Timer sem’ngs Setting 0 1 1 A0 ms 1 X0 ms 2 3 4 200 ms 5 2411 ms 6 * 26cJ ms 7 28Cl ms 300 ms 320 ms 340 ms 360 ms 3x0 ms 400 ms 420 ms 8 9 1 (1 11 12 13 14 15 Page 2-22 Value 140 ms 220 ms 440 ms DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2) Section 400~Programming Time Out for Dialed DID Digits Software Version: CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 24## (O-15)# Description This timer determines how long the DBS waits for DID digits, once CO signaling has indicated that digits are to be transmitted (18 seconds by default). Programming FF2 (1164)# 24#! (0115)# + f Trunk Number Timeout setting for Dialed DID Digits Default: 4 (18 seconds) (see table below) Table 2-4. DID Dialed Digit Timer values Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DBS-70-400 Value No timeout 15 seconds 16 seconds 17 seconds 18 seconds 19 seconds 20 seconds 21 seconds 22 seconds 23 seconds 24 seconds 25 seconds 26 seconds 27 seconds 28 seconds 29 seconds DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 2-23 Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2) Section 400-Programming DID Interdigit Timeout Sofbvare Version: CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 25# (O-15)# Description Once the CO begins to outpulse DID digits, this timer determines how much time is allowed between each digit (80 ms by default). If the timer is exceeded, the DBS returns the DID trunk to the idle state. Programming FF2 (1164)# 25# (O-l 5)# + f Trunk Number DID Interdigit Timer setting Default: 5 (80 ms) (see table below) Table 2-5. DID Inttydigit Timer values Page 2-24 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Trunk Port Class Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 26# (418)# Description This parameter is provided in case a specific trunk or group of trunks needs a unique pad level. This will only work if the Sync unit (VB-43563) is installed piggyback on the CPC-B card. By default, DBS trunks are assigned a circuit type, based on whether they are analog or Tl. This circuit type is used in the Digital Pad Settings address (FFl 8# 4# 3#) to determine the loss/gain settings for connections to the Tl. For example, a Tl in a slave cabinet is assigned by default as circuit type “6” (see table below). However, if a specific Tl trunk in the slave has inadequate volume levels, the circuit type for the Tl trunk port could be changed to “8”. Once the trunk port’s circuit type is changed, you can change the pad levels for circuit type 8 (in Digital Pad Settings) to provide the correct volume setting. Programming I FF2 (l-64)# 26# (418)# 1( Trunk Number + Trunk Circuit Type (see table below) NOTE: This address will allow you to assign circuit types 1-12 to a trunk; however, types 4-8 are the only ones that should be used with trunks. Table 2-6. Trunk Port Class - circuit types Setting 4 5 ’ Value Analog CO trunk Tl trunk in the master cabinet Circuit types 7-8 are used for assigning unique pad levels to circuits that require special volume levels. For example, if a specific analog trunk needs a higher volume level than other analog trunks, the analog trunk could be defined as an “Option 1” circuit type. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 2-25 Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2) Section 400-Programming Related Programming Digital Pad Settings: FFl 8# 4# 3# (l-12)# (l-12)# (O-30)++ Station Port Class: FF3 (ExtPort)# 37# (l-2 or 7-8)# Notes Page 2-26 Extension Circuit Types. Circuit types can also be assigned to extension ports. See the Station Port Class address for more information. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Use the F’F3 programming addresses in this chapter to set parameters for extensions. All FF3 addresses require an extension port entry. The acceptable range for extension ports depends on your DBS system’s configuration. In this chapter, the range shown for extension ports is (l-144), which is the maximum available number of extension ports in a DBS 96 + DBS 96 system with a CPC-B card. With a CPC-AII card, the maximum range is (l-72) extension . ports. For more information, see Section 300~hstdlation. This chapter covers the following addresses: FF3 Address Topic FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)# Extension Numbers 3-3 Terminal Type 3-5 EM/24 Port Assignment 3-7 Forced Least Cost Routing 3-8 Forced Account Codes 3-9 Extension Lockout Code 3-10 3-11 Offhook Signal (CO) Call WaitingJOHVA 3-12 Busy Override Send 3-13 Busy Override Receive 3-14 Prime Line Pickup 3-15 Auto Pickup (Ringing Line) 3-16 3-17 Unsupervised Conference 3-18 Station Message Detail Recorder (SMDR) Report 3-19 Offhook Signal Volume 3-20 Offhook Signal Pattern PSD Name Display on Large-Sized LCD Phones 3-21 3-22 Page Group Extensions 3-23 Display When Idle Disnlav During Intercom Dial Tone 3-25 3-27 Display When Calling an Extension 3-29 Display When Accessing CO Dial Tone 3-3 1 Display When Conversing on a CO Trunk 3-33 DisDlav When Receiving a Page 3-35 Display A’fter Receiving a Call Waiting Tone 3-37 Display When Dialing a Busy Extension Extension Directory Display (CPC-AII/B 2.0 or higher) 3 - 3 9 (see page 3-56) VAU Port Assignment (CPC-A) FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (IJ~R)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 3# (ExtPorty FF3 (ExtPort)# 4## (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 5# (0 or l)# IT3 (ExtPort)# 6# (Code)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 7# (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 8# (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 9# (0 or l)# FM (ExtPort)# lO# (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtPort)## ll# (0 or l)# FM (ExtPort)# 12# (0 or l># FF3 (ExtPort)# 13# (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 14# (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtPolt)# 15# (O-4)# FM (ExtPort)# 16# (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 17# (0 or l># FF3 (ExtPort)# 18# thru 25# (0 or l)# IT3 (ExtPolt)# 26# (O-39)# F’F3 (ExtPort)# 27# (O-39)++ FF3 (ExtPort)# 28# (0-39)# lT3 (ExtPort)# 29# (0-39)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 30# (0-39)# lT3 (ExtPort)# 3 l# (O-39)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 32# (0-39)# IF3 (ExtPort)# 33# (O-39)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 34# (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 34# (0 or l)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page Page 3-l , FF3 (ExtPort)# 3% (0-8)## Extension class of Service Assignment (CPC-AWE 3.1 or higher) Inbound DID Dial Numbers (CPC-8 2.0 only) AEC Disconnect (CPC-A 3.3 or higher) Ringback Tone From ML Keys FF3 (ExtPon)# 3% (OOOO-9999)# FF3 (ExtPoIt)# 3% (0 or 1)# FF3 (ExtF’ort)# 36# (0-2)# 3-40 341 3-41 3-42 (CPC-AII/B 2.0 or higher) Station Port Class (CPC-B 4.0 or higher) SLT Hookflash (CPC-B 3.1 or higher) FF3 (Extl’ott)# 37# (1-2 or 7-8)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 38# (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 39# (O-9)++ 3-43 3-45 3-46 Extension Ring Pattern (CPC-AII 7.0 or higher; CPC-B 3.1 or higher) Digital SLT Receiving Volume FF3 (ExtPort)# 40# (0 or l)# I FF3 (ExtPort)# 41# (OOOl-9999)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 42# (0-3)# 3-48 I ICPC-AIIIB 3.1 or hipher) Auto Set Relocation Code (CPC-AU/B 3.1 or higher) Permanent Call Forward Type I 3-49 3-51 (CPC-AU/B 3.1 or higher) FF3 (ExtPort)# 43# (ExtNo.)# Permanent Call Forward Extension 3-52 (CPC-AU/B 3.1 or higher) FF3 (ExtPorW 44# (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtFort)# 45# (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 46# (0 or l)# 1 FF3 (ExtPort)# 47# (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtPort)## 48# (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 49# (0 or l)# Page 3-2 ML/MC0 Separation (CPC-AIUB 4.0 or higher) 3-53 VAU Hunting Priority WC-AIUB 5.0 or higher) 3-54 AEC Disconnect (CPC-AU/B 5.0 or higher) 3-55 1 VAU Port Assignment (CPC-AD/B 5.0 or higher) 1 3-56 1 Hot Dial Pad ([email protected] 7.0 or higher) 3-57 Auto-RediaI on Extensions (CPC-AWB 7.0 or higher) 3-58 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Section 400~Programming Extension Numbers Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 1# (lo-69 or lOO-699)# Description This program assigns an extension number to an extension port. l l An extension number is the 2-digit or 3-digit number that is dialed to reach the extension phone. Extension numbers are programmable and can be changed. An extension port is the physical location (RJ2lx on the DBS connector) into which the phone is plugged. Extension ports have fixed numbers which can’t be changed (you can’t assign a different port number to the same port). Programming To assign an Extension Number . . . FF3 (l-144)# 1# (IO-69 or 100-699)# + + Extension Port Extension Number Defaults: Port l=lO or 100 Port 2=11 or 101 Port 3=12 or 102 . . . etc. To clear an Extension Number . . . I FF3 ‘(l-144)# I# CONF I NOTE: After clearing an extension number, the port is inoperative until an extension number is reassigned to it, and the phone is unplugged from the system and then plugged back in. Related Programming Extension Number Digits: FFl 2# l# 12# (0 or l)#f# Second Attendant Position: FFl 2# l# 24# (11-69 or lOl-699)# Third Attendant Position: FFl 2# l# 2% (11-69 or 101~699)# Fourth Attendant Position: FFl 2# l# 2# (11-69 or lOl-699)# Extension Names: FF6 l# (ExtPort)# CONF (Name)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-3 Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Notes Section 400-Programming Primary Attendant Extension. The default extension number for the Primary Attendant is 10 or 100, assigned to port 1. It is not possible to change the Primary Attendant’s extension number or port. The Primary Attendant phone must be a key telephone with an LCD display. Second Attendant Extension. If a Second Attendant is assigned, its default extension number is 11 or 101, assigned to port 2. Although the Second Attendant assignment can be changed, it is recommended that you leave its extension number at the default 11 or 101 so that a DSS/BLF console can be used with it. (The Third and Fourth Attendants cannot use a DSS/BLF phone.) If extension 101 or 11 is cleared, the Alternate Attendant feature is canceled. Clearing An Extension Number. Clearing an extension port of its extension number does not return the number to a default value. Instead, the port is inoperative until an extension number is reassigned to it and the phone is unplugged from the system, then plugged back in. Re-Assigning An Extension Number. An extension number can be changed without clearing the old one first -- simply overwrite the old extension number using this program address. (The system will recognize the new extension number without requiring the phone to be unplugged and then plugged back in afterwards.) Assigning An Extension Number Already In Use. If an extension number is already assigned to a port, and you assign the same number to another port, the system will automatically clear the fust port of the extension number. The first port would then have to be re-assigned a new extension number, and the phone unplugged and then plugged back in again. Changing The Extension’Name. The assignment or re-assignment of extension numbers does not change the extension name. To change the extension name, use program address FF6 l# (ExtPort)# CONF (Name)#. Finding Out the Port Number of an Extension. If an extension phone has an LCD display, you can display its port number by pressing ON/OFF CONF #5* on that phone. Or, from another extension with an LCD, press ON/OFF CONF [ExtNo.] (the dialed extension’s port number will display). Page 3-4 DES Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Section 400~Programming Terminal Type Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (ExtType)# Description Some DBS extensions are automatically configured when installed on an extension port. This address allows you to change default terminal assignments, or assign special equipment to extension ports. Programming FF3 (lj144)# 2# (ly)# I Extension Port Terminal Type (see table below) Table 3-1. Terminal Types a Note: If the configuration is “Auto”, the system defaults to the phone type plugged into that port. If no phone is plugged in, the port defaults to “4” (34-button Key Phone). 21-28 29-30 DBS-70-400 Integrated ACD channels (not used) DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Auto N/A Page 3-5 Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) 31-38 39-40 41-48 Section 400-Programming Integrated Auto Attendant channels (not used) Integrated DBS Voice Mail channels Auto N/A Auto Related Programming APVAEC Slot Assignment: FFl 2# l# 20# (2-9 or Notes Terminal Type 6 (DSLT). This terminal type is not available in CPC-A/B versions prior to 3.1. Terminal Type IO (Third-Party Voice Mail). Beginning with CPC-A Version 3.28 and CPC-B Version 4.07, when an analog port hookflashes to return to a held trunk, the DBS returns busy tone to Voice Mail if the trunk is abandoned. When Voice Mail receives the busy tone, it recognizes that the trunk has been abandoned, and consequently releases the called extension. (In previous versions, the DBS returned ringback tone, causing the extension to continue ringing.) Terminal Types ll-I4 (DSSl72) and 16-19 (Attendant Consoles). After manually setting any of these terminal types, disconnect the modular jacks from the devices, then reconnect them. Terminal Types 16-19 (Attendant Consoles). This option requires the Attendant Feature Package, which is available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0. Terminal Types 30-48. These options are available with CPC-AII/B Version 3.1 or higher. VAU Port Assignments. For later CPC versions, VAU ports are assigned in other addresses: CPC-A 3.3 or higher: FF3 (l-72)## 34# (0 or l)# CPC-AII (all versions): FF3 (l-144)# 47# (0 or I)# CPC-B 5.0 or higher: FF3 (l-144)# 47# (Oor l)# Call Forward ID Digits. Call Forward ID digits will only emit if the port is set for Terminal Type 10-15. Terminal Type 10 is the recommended setting for each Third-Party Voice Mail. Console Port Assignments. For all CPC versions, a DSS/72 console is assigned by setting the Terminal Type to 11-14. However, EM/24 ports are assigned in the next address, FF3 (ExtPort)# 3# (ExtPort)#. Page 3-6 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400~Programming Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) EM/24 Port Assignment Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 3# (ExtPort)# Description This program assigns an EM/24 terminal to a key phone by associating the extension ports. EM/24 terminals provide additional FF keys to a key phone. An EM/24 terminal needs its own extension port. This address therefore requires two port number entries -- one for the EM/24 terminal, and one for the key phone. After the EM/24 is assigned to the key phone, the key phone’s extension port should be used in other program addresses (for example, when including the phone in a hunt group or call coverage group). Programming To assign an EM/24 to a key phone . . . FF3 (l-144)# 3# (l-144)# + EM/24 Port f Key Phone Port To clear an EM/24 assignment . . . FF3 &144)# 3# CONF ON/OFF f EM/24 Port Notes Reconnection Requirement. After manually reprogramming the EM/24 terminal, disconnect its module jack, then reconnect it. Changing Default Key Assignments in CPC-B Versions 2.01 to 2.04. When you change default EM/24 key assignments in these versions, reprogram as follows: 1. Assign the EM/24 to a port. 2. Reset the EM/24 by unplugging then reconnecting it. 3. Program the keys using FF5 (ExtPort)# (FFkey’)#. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-7 Section 400-Programming Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Forced Least Cost Routing Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 4# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to set individual extension(s) for forced Least Cost Routing (LCR). If an extension is set for forced LCR: every pooled key “9” is now an LCR key. stations cannot dial 8 l-86 to place an outside call. the caller will hear a dial tone generated by the DBS -- but the system will not access an outside line until the caller dials an area code and/or office code, after which the system selects the least expensive trunk based on time of day, carrier, and/or dialed number. l l l Programming . FF3 (11144)# 4# (0 or l)# f Extension Port $ O=Disabled (no forced LCR). l=Enabled (forced LCR). Related Programming LCR Access: FFl 2# l# 3# (0 or l)# Least Cost Routing: All FF8 programs Notes Page 3-8 Interaction With Call Forward-Outside. If Forced LCR is enabled, the “Call Forward-Outside” feature cannot be used. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Lhapter 3. txtenston rrogrammlng (FF3) Section 4OO+rogramming Forced Account Codes Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 5# (012)# Description Use this address to force extension users to enter an account code before making an outside call. l l Beginning with CPC-AII/B Version 3.1, forced account codes will be verified by the DBS system before allowing the call. Beginning with CPC-AB/B Version 6.0, forced account codes can be either “verified” or “unverified” by the system. Programming FF3 l-1 44)# 5# (012)# Extension Port + O=Account code usage is voluntary. l=Account codes (4-digit) are forced and verified, 2=Account codes (l- 10 digits) are forced but unverified. Related Programming Verified Forced Account Codes: FFl 2# 6# (l-lOO)# l# (0000-9999)# Toll Restriction for Verified Forced Account Codes: FFl 2# 6# (l-100)++ 2# (O-7)# TRS Types Assigned to Trunks or Extensions: FF7 addresses Notes Extensions Set to 0 PAAccount code usage is voluntary”‘). The extension user can place outside calls without entering an account code. If the caller does enter an account code, the DBS will include it in the SMDR record for the call, but will not verify it. Extensions Set to 1 rAecount codes are forced and verified”‘) (the “verified” part of this option available in CPC-AIIIB Version 3. I or higher). The extension user cannot place an outside call without first entering a valid account code. The DBS will verify it (in CPC-AH/B Version 3.1 or higher) and apply the account code’s assigned TRS type to allow or disallow the call. Extensions Set to 2 (“Account codes are forced but unverified”) (this option is available in CPC-krIlB Version 6.0 or higher). The extension user cannot place an outside call without first entering an account code. The DBS will include the account code in the SMDR record but will not verify it. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-9 Extension Lockout Code Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 6# (0000-9999)# Description Use this address to assign a 4-digit Station Lockout code to an extension. This allows an extension user to “lock” the phone, preventing others from being able to place or receive outside calls on the phone while the extension user is away. However, the locked extension can be used for intercom calls. NOTE: Assigning Station Lockout codes must be performed on an Attendant or key phone. Programming To assign a Station Lockout Code to an extension . . . (must be performed on-an Attendant or key phone) FF3 (I-144)# 6## (0000- 999)# f Extension Port 3 Extension Lockout Code To clear a Station Lockout Code assignment . . . FF3 (11144)# 6# CONF ON/OFF /(Extension Port- Notes CAUTION: Before clearing a lockout code, make sure the extension is currently “unlocked” -otherwise, the extension will remain locked until another lockout code is assigned to it, and then the new code is used to unlock the extension. Lucking An Extension. To lock an extension, dial “74” plus the Station Lockout Code. Repeat to unlock it. Using the Stution Lockout Code. If an extension is “locked” with the Station Lockout Code, the extension phone will not allow incoming or outgoing trunk calls, including transferred trunk calls. Page 3-l 0 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 ulaprer Y. c~kulsion rrogrammmg (t-w) 3ectIon 4w~rogrammlng Offhook Signal (CO) Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 7# (0 or l)# Description Programming . This program determines if the DBS sends a tone signal to busy extensions when an additional trunk call arrives. To activate the Offhook Signal . . . FF3 (l-144)# 7# (0 or l)# t Extension Port t O=Disable Off’hook Signaling. l-Enable Offhook Signaling. Note: Default for the Primary Attendant is 1 (“Enable”). To reset the Offhook Signal to the default value . . . I FF3 (I-144)# 7# CONF ON/OFF I Related Programming Offhook Signal Volume: FF3 (ExtPort)# 15# (0-4)# Offhook Signal Pattern: FF3 (ExtPort)# 16# (0 or l)# Notes Conditions Under Which the Signal Is Not Sent. The system will not send the Offhook Signal (even if enabled) during a conference call, while the called extension is on hold, or during a call on a trunk that does not have a dedicated line key on the phone. Station Hunting Interaction. If an extension is enabled for Offhook Signaling, the extension will, be excluded from any hunt group setting that may be enabled for it. VAU Interaction. If a Voice Announce Unit (VAU) is connected to the DEjS, disable Offhook Signaling (CO) to prevent VAU calls from being interrupted by incoming trunk calls. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-l 1 ac?wiuI 8 wu-r I uyl a I II I III iy Call Waiting/OHVA Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 8# (0 or l)# Description This setting determines if an extension can receive Call Waiting and Offhook Voice Announcement (OHVA). Programming FF3 (I-144)# 8# (0 or l)# I Notes Extension Port O=Disable Call Waiting/OHVA. kEnable Call Waiting/OHVA. Conditions Under Which the Tone Is Not Sent. The Call Waiting notification tone cannot be sent to an extension that has an absence message, a call on hold, or is engaged in a conference call. VA U Interaction. If a VAU (Voice Announce Unit) is used, disable Call WaitingjOHVA to prevent other extensions from breaking in on calls to the VAU. Page 3-I 2 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Section 400-Programming Busy Override Send Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 9# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to enable an extension to “barge into” calls that are in progress on other extensions. If the extension is enabled, the extension caller can join in on another extension’s call -- all three parties will be able to hear each other. Programming FF3 (1.144)# 9# (0 or l)# i( Extension Port f O=Disable “Barge In” capability. l=Enable “Barge In” capability. Related Programming Alert Tone for Busy Override & OHVA: FFl 2# I# 17# (0 or l)# Busy Override Receive: FF3 (ExtPort)# lO# (0 or l)# Page Group Extensions: FF3 (ExtPort)# (18-25)# (0 or l)# Notes Conditions That Restrict “‘Barge In.” Extensions can be set to block barge- in calls with the next address (Busy Override Receive, FF3 ExtPort# lO# O#). Also, a barge-in attempt will not work when the called extension is participating in a conference call. Page Group Interaction. Extensions enabled for Busy Override Send can only barge into calls on extensions within their own page group. For example, an extension in page group 1 cannot interrupt a call in page group 2. Page group 0 does not allow Busy Override. Permanent Setting for Attendants in CPC-A and CPC-B Version 1.0. Busy Override Send cannot be disabled on Attendant phones in these versions. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-l 3 Busy Override Receive Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# lO# (0 or l)# Description This address determines whether other extensions can “barge into” an extension while it is engaged in a call. By default, barge-ins from other extensions are allowed. Programming * I FF3 (l-144)# lO# (0 or l)# Extension Port + O=Disable (other extensions cannot barge-in). l=Enable (other extensions can barge-in). Related Programming Alert Tone for Busy Override & OHVA: FFl 2# l# 17# (0 or l)# Busy Override Send: FF3 (ExtPort)# 9# (0 or l)# Page Group Extensions: FF3 (ExtPort)# (1%25)# (0 or l)# Page 3-14 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Prime Line Pickup Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 11# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to enable or disable the Prime Line Pickup feature, which allows the user to automatically pick up a trunk assigned to the FFl key by simply picking up the receiver. If the FFl key is a pooled trunk key, an available trunk is accessed in numerical order, from the highest trunk number assigned to the key to the lowest. Programming I 1 FF3 (l-144)# ll# (0 or l)# t Extension Port f O=Disable Prime Line Pickup. 1 =Enable Prime Line Pickup. Notes Providing for Intercom Calling. If Prime Line Pickup is enabled, intercom calls cannot be made from the extension unless an intercom call key is assigned to another FF key. DBS-70-400 , DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-l 5 I Auto Pickup (Ringing Line) Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 12# (0 or l)# Description Use this program to enable Auto Pickup -- connecting with an incoming trunk call, a hold recall, or a transferred call simply by picking up the ringing extension’s handset. If Auto Pickup is disabled, you must pick up the handset and press the appropriate FF key to connect to the call. Programming FF3 (l-144)# 12# (0 or l)# f Extension Port Notes Page 3-16 t O=Disable Auto Pickup. l=Enable Auto Pickup. VAU Interaction. If a VAU (Voice Announce Unit) is used, enable Auto Pickup to allow the VAU to pick up CO calls. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Unsupervised Conference Software Version: All Versions Address: F-3 (ExtPort)# 13# (0 or I)# Description Use this address to enable or disable the Unsupervised Conference feature on an extension. If enabled, the extension user can initiate a three-party conference between two trunks and the extension, then drop out of the call by pressing either of the trunk keys used to call the other parties. Programming I FF3 (I-144)# 13# (0 or I)# Extension Port’ , O=The extension cannot initiate a three-party conference. l=The extension can initiate a three-party conference. Related Programming Unsupervised Conference Timer: FF 1 3# 9# (0- 15)# Unsupervised Trunk Conference: FF2 (Tnmk)# 16# Notes Re-entering a Three-Party Conference. The user can re-enter the conference by pressing either of the two CO trunk keys used to initiate the conference. Auto-Pam& Interaction. If the DBS is behind a PBX, and an extension is enabled for Unsupervised Conference, the Automatic Pause for PBX Line address (FF2# Trunk# 13#) cannot be used. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-17 Section 400-Programming Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Station Message Detail Recorder (SMDR) Report Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 14# (0 or I)# Description Any extension can be removed hm the SMDR report, so that its call activity will not be recorded. Programming FF3 (I-144)## 14# (0 or I)# Extension Port f t O=The extension is not included in the SMDR report. l=The extension is included in the SMDR report. Related Programming SMDR Display Start Tier for CO Calls: FFl 2# I# 2# (0 or l)# Notes Checking Communication Parameters. When you set this option, also check the communications parameters in programs FF12# 2# l# through 9#. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Page 3-18 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Section 400-Programming Offhook Signal Volume Software Vewion: All Versions Address: FK? (ExtPort)# 15# (04)# Description The volume for ofIhook signaling can be set to one of five different levels. OfIhook signaling is a “beep-beep” tone heard every 6 seconds in the receiver of an ofRook extension (already engaged in a call), indicating another trunk call is coming in. The next address (“Offhook Signal Pattern”) allows you to set the tone signal to be sent repeatedly, or only once, to an of3thook extension user. l Programming I FF3 (I-144)## 15# (04)# t t Extension Port Volume Level O=lowest level (quietest) l=next lowest level 2=mid-level 3=next highest level 4=highest level (loudest) 1 Related Programming Alert Tone for Busy Override & OHVA: Of&ookSignal: FF3 (ExtPort)# 7# (0 or l)# Offhook Signal Pattern: Notes FF 1 2# l# 17# (0 or l)# FF3 (ExtPort)# 16# (0 or l)# Reset Requirement. If you change the volume level in this address, the extension phone must be unplugged, then plugged back in so that the change will take effect. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 DBS-70-400 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-19 Section 400-Programming Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Offhoek Signal Pattern Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 1611 (0 or 1)# Description The ofIhook signaling tone can be sent repeatedly or only once. OfThook signaling is a “beep-beep” tone heard every 6 seconds in the receiver of an oflhook extension (already engaged in a call), indicating another trunk call is coming in. The previous address (“Offhook Signal Volume”) allows you to set the volume level of the tone signal. Programming FF3 (I-144)# 16# (Oor l)# f Extension Port t O=Repeated tone burst (approx. every 6 seconds). l=Single tone burst. Related Programming Of&ook Signal: FF3 (ExtPort)# 7# (0 or I)# OfThook Signal Volume: FF3 (ExtPort)# 15# (0 or l)# Page 3-20 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DES-70-400 PSD Name Display on Large-Sized LCD Phones Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 17# (0 or l)# Description The large-screen phone can show either 5 or 10 personal speed dial names, depending on this setting. Programming FF3 (I-144)# 17# (0 or l)# f Extension Port t 0~5 PSD names display. l=lO PSD names display. Related Programming Personal Speed Dial Names: FF6 3# (ExtPort)## (PSD)# Personal Speed Dial Numbers: IFlO 2# (ExtPort)# (PSD)# Notes DBS-70-400 Maximum Name Lengths. When the “10 PSD names display” option is chosen, the maximum length of the names is 7 characters. With the “5 PSD names display” option, the names can be 16 characters long. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-21 Page Group Extensions Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# (l8-25)## Description (0 or l)# Use this address to include an extension in one or more of the eight page groups. If an extension is included in a page group, pages to that group will be heard on the extension phone’s loudspeaker. Also, the extension will be able to pick up calls to other extensions in the page group using the Group Call Pickup feature. Programming FFy44)# (18fZ5)#/ (0 y,r l)# Extension Port Notes 18=Page group 0 19=Page group 1 20=Page group 2 2 l=Page group 3 22=Page group 4 23=Page group 5 24=Page group 6 25=Page group 7 O=Exclude from groupI. l=Include in group. Interaction with Group Call Pitkup. Page groups determine which extensions can use the Group Call Pickup (70) feature. Interaction with Busy Override. Page group 0 does not allow Busy Override. In other words, if an extension is a member of page group 0, it cannot be overridden. Also, a Busy-Override-Send enabled extension can only override calls at extensions within its own page group. For example, an extension in page group 1 cannot override calls in page group 2. Page 3-22 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 3. tXtenSion Programming (FF3) Section 400~wogramming Display When Idle Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 26# (O-24 or 039)# Description Select a soft-key menu to be displayed during “idle” mode on a large-display phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will perform the assigned feature. Programming , FF3 (I-l 44)# 26# (O-24 or O-39)# + Extension Port $ Soft Key Menu (see table below) Default: 0 (previous menu displays) Available Ranges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and CPC-B prior to 6.0 0-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B Version 6.0 or higher Table 3-2. Soft key menus during tie mode 10 11 12 13 14 15 DBS-70-400 Attendant Menu 2 Attendant Menu 3 Function Screen 1 Function Screen 2 Function Screen 3 Function Screen 4 Function Screen 5 (fixed) (fixed) (fixed) (fixed) (fixed) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-23 I 1 Function Screen 6 (fixed) 1 Function Screen 7 (fixed) 1 Function Screen 8 (fixed) Function Screen 9 (fixed) Function Screen 10 (fixed) Function Screen 11 (fixed) Function Screen 12 (fixed) Function Screen 13 (fixed) Function Screen 14 (fixed) Flexible Function Screen 1 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable) ’ Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable) 16 I 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Related Programming Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# l# thru 4# Notes Initial Default. After a system initialization, the Main Menu will display during “idle” mode. Page 3-24 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Display During Intercom Dial Tone Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 27# (O-24 or 0-39)# Description Select a soft-key menu to be displayed during intercom dial tone on a largedisplay phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will perform the assigned feature. Programming FF3 (l-1 44)# 27# (O-24 or O-39)# f f Soft Key Menu (see table below) Extension Port Default: 0 (previous menu displays) Available Ranges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and CPC-B prior to 6.0 0-39=CPC-ALT and CPC-B Version 6.0 or higher Table 3-3. Sojl key menus during intercom diul tone Setting 0 1 2 3 5 I DBS-70-400 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations) No change (previous menu retained) 1 Main Menu ] Personal Speed Dial 1 System Speed Dial 11 Extension Index Help Menu 1 Help Menu 2 Help Menu 3 Attendant Menu 1 Attendant Menu 2 Attendant Menu 3 Function Screen 1 (fixed) Function Screen 2 (fixed) Function Screen 3 (fixed) Function Screen 4 (fixed) 1 Function Screen 5 (fixed) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com , -I Page 3-25 I . 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 1 Function Screen 6 (fixed) [%nction Screen 7 (fixed) , 1 Function Screen 8 (fixed) [Function Screen 9 (fixed) 1 Function Screen 10 (fixed) Function Screen 11 (fixed) Function Screen 12 (fixed) Function Screen 13 (fixed) Function Screen 14 (fixed) Flexible Function Screen 1 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable) 1 Related Programming Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# l# thru 4# Page 3-26 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) secnon 400-Programming Display When Calling an Extension Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (O-24 or 0139)# Description Select a soft-key menu to be displayed while calling another extension on a large-display phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will perform the assigned feature. Programming FF3 (I-1 44)# 28# (O-24 or 0-39)# $. $ Soft Key Menu (see table below) Default: 0 (previous menu displays) AvailableRanges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and CPC-B prior to 6.0 0-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B Version 6.0 or higher Extension Port a Table 3-4. SofL key menus when calling an extension Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 D&-70-400 Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations) No change (previous menu retained) Main Menu Personal Speed Dial System Speed Dial Extension Index Help Menu 1 Help Menu 2 Help Menu 3 Attendant Menu 1 Attendant Menu 2 Attendant Menu 3 Function Screen 1 (fixed) 1 Function Screen 2 (fixed) Function Screen 3 (fixed) Function Screen 4 (fixed) Function Screen 5 (fixed) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-27 --I- --. -- -_._-..- ~. - . . . . . . . . il \ 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 . , -- --.- -. .__ . .-=. - . . . . . . . . . J Function Screen 6 (fixed) Function Screen 7 (fixed) Function Screen 8 (fixed) Function Screen 9 (fixed) Function Screen 10 (fixed) Function Screen 11 (fixed) Function Screen 12 (fixed) Function Screen 13 (fixed) Function Screen 14 (fixed) Flexible Function Screen 1 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 11 (ilser-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable) Related Programming Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# l# thru 4# Page 3-28 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Display When Accessing CO Dial Tone Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 29# (O-24 or 0139)# Description Select a soft-key menu to be displayed while accessing a trunk on a largedisplay phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will perform the assigned feature. Programming FF3 (19144)# 29# (O-24 or O-39)# 41 Soft Key Menu (see table below) Default: 0 (previous menu displays) Available Ranges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and CPC-B prior to 6.0 0-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B Version 6.0 or higher t Extension Port T&le 3-5. Soj$ key menus when accessing CO dial tone Setting 0 1 I 2 14 15 DBS-70-400 Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations) No change (previous menu retained) Main Menu Personal Speed Dial System Speed Dial Extension Index Help Menu 1 Help Menu 2 Help Menu 3 Attendant Menu 1 Attendant Menu 2 Attendant Menu 3 Function Screen 1 (fixed) Function Screen 2 (fixed) 1 Function Screen 3 (fixed) Function Screen 4 (fixed) Function Screen 5 (fixed) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-29 Section 400-Programming Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) 16 17 18 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Function Screen 6 (fixed) Function Screen 7 (fixed) Function Screen 8 (fixed) 1 Function Screen 9 (fixed) 1 Function Screen 10 (fixed) user-programma Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable) Related Programming Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# l# thru # Page 3-30 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 GI ktprer Y. exwwon rrogrammtng (t-F3) secnon 4uwrrogrammlng Display When Conversing on a CO Trunk Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 30# (O-24 or O-39)# Description Select a soft-key menu to be displayed while a trunk call is in progress on a large-display phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will perform the assigned fearure. Programming , FF3 (1-l 44)# 30# (O-24 t Extension Port Soft Key Menu (see table below) Default: 0 (previous menu displays) Available Ranges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and CPC-B prior to 6.0 O-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B Version 6.0 or higher Table 3-6. Soft key menus during a trunk call Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 14 15 DBS-70-400 Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations) No change (previous menu retained) 1 Main Menu Personal Speed Dial i System Speed Diai Extension Index Help Menu 1 Help Menu 2 Help Menu 3 1 Attendant Menu 1 Attendant Menu 2 Attendant Menu 3 ) Function Screen 1 (fixed) 1 Function Screen 2 (fixed) 1 Function Screen 3 (fixed) Function Screen 4 (fixed) Function Screen 5 (fixed) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I Page 3-31 r>ebuui I *vu-r 1 uyi ai I II I III iy 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Function Screen 6 (fixed) Function Screen 7 (fixed) Function Screen 8 (fixed) Function Screen 9 (fixed) Function Screen 10 (fixed) Function Screen 11 (fixed) Function Screen 12 (fixed) Function Screen 13 (fixed) Function Screen 14 (fixed) Flexible Function Screen 1 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable) 1 Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable) I Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable) Related Programming Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# l# thru # Page 3-32 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 tin ktprer J. c~iension rrogrammlng (w9) 3ecnon 4uu-rrogramrwly Display When Receiving a Page Software Version: Ail Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 31# (O-24 or 0139)# Description Select a soft-key menu to be displayed while receiving a page on a largedisplay phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will perform the assigned feature. Programming FF3 (1-l 44)# 31# (O-24 or 0-39)# f $ Soft Key Menu (see table below) Default: 0 (previous menu displays) Available Ranges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and CPC-B prior to 6.0 0-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B Version 6.0 or higher Extension Port Table 3-7. Soft key menus when receiving a page Setting 0 2 3 5 6 7 t 9 11 12 13 14 15 DBS-70-400 Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations) No change (previous menu retained) 1 Main Menu Personal Speed Dial System Speed Dial 1 Extension Index Help Menu 1 Help Menu 2 Help Menu 3 1 Attendant Menu 1 1 Attendant Menu 2 I Attendant Menu 3 Function Screen 1 (fixed) Function Screen 2 (fixed) Function Screen 3 (fixed) Function Screen 4 (fixed) 1 Function Screen 5 (fixed) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com J t Page 3-33 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Function Screen 6 (fixed) Function Screen 7 (fixed) Function Screen 8 (fixed) Function Screen 9 (fixed) Function Screen 10 (fixed) Function Screen 11 (fixed) Function Screen 12 (fixed) Function Screen 13 (fixed) Function Screen 14 (fixed) Flexible Function Screen 1’ (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmabie) Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable) 1 Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable) I Related Programming Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# 1# thru 4## Page 3-34 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Display After Receiving a Call Waiting Tone Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 32# (O-24 or 0139)# Description Select a soft-key menu to be displayed after receiving a call-waiting tone on a large-display phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will perform the assigned feature. Programming I FF3 (l-1 44)# 32# (O-24 or O-39)# lr $ Soft Key Menu (see table below) Default: 0 (previous menu displays) Available Ranges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and CPC-B prior to 6.0 0-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B Version 6.0 or higher Extension Port Table 3-8. Soft key menus after receiving a call waiting tone Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DBS-70-400 Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations) No change (previous menu retained) Main Menu Personal Speed Dial System Speed Dial Extension Index Help Menu 1 Help Menu 2 Help Menu 3 Attendant Menu 1 Attendant Menu 2 Attendant Menu 3 Function Screen 1 (fixed) Function Screen 2 (fixed) Function Screen 3 (fixed) Function Screen 4 (fixed) Function Screen 5 (fixed) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-35 Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) I . 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 35 39 Section 400-Programming 1 Function Screen 6 (fixed) 1I Function Screen 7 (fixed) / Function Screen 8 !fixedj Function Screen 9 (fixed) 1 Function Screen 10 (fixed) Function Screen 11 (fixed) Function Screen 12 (fixed) i Function Screen 13 (fixed) Function Screen 14 (fixed) Flexible Function Screen 1 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable) i Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 12 her-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable) 1 Related Programming Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFI 2# 7# 1# thru 4# Page 3-36 DBS Manual - Issued 811195 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Display When Dialing a Busy Extension Software Version: All Versions Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 33## (O-24 or 0139)# Description Select a soft-key menu to be displayed while dialing a busy extension on a large-display phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will perform the assigned feature. Programming FF3 (1-l 44)# 33#! (O-24 or 0-39)# f Extension Port Available Ranges: f Soft Key Menu (see table below) Default: 0 (previous menu displays) O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and CPC-B prior to 6.0 0-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B Version 6.0 or higher Table 3-9. Soft key menus when dialing a busy extension Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DBS-70-400 Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations) No change (previous menu retained) Main Menu Personal Speed Dial System Speed Dial Extension Index Help Menu 1 Help Menu 2 Help Menu 3 Attendant Menu 1 Attendant Menu 2 Attendant Menu 3 Function Screen 1 (fixed) Function Screen 2 (fixed) Function Screen 3 (fixed) Function Screen 4 (fixed) Function Screen 5 (fixed) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-37 I 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 1 Function Screen 6 (fixed) Function Screen 7 (fixed) Function Screen 8 (fixed) Function Screen 9 (fixed) Function Screen 10 (fixed) Function Screen 11 (fixed) Function Screen 12 (fixed) Function Screen 13 (fixed) Function Screen 14 (fixed) Flexible Function Screen 1 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable) Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable) I Related Programming Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# l# thtu 4## Page 3-38 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70400 Section 400~Programming Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Extension Directory Display Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 34# (0 or l)# Description The large-display telephone can be set to display 5 or 10 extension names on the Extension Directory menu. Programming 1 I FF3 (l-144)# 34## (0 or l)# t Extension Port t 0=5 names display. l=lO names display. Notes Showing Extension Status in IO-Name Directory Display. When this address is set to “1” (10 names display), the directory will display a symbol next to the extension number if it has a special status as follows: n = Busy/Offhook * = DND or Absence Message However, if an extension enters a Busy or DND status after the directory displays, the directory is not updated automatically (the directory must be redisplayed before it will show the status). * Address in CPC-A Versions. In CPC-A Version 3.3 or higher, this address controls VAU Port Assignment, not Extension Directory Display. See FF3 (ExtPort)# 47# for instructions on assigning VAU ports for CPC-A versions. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-39 Section 400-Programming Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Extension Class of Service Assignment Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 35# (0-8)# Description Use this feature to assign a Class of Service to an extension. Each Class of Service contains a unique combination of extension features, which can be selectively enabled for the Class of Service (see FFl 2# 5#). When you assign a Class of Service to an extension, you are assigning the enabled features to the extension. By default, all extensions are assigned Class of Service “0,” which has all features enabled. Programming I FF3 (l-l 44)# 35# (008)# Extension Port f f Extension Class of Service O-8 Default: 0 (all features allowed) Related Programming \ Extension Class of Service: FFl 2# 5# (l-8)# (l-2 l)# (0 or l)# Notes Caution When Changing a Class of Service Assignment. If you change an extension’s Class of Service, make sure none of the features are currently activated on the extension -- or the extension user may not be able to turn off the feature. For example, if an extension user has Background Music on when you reassign the extension to another Class of Service that has Background Music disabled, the user will not be able to turn it off. (If this occurs, reassign the original Class of Service to the extension, then turn Background Music off at the extension, then assign the new Class of Service to the extension.) Page 3-40 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Inbound DID Dial Numbers Software Version: CPC-6 Version 2.0 only Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 35# (OOOO-9999)# Description DID (Direct Inward Dialing) numbers must be assigned to extension ports so they will ring on the appropriate extensions. In CPC-B versions prior to 3.1, DID numbers can be set to ring on only one extension port. Beginning with CPC-B Version 3.1, DID numbers can be set to ring on multiple extensions (see address FFl 8# 3# for more information). Programming F F 3 (l-1 44)# 35# (0000-9999)# + DID Number f Extension Port AEC Disconnect So-are Version: CPC-A Version 3.3 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 3W (0 or I)# Description The VB-43621A version of the AEC card can be set to provide a positive disconnect signal. Use this address to enable or disable the AEC disconnect signal on individual extensions. If this option is enabled, analog extension ports will send a disconnect signal (open loop) upon hangup. Sending this signal allows quick disconnection from third-party voice mail systems. This feature requires CPC-A 3.3 or higher, or CPC-AII/B 5.0 or higher (the address for CPC-AII/B is FF3 ExtPort# 46# 0-l#). Programming FF3 (l-72)# 35# (0 or l)# f Extension Port + O=Disable AEC disconnect signal. l=Enable AEC disconnect signal. Related Programming AEC Disconnect Signal Duration (for CPC-A 3.3 or higher): FFl 2# l# 23# (0-15)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-41 I---. -- - .-a--- a \’ . -, - -----.. .__ . .-=- - .........J Ringback Tone From ML Keys Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 36# (002)# Description This address determines which tone an extension user will hear when dialing another extension that has a busy ML key. The tone selected in this address will be heard only if the called party has more than one ML key and one of the ML keys is busy. Programming r FF3 (1-l 44)# 36# (O-2)# f 4 Extension Port O=Kingback tdne followed by busy tone< 1 =Busy tone. 2=Ringback tone. NOTE: Enter the extension port that will hear the tone (the calling party) -- not the extension with the ML keys (the called party). Related Programming ML/MC0 Separation: F’F3 (ExtPort)# 44 (0 or l)## Page 3-42 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Station Port Class Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 37# (l-2 or 7-8)# Description This parameter is provided in case a specific phone or group of phones needs a unique pad level. By default, DBS extensions are assigned a circuit type based on whether they are key phones or SLTs. The circuit type is used in the Digital Pad Settings * address (FFl 8# 4# 3#) to determine the loss/gain settings for connections to the Tl interface. For example, an SLT is assigned by default as circuit type “2” (see table below). However, if an SLT in a remote warehouse has inadequate volume levels, the circuit type for the SLT could be changed to “7”. Once the SLT’s circuit type is changed, you can change the pad levels for circuit type “7” to provide the correct volume setting. Programming I I FF3 (1. 44)# 37# (l-2 or 718)# 4 Extension Port t Extension Circuit Type (see table below) NOTE: This address will allow you to assign circuit types l-12 to an extension; however, types l-2 or 7-8 are the only types that should be used with extensions. Table 3-10. St&ion Port Class - circuit types Setting 1 Value Key Telephone 2 SLT (2500 set) 7 Option 1 (see “Note” below) 8 Option 2 (see “Note” below) NOTE: Circuit types 7-8 are used for assigning unique pad levels to circuits that require special volume levels. For example, if a specific analog trunk needs a higher volume level than other analog trunks, the analog trunk could be defined as an “Option 1” circuit type. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-43 b1 ~apwr J. txIenswl I rrogrammlng trr3) . 3wauri 4uu-rrogr ai I II I III lg Related Programming Digital Pad Settings: FFl 8# 4## 3# (l-12)# (l-12)+7 (0-30)# Trunk Port Class: FF2 (Trunk)# 26# (4-8)# Notes Trunk Circuit Types. Circuit types can also be assigned to trunk ports. See the Trunk Port Class address (FF2 ExtPort# 26#) for more information. Page 3-44 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 bnaptef 9. txension rrogrammtng (t-F31 Section 400~rrogrammlng SLT Hookflash Software Version: CPC-8 Version 3.1 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 38## (0 or l)# Description This setting determines what happens when a single-line telephone (SLT) user hookf’lashes when the SLT has one active call and one held call. Programming I I FF3 (I-144)# 38# (0 or I)# t f Extension Port D BS-70-400 O=Brokers Hold (hookflash toggles between the two parties). l=Hookflash creates a three-party conference. I DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-45 Extension Ring Pattern Software Version: Cl%AII Version 7.0 or higher; CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 39# (Pattern)# Description Use this address to assign a distinctive ringing pattern for incoming trunk calls on digital phones (DSLTs or key phones). There are 9 different patterns to choose from (see table below). Begjnning with CPC-AIVB Version 7.0, this address also sets the ring pattern for phones connected to an SLT-A (4-port Adapter). Programming I FF3 (11144)# 39# (009)# t Extension Port f Ring Pattern Default: 0 (see table below) Table 3-11. Extension ring pat&m Ring Pattern (number of seconds on/off’) Digital (DSLTs/Key Phones) Phones Connected to SLT-A Address Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 I 7 I 8 9 (CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher) (CPC-AWB Version 7.0 or higher) Determined by CO determined by Analog Transfer Ring Pattern address .25 on/.25 off/.25 on/3.25 off .25 on/3.75 off 1 on/3 off .5 on/3.5 off .5 on/7 off .5 on/7 off .25 on/.25 off/.25 on17 off 3 on/l off 2 on/2 off 1 on/l off 1 on/2 off 1 on/3 off .5 on/.5 off .5 on/ 5 off/.5 on/ .5 off/.5 on/ 3.5 off .5 onj3.5 off loW7off I .25 on/7 off 1 on/3 off . Related Programming Analog Transfer Ring Pattern: FFl 2# l# 31# (0-6)# Inbound Ring Pattern: FF2 (Trunk)+! 17# (0-9)# Terminal Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# Page 3-46 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Notes DBS-70-400 Hardware Requirement For Distinctive Ringing. The SCC-B card is required in CPC-B configurations to support distinctive ringing on digital phones (in which the ring pattern is programmed into the phone itself). CPC-A and CPC-AI1 do not support distinctive ringing on digital phones. However, with an AEC card, OPX Adapter, or SLT Adapter (these devices determine the ring pattern), distinctive ringing can be supported for analog SLT phones in any CPC co&Figuration. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-47 Digital SLT Receiving Volume Software Version: CPC-AlI (all versions); CPC-6 Version 3.1 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPott)# 40# (0 or l)# Description The receiver (hearing) volume of the handset on a digital single-line telephone (DSLT) can be set to “normal” or “loud.” The “loud” setting gives a +6 dB gain over the “normal” setting (approximately twice as loud). Programming FF3 (1,144)# 40# (0 or l)# f Extension Port Page 3-48 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com $ O=Normal 1=Loud DBS-70-400 Gnapter 3. txtenslon Programming (FF3) secnon 400~Programming Auto Set Relocation Code Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 41# (OOOl-9999)# Description You can relocate (or swap) the program settings of one phone to another. The Auto Set Relocation Code enables you to perform the relocation. For example, if the phone from ext.102 is unplugged and moved to an office with a wall jack (port) that is assigned to ext.103, this feature can be used to relocate 102’s programming to 103. In order to move the programming, an Auto Set Relocation Code must be assigned to ext. 103. Programming To assign an Auto Set Relocation Code . . . FF3 (l-l 44)# 41# (OOOl-9999)# f Extension Port (Destination) t Auto Set Relocation Code (000 l-9999) To clear an Auto Set Relocation Code . . . I Notes FF3 .(l-144)# 41# CONF ON/OFF I Moving An Extension. The following procedure explains how to move the program settings from extension 102 to extension 103. 1. At extension 102, pick up the handset. 2. Press ‘WO.” DBS-70-400 3. Dial extension number 103. 4. Enter the four-digit Auto Set Relocation Code assigned to extension 103. 5. Replace the handset. All programmed extension features, TRS, and LCR settings from 102 will be transferred to 103. Extension 103 will be placed out of service. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-49 wapter 3. txtenslon rrogrammlng (w3) 6. bectlon 400~Programming To return extension 103 to service, disconnect then reconnect the extension cable. When extension 103 is retuned to service, it will have the program settings of extension 102. Restrictior~. Phone settings cannot be exchanged between digital and analog (SLT) ports. Page 3-50 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Permanent Call Forward Type Software Version: CPC-All (all versions)j CPC-8 Version 3.1 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 42# (0-3)# Description Use this address to enable an extension for Permanent Call Forwarding, so that calls to that extension (if the extension is busy and/or not answered) will be forwarded to another location. This feature is often used for sending calls to Voice Mail, or forwarding peripheral equipment to a single extension port. Programming F F 3 (I-144)# 42# (093)# Extension Port- t O=Permanent Call Forwarding is off (displayed as * ). l=Permanent Call Forwarding--Busy/No Answer. 2=Permanent Call Forwarding--Busy. 3=Permanent Call Forwarding--No Answer. Related Programming Permanent Call Forward Extension: FF3 (ExtPort)# 42# (lo-69 or lOO699)# Notes Interaction With User-Assigned Call Forwarding. Permanent Cal 1 Forwarding is assigned through system programming, rather than by the user. Permanent Call Forwarding is normally used to forward calls to a voice mail system. An extension user can invoke other forms of call forwarding (no answer, busy, all calls) to temporarily override the Permanent Call Forwarding destination. Resetting To Default (O#J Condition. Entering 0 or pressing CONF will return this program address to its default condition “*“, and will also return the Permanent Call Forward Extension address to default “****” (no extension assigned). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-51 ~~L~IUI I rcuu-r I uyl a I II I III iy Permanent Call Forward Extension Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 43# (IO-69 or lOO=699)# Description If an extension is enabled for Permanent Call Forwarding (in address FF3 ExtPort# 41#), use this address to set another extension number as the target or “permanent call forwarding point” for the forwarded calls. In addition to regular extension numbers, the permanent call forwarding point can also be a System Speed Dial number (SSD), a Personal Speed Dial number (PSD), a hunt group pilot number, or an Attendant extension number. Programming To assign a Permanent Call Forwarding Point . . . FF3 (11144)# 43# (lo-69 or 1001699)# f f Extension Port Permanent Call Forwarding Point (Default=****; no extension assigned) lo-69 or l OO-699=Extension numbers, including attendants and hunt group pilot numbers. AUTO.90-99 or 900-909=PSD numbers. AUTO 00-89 or 000- 199=SSD numbers. To clear a Permanent Call Forwarding Point . . . FF3 (l-144)# 43# CONF ON/OFF + Related Programming Permanent Call Forward Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 42# (0-3)# Hunt Group Pilot Numbers: FF4 3# (l-4)# l# (11-69 or 101-699)# System Speed Dial Numbers: FFlO l# (SSD)# (PhoneNo.)# Personal Speed Dial Numbers: FFlO 2# (ExtPort)# (PSD)# (PhoneNo.)# Page 3-52 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DES-70-400 briaprer 3. txrerlslori rrogramrrimg [t-w) wcnon 4uwrruyrammlng ML/MC0 Separation Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-8 Version 4.0 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 44## (0 or l)# Description Use this address to enabie an extension for MC0 or ML key usage. The difference between ML (Multi-Line) and MC0 (Multi-Central Office) has to do with incoming calls. MC0 means multiple trunks can be received at the extension -- if you press a flashing FF key, you will get an incoming trunk . call. Calls from another extension will flash on the “EXT” LED (not through the FF key). ML, on the other hand, means you can receive either a trunk call or an extension call on an FF key, which will flash for either type of call. If this address is set to ML, each FF key must be individually enabled for ML/ MC0 using program address FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)++ (FeatureCode)#. Programming FF3 (l-144)# 44## (0 or I)# Extension Par< b=MCO keys * l=ML keys ** Note: The default for the Primary Attendant is “1” (ML keys). * MC0 is not available in CPC-B Version 2.0 to 3.1. ** ML is not available in CPC-A versions, or in CPC-B Version 1.0. Related Programming FF Key Assignments for Extensions: FF5 (ExtPort)## (Key)# (Feature)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-53 VAU Hunting Priority Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 45# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to assign hunting priority to calls that ovefflow from a hunt group to the VAU. If hunting priority is assigned, a caller who hears the VAU message and then decides to dial back into the hunt group, will be placed before other calls that have just entered the hunt group queue. Without hunting priority, the caller loses his or her place in the queue and is placed in the last queue position upon re-entry intd the hunt group. Programming I FF3 (1-l 44)# 45# (0 or l)# f VAU Port Number t O=Calls transferred from the VAU do not receive priority treatment. l=VAU transfer ~rioritv. Related Programming VAU Port Assignment: FF3 (ExtPort)# 47# (0 or l)# Page 3-54 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Section 400-Programming AEC Disconnect Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-6 Version 5.0 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 46# (0 or I)# Description The VB-43621A version of the AEC card can be set to provide a positive disconnect signal. Use this address to enable or disable the AEC disconnect signal on individual extension(s). If this option is enabled, analog extension ports will send a disconnect signal (open loop) upon hangup. Sending this signal allows quick disconnection f?om third-party voice mail systems. NOTE: This feature requires CPC-A 3.3 or higher, CPC-AII (all versions), or CPC-B 5.0 or higher. The address for CPC-A is FF3 (ExtPort)# 35#. Programming L FF3 (I-144)# 46# (0 or I)## Extension Port t f O=Disa bled l=Enabled Related Programming SLT Disconnect Signal Duration: FFl 2# I# 3% (0-15)## DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-55 Section 400-Programming Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) VAU Port Assignment Software Version: CPC-All (ail versions); CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher bddress: FF3 (ExtPort)# 47# (0 or I)# I’ Description This program assigns a digital port as a VAU (Voice Announce Unit). Once a port is assigned as a VAU, the system treats that port as ifthe following changes have been made: l Offhook Signal (CO) is disabled - FF3 (ExtPort)# 7# O#. l Call Waiting/OHVA is disabled -- FF3 (ExtPort)# 8# O#. l Auto Pickup is enabled - FF3 (ExtPort)# 12# l#. l All FF keys for the extension port are cleared - FF5 (ExtPort)# FFkey# CONF. Programming FF3 (I-144)# 47# (Oorl)# f VAU Port Number Notes f o=off l=On (defines the port as a VAU) Applicablk Call Types. When VAU is enabled for a port, the following call types will be routed to the first VAU message: @Trunk calls @Transferred trunk calls @Intercom calls *Transferred intercom calls. AU recalls will be routed to the second VAU message. VAU Port Assignment in CPC-A Versions. The address for VAU Port Assignment in CPC-A Version 3.3 or higher is FF3 (ExtPort)## 34# (0 or l)#. Page 3-56 DES Manual - Issued 6/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Section 400-Programming Hot Dial Pad Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 48# (0 or I)# Description The dial pad on digital key phones can be designated as “hot” on an extension-by-extension basis. This feature allows the user to initiate a call without going ofIhook, by pressing any of the numeric keys O-9 (the “*” and “#I” keys are not “hot”). The extension’s dial pad can be “hot” under these conditions: when the extension is idle. when the extension is holding a call. when the extension is holding a page. l l l The extension’s dial pad cannot be “hot” under these conditions: when an intercom or trunk call is ringing at the extension. when the extension is on a call. l l Programming FF3 (I-144)# 48# (0 or I)# Extension Port f t O=Eot Dial Pad is disabled. l=Hot Dial Pad is enabled. Notes Paging. The Hot Dial Pad feature cannot be used to initiate a page. Restriction. The Hot Dial Pad feature does not work on SLT phones. DES-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3-57 Section 400-Programming t .Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3) Auto-Redial on Extensions Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-6, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 49# (0 or I)# Description Use this address to enable or disable the Auto-Redial feature on individual DBS extensions (DSLT or K-Tel only). Auto-Redial allows a telephone in the on-hook (idle) state to redial an internaI extension or an outgoing trunk call without going off-hook first. By default, Auto-Redial is enabled on all DSLT and K-Tel extensions. Auto-Redial is performed by pressing REDIAL when the phone is either onhook (idle) or off-hook (dial tone). The DBS will automatically redial the last number dialed on that extension. Programming I FF3 (I-144)# 49#! (0 or I)# t Extension Port Notes t O=Auto-Redial is disabled. l=Auto-Redial is enabled. Restrictions. Auto-Redial wilI not work with the following: . . . . . SLTs OPX API Voice Mail Door Phones. Aato-Rediaf Afler a System Res& If Auto-Redial is attempted after a system reset, and neither a CO calI nor an extension calI has been made since the reset, the caller will hear intercom busy tone. Page 3-58 DBS Manual - Issued 811195 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) Use the FF4 program addresses in this chapter to set up trunk-to-extension ringing, hunt groups and call coverage groups. l l l The DBS supports up to 8 hunt groups and 16 call coverage groups (all versions). Each hunt group can have up to 8 extensions (all CPC-A versions; CPCAll/B prior to 6.0) or 16 extensions (CPC-AII/B 6.0 or higher). Each call coverage group can have up to 8 extensions (all versions). This chapter covers the following addresses: Topic CO Day Ring Assignments FF4 l# (ExtPort)# (Trk)# (O/l)# FF4 I# (HuntGrp)# (Trk)# (O/l)# CO Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups FF4 2# (ExtPort)# (Trk)# (O/M CO Night Ring Assignments IFF4 2# (HuntGrp)# (Trk)# (O/l)# CO Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# l# (ExtNo.)# Hunt Group Pilot Numbers (CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher) FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# l# (O/l)# %%nal/CircuIarHuntGroups (CPC-A; CPCB prior to 2.0) Hunt ‘Group Type (CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher) FF4 3# (Hunffirp)# 2# (O-2)# FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 2# (HuntGrp)# Call Next Hunt Group (CFC-A; CPC-B prior to 2.0) FF4 3# (Hunffirp)# (3-lO)# (ExtNo.)# Hunt Group Members (CPC-A; CPC-B prior to 2.0) Transfer Extension (CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher) Hunt Group Transfer Timer (CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher) IFF4 3# (Hu~Q)# (520)# (ExtNo.)# Hunt Group Members (CFC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher) FF4 4# (COVGQ)# (I-8)# (ExtNo.)# Call Coverage Group Members FF4 5# (ExtPort)# (Trk)# (O/I)# CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments (CPC-AII; CPC-B 1.07 FF4 Address - I I I Page 4-3 4-4 4-S 14-6 I 4-7 4-9 4-11 4-13 4-14 4-15 I4- 16 14-17 14-18 4-20 or higher) FF4 5# (HuntGrp)# (Trk)# (O/l)# CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups 4-21 (CPC-Au; CPC-B 2.0 or higha) FF4 6# (ExtPort)# (Trk)N (O/l)# CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments (CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 4-22 or higher) FF4 6# (HuntGrp)# (Trk)# (O/l)# CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups 4-23 (CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher) Extension Ring Table (CPC-AU; WC-B 2.0 or higher) FF4 7# (ExtFoW (ExtFoW (Wl)# 4-25 FF4 8# (ExtForW (ExtPorW (o/l)# Extension Delayed Ring Table (CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher) 4-26 FF4 9# I# (ExtForW (TW WY CO Night 2 Ring Assignments (CPC-AIM3 7.0 or higher) 4-27 (CPC-AIlf 4-28 FF4 9# I# (HuntGQ)# (Trk)d (O/W CO Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups B 7.0 or higher) I FF4 9# 2# (ExtPort)# (Trk)# (OA)# I FF4 9# 2# (HuntGrp)# (Trk)# (O/l)# DBS-70-400 CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments (CPC-AWB 7.0 or 4-29 higher) CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups 4-30 ICPC-AWB 7.0 or hisher DBS Manual - Issued W/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-l Page 4-2 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) Section 400-Programming CO Day Ring Assignments Software Version: All Versions Address: FF4 I# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or I)# Description This program determines which extension(s) will receive incoming calls on a particular trunk when the DBS system is in “Day” mode. Programming I FF4 I# (I-73 or l-14!5)# (1-64)# (0 or I)# f Extension Port f Trunk Number t O=Thnk does not ring. l=Trunk rings. NOTE: Use port 73 (in single-cabinet systems) or port 145 (in doublecabinet systems) to assign ringing to an external paging or Universal Night Answer (UNA) device. Notes Default Ring [email protected] to Attendznt Phone. All trunks are set by default to ring on ports 1 and 2 (the Primary and Second Attendants). Routing of Trunks Wh No Ring Assignments. If a trunk is not assigned to ring a specific extension, it will still ring the Attendant phone. DES-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-3 Section 400-Programming Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) _’ CO Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF4 I# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or I)# Description determines which hunt group will receive incoming calls on a particular trunk when the DBS system is in “Day” mode. This program Programming I FF4 I# (79-86 or 151~158)# (1-64)# (0 or I)# f Hunt Groups 1 thru 8: f Trunk No. CPC-AI1 or CPC-B 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 -or-or-or-or-or-or-or-or- 15 1 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 t O=Trunk does not ring. l=Trunk rings. for Hunt Group 1 for Hunt Group 2 for Hunt Group 3 for Hunt Group 4 for Hunt Group 5 for Hunt Group 6 for Hunt Group 7 for Hunt Groun 8 Related Programming Hunt Group No Answer Timer: FFl 3# 28# (O-l 5)# Hunt Group Pilot Numbers: FF4 3# (l-8)# l# (1 l-69 or lOl-699)# Hunt Group Type: FF4 3# (l-8)## 2# (0-2)# Transfer Extension: FF4 3# (l-8)# 3# (lo-69 or lOO-699)# Hunt Group Transfer Timer: FF4 3# (l-8)# 4## (0-32)# Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (l-8)# (5-12/20)# (100-699)## DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Page 4-4 :Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 . Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) Section 400-Programming CO Night Ring Assignments Software Version: All Versions Address: FF4 2# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# Description This program determines which extension(s) will receive incoming calls on a particular trunk when the DBS system is in “Night” mode. Programming FF4 2# (l-73 or l-145)# (l-64)# (0 or l)# Extension Port 7 f Trunk Number + O=Trunk does not ring. l=Trunk rings. Note: Use port 73 (for single-cabinet systems) or 145 (for doublecabinet systems) to assign ringing to an external paging or Universal Night Answer (UNA) device. Notes Default Attendant Ring Assignments. All trunks are set to ring on ports 1 and 2 (the Primary and Second Attendants) by default. Routing of Tninks With No Ring Assignments. If a trunk is not assigned to ring a specific extension, it will still ring the -4ttendant phone. Night Mode. Beginning with CPC-AH/B Version 7.0, there are two separate Night modes -- “Night” and “Night 2”. This address controls “Night” ring assignments (see FF4 9# l# for “Night 2” ring assignments). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-5 Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt tiroups (FF4) Section 400-Programming CO Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups SoftwareVersion: CPC-AII (all versions); CPC-8 Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF4 2# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# Description Program.ming This program determines which hunt group will receive incoming calls on a particular trunk when the DBS system is in “Night” mode. I FF4 2# (79-86 or 151~158)# (l-64)# (0 or I)# f f f Trunk No. &Trunk does not ring. l=Trunk rings. for Hunt Group 1 for Hunt Group 2 for Hunt Group 3 for Hunt Group 4 for Hunt Group 5 for Hunt Group 6 for Hunt Group 7 for Hunt Groun 8 Hunt Groups 1 thru 8: CIPC-ATTorCPC3-B 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 -or-or-or-or-or-or-or-or- 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 Related Programming Hunt Group No Answer Timer: FF 1 3# 28# (0- 15)# Hunt Group Pilot Numbers: FF4 3# (l-8)# l# (ll-690r lOl-699)## Hunt Group Type: FF4’3# (l-8)# 2# (0-2)# Transfer Extension: FF4 3# (l-8)++ 3# (lo-69 or lOO-699)# Hunt Group Transfer Timer: FF4 3# (l-8)# 4# (0-32)## Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (l-8)# (5-12/20)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)# Notes Night Mode. In CPC-AII/B Version 7.0 and higher, two separate Night modes are available -- “Night” and “Night 2”. This address controls Night ring assignments (see FF4 9# l# for “Night 2” ring assignments). Page 4-6 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) Section 400-Programming Hunt Group Pilot Numbers Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 1# (11-69 or lOl-699)# Description Use this program to assign a “pilot” extension number to a hunt group. This “pilot” number can be dialed from any intercom phone to reach the hunt group. An example is dialing “500” to reach a Voice Mail hunt group. Each hunt group must have a pilot number assigned to it in order for the hunt group application to work -- including ring assignments to hunt groups, call transfers to hunt groups, etc. Note: This address requires an extension numbed entry, rather than an extension port entry. In fact, the hunt group pilot number cannot also be assigned to an extension port (double-check the Extension Numbers address F’F3 ExtPort# l# ExtNumber#). Programming To assign a Hunt Group Pilot Number . . . FF4 3# (198)# I# (11-69 or 10%699)# $ Hunt Group No. + Pilot Extension Number (can’t be Primary Attendant extension number 10 or 100) To clear a Pilot Number . . . FF4 3# (l-8)# l# CONF ON/OFF + Hunt Group No. Related Programming Hunt Group No Answer Timer: FFl 3# 28# (0-15)# Extension Numbers: FF3 (ExtRort)# l# (ExtNo.)# CO Day Ring Assignments For Hunt Groups: FF4 l# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# CO Night Ring Assignments For Hunt Groups: FF4 2# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/?/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-7 Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) Section 400-Programming Hunt Group Type: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 2# (0-2)# Transfer Extension: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 3#. (ExtNo.)# Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# (Position)# (ExtNo.)## CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments For Hunt Groups: FF4 5# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments For Hunt Groups: FF4 6# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# CO Night 2 Ring Assignments For Hunt Groups: FF4 9# l# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or l># CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments For Hunt Groups: FF4 9# 2# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)++ (0 or l)# Page 4-8 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) Section 400-Programming Terminal/Circular Hunt Groups Software Version: CPC-A; CPC-B Versions prior to 2.0 Address: FF4 3## (HuntGrp)# 1# (0 or l)# Description A maximum of 8 extensions can be put in each of 8 hunt groups. Each hunt group can be designated as a “terminal type” or “circular type”. Terminal Hunt Group Operation The call must be transferred or a trunk set to ring at the first extension in the group in order for the Terminal Hunt feature to work. If the first extension in the hunt group is busy, an incoming call will automatically access the next extension of the group. If all the extensions in the group are busy, an internal caller (from another extension -- either intercom or transferred trunk call) will hear busy tone. A direct (nontransferred) trunk caller will hear ring tone. If additional feature options are chosen, the search will continue with an additional hunt group(s). To use the first extension position (analog) as a pilot position, place a 2-watt, 450-Ohm resistor across Tip and Ring. This will make the port busy, and ’ allow it to be used as a pilot number for the remaining extensions in the group. However, direct calls to other members in the hunt group (if busy) will not hunt within the group; instead, the caller will hear a busy signal. Circular Hunt Group Operation Circular Hunting is performed when a called extension in the group is busy. (Unanswered calls will not hunt, but will instead ring the extension until the Call Forward-No Answer Timer expires. The call will then revert to the Attendant phone.) The call can be either direct or transferred. No pilot number is provided for this type of hunting. The hunting will follow the next available (idle) member in the hunt group, skipping over busy extensions, until the last member of the hunt group is reached. The call will then go to the first member, then to the first extension position that was busy in the first go-around. This circular hunting will continue until the call has been presented at all extensions in the hunt group. If the call still hasn’t been answered, it will overflow into the next assigned hunt group (or the caller will get a busy signal, if no Transfer Extension is assigned to the hunt group). During Circular Hunting in a hunt group, if all the member extensions are busy, an internal caller (from another extension -- either intercom or transferred trunk call) will hear busy tone. A direct (non-transferred) trunk caller will hear ring tone. If additional feature options are chosen, the search will continue with an additional hunt group(s). DES-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 . Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-9 Section 400-Programming Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) Programming I FF4 3# (198)# I# (0 or l)# + Hunt Group No. + O=Terminal Hunting l=Circular Hunting Related Programming Offhook Signal: FF3 (ExtPort)## 7# (0 or l)# Notes Setting Hunt Group Types in Later CPC Versions. Set hunt group types for CPC-AIT versions, and for CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher, in FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 2# (0-2)#. Hunt Group Membership Restriction. An extension can be a member of only one hunt group. Hunt group extensions cannot also belong to call coverage groups. Absence Message, Call Forwarding, and DND Interaction. If a call enters a hunt group in which all extensionsare busy, the hunt feature will wait for the first available extension. If an extension within the hunt group (except for the first extension) is set for Call Forwarding, Absence Message, or DND, the hunt feature will skip that extension and proceed to the next position in the hunt group. If the first extension is set for Call Forwarding, Absence LMessage or DND, the hunting feature will not work. Call Routing When All Hunt Groups Are Busy. If all members of all searched hunt groups are busy, the call will be parked for only the first group searched. SLT Call Hold Restriction. If an SLT hunt group member takes a trunk call, puts it on hold, and replaces the handset, additional trunk calls will not hunt to idle extensions. Offook Signal Setting for Hunt Group Members. Offhook signaling should be disabled on extensions that are hunt group members. Page 4-l 0 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 . Section 400-Programming Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) Hunt Group Type Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 2# (O-2)# Description Use this address to assign one of the following hunting types to a hunt group: Terminal Hunt Group Operation This type is most often used with Voice Mail. With Terminal Hunting, the hunt begins with the pilot number, and moves sequentially through the extensions in the hunt group. If alI extensions are busy, the call camps onto the hunt group and waits for an extension to become idle. Distributed Hunt Group Operation With Distributed Hunting, the hunt begins at the extension after the last one to pick up a call, and continues in a circular manner for successive calls, Longest Idle Hunt Group Operation With Longest Idle Hunting, the hunt begins at the extension in the group that has been idle for the longest period of time, and progresses through the other extensions in the same manner. Programming FF4 3# (I-8)# 2# (012)# + Hunt Group No. + O=Terminal Hunting l=Distributed Hunting 2=Longest Idle Hunting Related Programming Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# (Position)# (ExtNo.)## Notes Hunt Group Membership Restriction. An extension can be a member of only one hunt group. Hunt group extensions cannot also belong to call coverage groups. Absence Message, Call Forwarding, and DND Interaction. If a call enters a hunt group in which all extensions are busy, the hunt feature will wait for the first available extension. If an extension within the hunt group (except for the first extension) is set for Call Forwarding, Absence Message or DND, the hunt feature will skip that extension and proceed to the next position in the hunt group. If the first extension is set for Call Forwarding, Absence Message or DND, the hunting feature will not work. D BS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-l 1 Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) Section 400-Programming Cult Routing When AU Hunt Groups Are Busy. If all members of all searched hunt groups are busy, the call will be parked for only the first group searched. SLT Call Hold Restri&ion. If an SLT hunt group member takes a trunk call, puts it on hold, and replaces the handset, additional trunk calls will not hunt to idle extensions. Of_Fook Signal Setting for Hunt Group Members. Offhook signaling should be disabled on extensions that are hunt group members. Page 4-l 2 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) Call Next Hunt Group Software Version: CPC-A; CPC-B Versions prior to 2.0 Address: FF4 3## (HuntGrp)# 2## (HuntGrp)# Description If all the extensions in a particular hunt group are busy, calls can be automatically transferred to another hunt group. If all extensions in the overflow hunt group are also busy, the call will revert back to the original hunt group, and continue to search extensions until one becomes available. Programming To assign an overflow Hunt Group . . . FF4 3# (l-8)# 2# (I-8)# f Hunt Group No. k Overflow Hunt Group No. To clear an overflow Hunt Group . . . FF4 3# (l-8)# 2# CONF ON/OFF k Hunt Group No. Notes Assigning Overflow Hunt Groups in Later CPC Versions. For CPC-AII versions, and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher, use the Transfer Extension address (FF4 3# HuntGrp# 3# ExtNo.#) to send overflow calls to other hunt groups via a hunt group “pilot” number; or to another extension. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-l 3 3ecuon 4uu-rrogramming wapter 4. ntngtng ana nunr woups (rr4) Hunt Group Members Software Version: CPC-A; CPC-B Versions prior to 2.0 Address: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# (3-lO)# (ExtNo.)# Description Use this option to place an extension at a specific position within a hunt group. Hunt groups can contain a maximum of 8 extension positions. Programving To assign an extension to a position within a hunt group . . . FF4 3# (118)# (31lO)# (10-69 or 1001699)# P Hunt Group No. + Position: 3=Posi tion 1 4=Position 2 5=Position 3 6=Position 4 7=Posi tion 5 8=Position 6 9=Position 7 lO=Position 8 $ Extension Number To clear an extension from a hunt group position . . . FF4 3# (l-8)# (3-l O)# CONF ON/OFF f Hunt Group No. t Hunt Group Positions l-8 (using address numbers 3-10) Related Programming Gffhook Signal: FF3 (ExtPort)# 7# (0 or l)# Notes Assigning Extensions to Hunt Groups in Later CPC Versions. For CPC- AII versions, and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher, use FF4 3# HuntGrp# (520)# (ExtNo.#) to assign extensions to hunt groups. Hunt Group Membership Restriction. An extension can be a member of only one hunt group. Hunt gr.oup extensions cannot belong to call coverage groups. Offlook Signaling for Hunt Group Members. Gffhook signaling should be disabled on extensions that are assigned as hunt group members. Page 4-l 4 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Transfer Extension Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF4 3## (HuntGrp)# 3# (ExtNo.)# Description This program sets the extension number to which overflow calls will be transferred. Once all extensions in a hunt group have been searched, or after the Hunt Group Transfer Timer has elapsed, the caller can be transferred to an individual extension, an extension in a different hunt group, the Attendant, or an SLT device. Note: This address requires an extension ltumber entxy, rather than an extension port entry. Programming To assign an overflow extension . . . FF4 3## (118)# 3## (lo-69 or 1001699)# r Hunt Group No. + Overflow Extension Number Def au1 t: 000 To clear an overflow extension . . . FF4 3# (I-8)# 3# CONF ON/OFF f Hunt Group No. Related Programming Hunt Group Transfer Timer: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 4## (0-32)# Notes Overflow Extension Number Reskiction. The overfiow extension number cannot be a hunt group pilot number. Transfer Extension in Earlier CPC Versions. This address replaces the Call Next Hunt Group address (FF4 3# Hunffirp# 2# HuntGrp#) used in earlier CPC versions. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-l 5 Hunt Group Transfer Timer Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF4 3## (HuntGrp)# 4## (O-32)# Description Use this program to set the maximum amount of time that passes before a call (after being routed through a busy/unanswered hunt group) overflows to an extension or additional hunt group. The call will flash on the last extension’s LED -- but will not ring -- for this amount of time (2 seconds by default), giving the hunt group a “last chance” to pick up the call before it is transferred out of the hunt group. Programming FF4 3# (l -8)# 4# (0132)# f Hunt Group No. t Transfer Timer 0 = No transfer (call will remain in same hunt group) l-32 = Number of seconds Default: 2 seconds . Related Programming Transfer Extension: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 3# (ExtNo.)# i Page 4-l 6 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DES-70400 Lnapter 4. ntnglng ana nunt woups (t-i-4) 5ec11on 4uo-rrogrammrng Hunt Group Members Sofhnrare Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# (5-12 or 5-20)# (EtiNo.)# Description Use this program to assign an extension to a hunt group, and determine its sequential position within the hunt group. Programming To assign an extension number to a position in a hunt group . . . FF4 3# (l-8)# (5-12 or 5-20)# (lo-69 or lOO=699)# ? Hunt Group No. + PQf&im 5=Position 1 6=Position 2 7=Position 3 8=Position 4 9=Position 5 lO=Position 6 1 l=Position 7 12=Position 8 3 ’ Extension Number 13zPosition 9 14=Position 10 15=Position 11 NOTE: Positions 9 16=Position 12 thru 16 (address nos. 17=Position 13 13-20) are available 18=Position 14 only with CPC-AIIjB 19=Position 15 Version 6.0 or higher.1 20=Position 16 To clear an extension from a hunt group position . . . FF4 3# (118)# (520)# CONF ON/OFF 4 Hunt Group No. \ Positions 1-16 in Hunt Group (using address numbers 5-20) NOTE: The extension must be idle while you are clearing it from the hunt group position; otherwise, it will not be cleared. Notes Hunt Group Positions. With CPC-B versions between 2.0 and 5.x. there are 8 available positions in each hunt group. Beginning with CPC-B Version 6.0 and CPC-AII, up to 16 positions are available. The extension numbers entered in this address must already be assigned to extension ports in address FF3 (ExtPort)## l# (lo-69 or lOO-699)#. An extension cannot belong to more than one hunt group. Extensions. Hunt Group Pilot Number. A pilot number must be assigned to the hunt group in address PF4 3# (HuntGrp)# l# (11-69 or lOl-699)#, in order for the hunt group feature to work. However, do not include the pilot number here in Hunt Group Members. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-l 7 WqJlGl +. nlllyllly dlllJ nullruluUp3 \I r-w) Call Coverage Group Members Software Version: .AIl Versions Address: FF4 4# (CovGrp)# (Position)# (ExtNo.)# Description A Call Coverage Group allows up to two extensions (one at a time) to serve as backup answering positions for as many as six other extensions. For example, if extensions 201-206 want their unanswered calls to be picked up by extensions 207 or 208: l l Assign extensions 207 and 208 to Call Coverage Group positions 1 and 2. Assign extensions 201-206 to Call Coverage Group positions 3-8. All incoming calls to the members will ring once on position l’s phone (if idle); the member’s extension number will display on position l’s phone (even if not idle). To pick up the call, position 1 presses the appropriate DSS/ BLF key assigned to the extension (or use Direct Call Pickup to take the call). Member calls will not ring or display on position 2’s phone unless position 1 is set for Call Forwarding, Absence Message, DND, or is busy on all MCO/ ML keys. Programming To assign an extension to a Call Coverage Group . . . FF4 4## (l-16)# (118)# (IO-69 or IOO-699)# f? 2 Extension Number Position in Group Call Coverage Group Note: Positions 1 and 2 are secretary positions: 3-8 are member positions. To clear an extension from the Call Coverage Group . . . FF4 4## (l-16)# (198)# CONF ON/OFF f Call Coverage GrouD f Position in Grout Related Programming Extension Number Digits: FFl 2# l# 12# (0 or l)## FF Key Programming: FF5 addresses Page 4-l 8 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 LI q,llt!l 4. nil IYII iy al IU nur II uroups Notes (rt4) Call Coverage Group Member Rest&ions. An extension assigned as a call coverage group member cannot also be a member of a hunt group. An extension cannot be a member of more than one call coverage group at a time. DSS Requirement For Positions I and 2. Call Coverage Group positions 1 and 2 need to have their phones’ DSS/BLF keys assigned to call coverage group members, so they can see the call flashing on the LED. (The call will ring only once at position 1 or 2’s phone.) DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-l 9 CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments Software Version: CPC-Ail (all versions); CPGB Version 1.07 or higher Address: FF4 5## (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# Description This program assigns delayed ringing to extensions for unanswered calls on specific trunks during “Day” mode. Delayed ringing is when an unanswered incoming call starts ringing at another extension after a certain period of time (the first extension will stop ringing). Programming I I FF4 5# (I-73 or I-145)# (I-64)# (0 or I)# f Extension Port f Trunk Number + O=Trunk does not ring. l=Trunk rings. NOTE: Use port 73 (for singlecabinet systems) or port 145 (for double-cabinet systems) to assign ringing to an external paging or Universal Night Answer (UNA) device. Related Programming Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 23# (d or l)# CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl 3# 26# (0-15)# CO Day Ring Assignments: Notes FF4 l# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# Attendant Interactions. If the Primary Attendant is assigned delayed ringing, the Attendant Overflow feature will be disabled. Also, if the Delayed Ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned or capable of ringing (DND, unplugged, etc.), the ringing line will automatically ring the Attendant. Timing For Delayed Ringing. Delayed ring timing -- the period of time that passes before the system transfers the unanswered call -- depends on the CPC version: l l Page 4-20 CPC-AI1 (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher: CO Delayed Ring Timer (FF13# 26#). CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1: Call Forward-No Answer Timer (FF13# 19# 0-M). DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-6 Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF4 5# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# Description This program assigns delayed ringing to hunt groups for unanswered calls on specific trunks during “Day” mode. Delayed ringing is when an unanswered incoming call starts ringing at another extension after a certain period of time (the first extension will stop ringing). Programming I FF4 5# (79-86 or 15%158)# (I-64)# (0 or l)# f f f Trunk No. O=Trunk.does not ring. l=Trunk rings. for Hunt Group 1 for Hunt Group 2 for Hunt Group 3 for Hunt Group 4 for Hunt Group 5 for Hunt Group 6 for Hunt Group 7 for Hunt Groun 8 Hunt Groups 1 thru 8: I2ICAIIorCPC-B 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 -or-or-or-or-or-or-or-or- 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 Related Programming Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 23# CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl CO Day Ring for Hunt Groups: Hunt Group Members: PF4 3# Notes (0 or l)# 3# 26# (0-15)# _ FF4 l# (HuntGrp)# (Tiunk)# (0 or l)# (l-8)# (5-12/20)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)# Attendant Interactions. If the Primary Attendant is assigned delayed ringing, the Attendant Overflow feature will be disabled. Also, if the Delayed Ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned or capable of ringing (DND, unplugged, etc.), the ringing line will automatically ring the Attendant. Timing For Delayed Ringing. Delayed ring timing -- the period of time that passes before the system transfers the unanswered call -- depends on the CPC version: CPC-AI1 (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher: CO Delayed Ring Timer -- FF13# 26# (0-15)# CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1: Call Forward-No Answer Timer -- FFl 3# 19# (O-15)# l l DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-21 CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments Software Version: CPC-Ail (all versions); CPC-8 Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF4 6# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# Description This program assigns delayed ringing to extensions for unanswered calls on specific trunks during “Night” mode. Delayed ringing is when an unanswered incoming call starts ringing at another extension after a certain period of time (the fist extension will stop ringing). Programming FF4 6# (l-73 or l-145)# (l-64)# (0 or I)# f Extension Port f Trunk Number + O=Trunk does not ring. l=Trunk rings. NOTE: Use port 73 (for single-cabinet systems) or port 145 (for double-cabinet systems) to assign ringing to an external paging or Universal Night Answer (UNA) device. Related Programming Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 23# (0 or l)# CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl 3# 26# (0-15)# CO Night Ring Assignments: ’ FF4 2# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# Notes Attendant Interactions. If the Primary Attendant is assigned delayed ringing, the Attendant Overflow feature will be disabled. Also, if the Delayed Ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned or capable of ringing (DND, unplugged, etc.), the ringing line will automatically ring the Attendant. Night Mode. Beginning with CPC-AIVB Version 7.0, there are two separate Night modes -- “Night” and “Night 2”. This address controls “Night” delayed ring assignments (see FF4 9# 2# for “Night 2” delayed ringing). Timing For Delayed Ringing. Delayed ring timing -- the period of time that passes before the system transfers the unanswered call -- depends on the CPC version: CPC-AI1 (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher: CO Delayed Ring Timer -- FFl 3# 26# (0- 15)# CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1: Call Forward-No Answer Timer -- FFl 3# 19# (O-15)# l l Page 4-22 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 wiapref 4. nmgrrlg ana nurit woups (i-i-4) CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF4 6## (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)#b (0 or l)# Description - This program assigns delayed ringing to hunt groups for unanswered calls on specific trunks during “Night” mode. Delayed ringing is when an unanswered incoming call starts ringing at another extension after a certain period of time (the first extension will stop ringing). Programming I FF4 W (79-86 or 151-158)# (1164)# (0 or l)# f f f Trunk No. O=Trunk does not ring. l=Trunk rings. for Hunt Group 1 for Hunt Group 2 for Hunt Group 3 for Hunt Group 4 for Hunt Group 5 for Hunt Group 6 for Hunt Group 7 for Hunt Groun 8 Hunt Groups 1 thru 8: CPC.-ATTorCPCI-B 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 -or-or-or-or-or-or-or-or- 15 1 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 Related Programming Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 23# (0 or l)# CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl 3# 26# (0-15)# CO Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FP4 2# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)#’ (0 or l)# Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (l-8)# (5-12/20)# (loo-699)# Notes Attendant Interactions. If the Primary Attendant is assigned delayed ringing, the Attendant Overflow feature will be disabled. Also, if the Delayed Ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned or capable of ringing @ND, unplugged, etc.), the ringing line will automatically ring the Attendant. Night Mode. Beginning with CPC-AIUB Version 7.0, there are two separate Night modes -- “Night” and “Night 2”. This address controls “Night” delayed ring assignments (see FF4 9# 2# for “Night 2” delayed ringing). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - issued 8/t/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-23 Timing For Delayed Ringing. Delayed ring timing -- the period of time that passes before the system transfers the unanswered call -- depends on the CPC version: l l Page 4-24 CPC-AI1 (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher: CO Delayed Ring Timer -- FFl 3# 26## (0-15)# CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1: Call Forward-No Answer Timer -- FFl 3# 19# (O-15)# DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) Section 400-Programming Extension Ring Table Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF4 7# (TargetExtPort)# (SourceExtPort)# (0 or l)# Description DSS/BLF keys can be programmed (in FF5) to flash whenever other extensions receive incoming calls. Use this address to program the DSS/BLF phone to also ring for these incoming calls. The DSS/BLF phone user can answer the call by pressing the flashing DSS/ BLF key. Programming FF4 7# (l-144)# (l-144)# (0 or l)# / Extension Port with DSS/BLF Keys t f &Do not ring Extension Port the DSS/BLF receiving calls phone. (unanswered extension) l=Ring the DSS/ BLF phone. Related Programming DSS/BLF Key Programming: FF5 (l-144)# (l-24)# CONF PROG (lo-69 or l OO-699)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-25 Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) Section 400-Programming Extension Delayed Ring Table Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF4 8## (TargetExtPort)# (SourceExtPort)# (0 or l)# Description DSS/BLF keys can be programmed (in FF5) to flash whenever other extensions receive incoming calls. Use this address to program the DSVBLF phone to also ring for these incoming calls on a delayed basis. If the incoming call is unanswered at the ringing extension, the DSS/BLF phone will begin ringing (and the first extension will stop ringing) after a certain period of time. The DSS/BLF phone user can answer the call by pressing the flashing DSSI BLF key. Programming I FF4 8# (I-144)# (I-144)# (0 or l)# h + f Extension Port with Extension Port O=Do not delay-ring the DSWBLF phone. receiving calls DSS/BLF Keys (unanswered extension) l=Delay-ring the DSWBLF phone. Related Programming Extension (BLF) Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 30# (0 or l)# Extension (DSS/BLF) Delayed Ring Tier: FFl 3# 27# (0-15)# DSS/BLF Key Programming: FF5 (l-144)# (l-24)# CONF PROG (lo-69 or l OO-699)# Notes Timing For Extension Delayed Ringing. The period of time that passes before the system begins ringing the unanswered call on the DSS/BLF extension, depends on the CPC version: CPC-AI1 (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher: Extension Delayed Ring Timer -- FFl 3# 27# (0-15)# CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1: Call Forward-No Answer Timer -- FFl 3# 19# (O-15)# l l Page 4-26 DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 UIaptef 4. Hlnging and Hunt Groups (FF4) Section 400~Programming CO Night 2 Ring Assignments Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-6, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FF4 9# l# (ExtPort)## (Trunk)# (0 or l)# Description This program determines which extension(s) will receive incoming calls from a particular trunk when the DBS is in “Night 2” mode. Programming I FF4 9# l# (l-73 or l-145)# (l-64)# (0 or l)# /’ Extension Port- /. Trunk Number + O=Trunk does not ring. l=Trunk rings. Note: Use port 73 (for single-cabinet systems) or 145 (for doublecabinet systems) to assign ringing to an external paging or Universal Night Answer (UNA) device. Notes DBS-70-400 Default Attendant Ring Assignments. All trunks are set to ring on ports 1 and 2 (the Primary and Second Attendants) by default. If a trunk is not assigned to ring at a specific extension, it will still ring the Attendant. DBS Manual - Issued 8/?/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-27 CO Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-8, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FF4 9# l# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# Description This program determines which hunt group will receive incoming calls from a particular trunk when the DBS is in “Night 2” mode. Programming I FF4 9# 1# (79-86 or Ml-158)## (I-64)# (0 or l)# /( Hunt Groups 1 thru 8: f Trunk No. CPC-ATT0rCIPC-B 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 -or-or-or-or-or-or-or-or- 15 1 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 for Hunt Group for Hunt Group for Hunt Group for Hunt Group for Hunt Group for Hunt Group for Hunt Group for Hunt Group f O=Trunk does not ring. l=Trunk rings. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Related ,Programming Hunt Group No Answer Timer: FFl 3# 28# (0-15)# Hunt Group Pilot Numbers: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)## l# (11-69 or lOl-699)# Hunt Group Type: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)## 2# (0-2)## Transfer Extension: F’F4 3# (HuntGrp)## 3# (lo-69 or lOO-699)## Hunt Group Transfer Timer: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 4# (0-32)# Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# (5- 12/20)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)# Page 4-28 DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4) Section 400-Programming CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-6, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FF4 9# 2# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# Description This program assigns delayed ringing to extensions for unanswered calls on specific trunks during “Night 2” mode. Delayed ringing is when an unanswered incoming call starts ringing at another extension after a certain period of time (the first extension will stop ringing). Programming FF4 9# 2# (I-73 or I-145)# (l-64)# (0 or I)# f Extension Port f Trunk Number + O=Trunk does not ring. 1 =Trunk rings. NOTE: Use port 73 (for single-cabinet systems) or port 145 (for double-cabinet systems) to assign ringing to an external paging or Universal Night Answer (UNA) device. Related Programming Delayed Ring: FFl 2# lif 23# (0 or l)# CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl 3# 26# (0-15)# CO Night 2 Ring Assignments: FF4 9# l# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# Notes Attendant Interactions. If the Primary Attendant is assigned delayed ringing, the Attendant Overflow feature will be disabled. Also, if the Delayed Ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned or capable of ringing (DND, unplugged, etc.), the ringing line will automatically ring the Attendant. Timing For Delayed Ringing. Delayed ring timing -- the period of time that passes before the system transfers the unanswered call -- is controlled by the CO Delayed Ring Timer (FFl 3# 26#). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4-29 CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-6, Version 7.0 or higher Address: FF4 9# 2# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or I)# Description This program assigns delayed ringing to hunt groups for unanswered calls on specific trunks during “Night 2” mode. Delayed ringing is when an unanswered incoming call-starts ringing at another extension after a certain period of time (the first extension will stop ringing). Programming FF4 9# 2# (79-86 or IN-158)# (1964)# (0 or l)# f f Trunk No. O=Trunk does not ring. l=Trunk rings. for Hunt Group 1 for Hunt Group 2 for Hunt Group 3 for Hunt Group 4 for Hunt Group 5 for Hunt Group 6 for Hunt Group 7 for Hunt Group 8 Hunt Groups 1 thru 81 CPC-ATT0rCPC-B 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 -or-or-or-or-or-or-or-or- 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 Related Programming Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 23# (0 or l)# CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl 3# 26# (0-15)# CO Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 9# l# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)# Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (l-8)# (5-12/20)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)# Attendant Interactions. If the primary Attendant is assigned delayed ringing, the Attendant Overflow feature will be disabled. Also, if the Delayed Ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned or capable of ringing (DND, unplugged, etc.), the ringing line will automatically ring the Attendant. Timing For Delayed Ringing. Delayed ring timing -- the period of time that passes before the system transfers the unanswered call -- is controlled by the CO Delayed Ring Timer (FFl 3# 26#). Page 4-30 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 5. FF Key Programming (FF5) Use the FF5 addresses in this chapter to assign special features to the Flexible Function (FF) keys on DBS phones. FF keys can be programmed to activate features which normally require several keystrokes -- such as initiating system features, assigning specific extension numbers, or storing digits that are frequently dialed. Section 700Feature Operation explains in detail how each of these features works. FF keys are the buttons with LEDs. (The buttons without LEDs -- called “one-touch keys” -- are used for call-handling features such as speed dialing, and cannot be set via FF5 programming.) FF keys can also be programmed from extensions without entering the programming mode (see the phone model’s Station User Guide for instructions). However, if a trunk is already assigned to an FF key, it must be cleared using FF5 programming before a feature code can be reassigned to it. This chapter covers the following addresses: Topic FF5 (ExtPort)# ( l -24)# (Code)# FF Key Assignments for Extensions FF5 (DSS)# (l-72)# (Code)* FF Key Assignments for DSS Consoles 133 (AuendarW (l-XV (CcW# Attendant Feature Package Key Assignments FF5 Address Page 5-3 5-8 540 (CPC-B Versions 2.0 to 4.0) DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 5-I Page 5-2 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 FF Key Assignments for Extensions Software Version: All Versions Address: FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)# (Feature)# Description Each Flexible Function (FF) key on DBS phones and EM/24 consoles can be programmed with a feature code. During normal phone operation (not in programming mode), pressing the FF key performs the feature associated with the code. Figures 5 1 and 5-2 (next page) illustrate FF key numbering on a 32-button phone and on an EM/24 console. A key telephone’s FF keys are numbered left-to-right, starting on the bottom row. An EM/24’s F’F keys are numbered bottom-to-top, starting at the left column. To program FF keys on a DSS console, see the next address. Programming To assign a feature to an FF key . . . FF5 (l-144)# (1124)# CONF (Code)# 7 Extension Port. or EM/24 Port f Key Number (see figures, next page). t 2 Clears any existing feature code before assigning a new one Feature Code (see table on page S-5) Note: Not all DBS phones have 24 FF keys available for programming. For example, a 34button phone has 24 FF keys and 10 PSD keys: however, a 22-button phone has only 12 FF keys and 10 PSD keys. To clear a feature assignment from an FF key . . . FF5 (19144)# (l-24)# CONF ON/OFF f Extension Port t Key Number To see an FF key’s existing feature assignment, press . . . ON/OFF CONF [press the FF key] DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 4 Page 5-3 Figure 5-I. FF key layout on a 34-button phone MUTE CONF AUTO VOlV VOLA . I - - PSD Keys FF Keys Figure 5-2. FF key layout on an EM124 unit ll-----Il 18 1116 14 1112 3 3 12 3 Page 5-4 1 I10 1124 3 1120 3 3 1 118 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 3 3 3 1 ] ] DBS-70-400 Table 5-l. Feature codes for FF key assignment Code to be assigned to FF key (FFll enters an asterisk +) (FF12 enters a pound sign #) Feature Absence Message Account Code Alarm 71 AUTO FF12 FF12 4 (CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0 with AFP) Answer Key Any Key FFll 1 PROG PROG XXXXXX Note: The “Any Key” feature allows you to store digits other than extension numbers, CO trunks, or feature codes. For example, Any Key can be used to store an account code or a Voice Mail password. Attendant Park Hold BGM (Background Music) On/Off Busy Override Call Forward--Outside 75 (00-09) FF12 53 PROG PROG 4 723 (CPC-AII/B versions prior to 7.0) Call Forward Call Forward--All Calls Call Forward--Busy/No Answer Call Forward--Busy Call Forward--No Answer 72 720 Call Park call Pickup Call Waiting Caller ID Log Day Mode Day/Night/Night2 Mode Toggle 75 (CPC-AWB Version 7.0 or higher) Dial Tone Off DND (Do Not Disturb) DP to DTMF Signal Conversion DSS/BLF Key (flash for extension calls) DBS-70-400 721 722 724 Note: Beginning with CPC-AII/B Version 7.0, you can call-forward to an outside phone number. Use an existing PSD or SSD code as the destination phone number, with a “CX-PhoneNo.” format (where C is the CONF key, and X is 1-6 or 9 for trunk group 81-86 or 89). 79 PROG PROG 3 FFll 6 FF12 521 FF12 5 2 0 Note: The FF key LED will be off during Day mode; red during Night mode; and green during Night 2 mode. FF12 50 73 PROG PROG FFll -or- PROG PROG FF12 PROG (lo-69 or 100-699) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 5-5 Code to be assigned to FF key (FFll enters an asterisk *) WF12 enters a pound sign #) Feature Extension Directory Extension Lockout Group Call Pickup Headset Intercom Key Internal Dial Tone MC0 or ML Keys 900002 74 70 FF12 51 FF12 8 FF12 50 (81-86 or 89) Note: See “ML/MC0 Separation” (FF3 ExtPort# 4#) to determine which type of key is available with your software. 77 AUTO REDIAL FFll FF12 FF12 52 (CPC-AH/B versions prior to 7.0) FF 12 522 (WC-AH/B Version 7.0 or higher) FF12 -523 Meet-Me Answer Message Waiting Answer Mute Night Mode Night 2 mode (CPC-AII/B Version 7.0 or higher) Gffhook Voice Announce Gffhook Voice Announce Answer Page Park Hold PSD (Personal Speed Dial) Directory PSD (Personal Speed Dial) Number Release Reminder Save Number Redial Access Save Number Redial Set SSD (System Speed Dial) Directory SSD (System Speed Dial) Number Tl Alarms -Frame Loss Red Alarm Signal Loss Slips Sync Loss Ye1 low Alarm Page 5-6 PROG PROG 5 FFll 3 FF12 (00-07) 75 900000 AUTO (90-99 or 900-909) FFll 2 FF12 4 AUTO FFll AUTO AUTO FFll 900001 AUTO (00-89 or 000- 199) (Worti) (101 or 121) FF12 (103 or 123) FF12 (104 or 124) FF12 (102 or 122) FF12 (105 or 125) FF12 (107 or 127) FF12 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 5. FF Key Programming (FF5) Code to be assigned to FF key Feature Talkback Tone/Voice Calling Transfer Trunk Group Selection (same as “MC0 or ML Keys”) Trunk Queuing Trunk Selection UNA Pickup Voice Mail One-Touch Access (FFll enters an &risk *) (FF12 enters a pound sign #) FFll 3 PROG PROG 1 PROG PROG PROG (81-86 or 89) PROG PROG 2 (01-64) 78 PROG AUTO NNN (XXXor AUTO SSD/PSD)# (CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher) f f VM Pilot Numbe; Press the # Ikey to register the string. Note: The password (if used) can be 1 to 3 digits long. If the password is over 3 digits. it must be assigned as a speed-dial code (be sure to include an ending pound # sign after the password when creating the speeddial code). Voice Mail Transfer Password (optional) PROG AUTO AUTO NNN (NNN=VM Pilot Number) Related Programming BLF Port Assignment: FF3 (ExtPort)# 3# (ExtPort)# ML/MC0Separation: FF3 (ExtPort)# 4# (0 or l)# FF Key Copy: FF9 3# (ExtPort)# (ExtPort)## Notes DBS-70-400 FFll and FF12 in the Feature Codes. The * and # phone keys are used as movement keys (for scrolling through addresses) while in programming mode. Therefore, when programming feature codes for FF keys, FFl 1 and FF12 are used instead to represent * and # (FFll enters *; FF12 enters #). The phone will not display the symbol when you press FFll or FF12, but it will register * or # as part of the feature code. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 5-7 Chapter 5. FF Key Programming (FF5) Section 400-Programming FF Key Assignments for DSS Consoles Software Version: All Versions Address: FF5 (DSSPort)# (Key)# (Feature)# Description Use this address to assign features to FF keys on a DSS console. During normal phone operation, pressing the FF key will perform the assigned feature. Figure 5-3 (next page) shows the key layout of a DSS/72 console. For a list of feature codes, use the same table as the “Extensions” address (previous page). Programming To assign a feature to a DSS FF key . . . FF5 (73-76 or 145148)# CONF (l-72)# (Code)# 3 f DSS Location Cl-AI&J Cpc1-E 73=DSS 1 73=DSS 2 75=DSS 3 74=DSS 4 Clears any existing FF key 145=DSS 1 assignment 146=DSS 2 before a new .147=DSS 3 one is assigned 148=DSS 4 f 2 FF Key (see illustration, previous page) Feature Code (see table on page 5-5) To reset a DSSi72 FF key to its default value . . . FF5 (73-76 or 145148)# (l-72)# CONF ON/OFF c DSS Location f FF Key To see an FF key’s existing feature assignment, press . . . CONF ON/OFF [press the FF key] I Related Programming BLF Port Assignment: FF3 (ExtPort)# 3# (ExtPort)# ML/MC0 Separation: FF3 (ExtPort)# 4## (0 or l)# FF Key Copy: FF9 3# (ExtPott)# (ExtPort)## Page 5-8 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 ~BGUUII 4uu-rroyrarwwly Notes br~aprer 3 . r r n e y r r o g r a m m t n g (i-r3j Default Key Assignments. The F’F keys on DSS consoles 1 and 3 are assigned by default as DSVBLF, Page, Park, and Night keys. DSS consoles 2 and 4 do not have default key assignments. Restriction on Trunk LED Indications. Only the first 24 FF keys will light for trunks that are assigned to them. Trunks can be assigned to the remaining keys from the phone (rather than through programming mode), but the LEDs will not light. FFll and FF12 in the Feature Codes. The * and # phone keys are used as movement keys for scrolling through addresses while in programming mode. Therefore, when programming feature codes for FF keys, FFl 1 and FF 12 are used instead to represent * and # (FFll enters *; FF12 enters #I). The phone’ will not display the symbol when you press FFll or FF12, but it will register * or # as part of the feature code. Figure 5-3. FF key layout on a DSSl72 console DBS-70400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 5-9 Section 400-Programming Chapter 5. FF Key Programming (FF5) Attendant Feature Package Key Assignments Software Version: CPC-8 Versions 2.0 to 4.0 Address: FF5 (Attendant)# (Key)# (Feature)# Description In DBS systems with the Attendant Feature Package (AFP), each FF key on an Attendant console can be programmed with a feature code. During normal phone operation (not in programming mode), pressing the FF key performs the feature associated with the code. For a list of feature codes, use the same table as the “Extensions” address (page 5-5). Note: The AFP was discontinued in CPC-B Version 5.0. Programming To assign an Attendant console FF key . . . FF5 (1491152)# (I-32)# CONF (Code)# f Attendant Console: 149=Attendant Console 1 UO=Attendant Console 15 l=Attendant Console 3 153=Attendant Console 4 + FF Key 2 . t \\ Cl&s any Feature Code existing feature (see table on code before a page 5-5) new one is assigned To reset an Attendant Console FF key to its default value . . . FF5 (149~152)# (I- 2)# CONF ON/OFF f Attendant Console 1 FF Key Related Programming BLF Port Assignment: FF3 (ExtPort)# 3# (ExtPort)# ML/MC0 Separation: FF3 (ExtPort)# 44# (0 or l)# FF Key Copy: FF9 3# (ExtPort)# (ExtPort)#H Page 5-l 0 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Notes Chapter 5. FF Key Programming (FF5) Default Key Assignments. The FF keys on Attendant consoles 1 and 2 are assigned by default as MC0 keys. Attendant consoles 3 and 4 do not have default key assignments. Restriction on Trunk LED Indications. Only the first 24 FF keys will light for trunks that are assigned to them. Trunks can be assigned to the remaining keys from the phone (rather than through programming mode), but the LEDs will not light. FFll and FF12 in the Feature Codes. The * and # phone keys are used as movement keys (for scrolling through addresses) while in programming mode. Therefore, when programming feature codes for FF keys, FFl 1 and FF12 are used instead to represent * and # (FFll enters *; FF12 enters #). The phone will not display the symbol when you press FFll or FF12, but it will register * or # as part of the feature code. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 5-l 1 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6) Use the FF6 program addresses in this chapter to create text names and messages that will appear on the LCD displays of DBS phones. IMPORTANT: A DSS/BLF phone is required for FF6 programming. See ‘General Notes” (next page) for instructions on using DSS/BLF keys to make text assignments in FF6 programming. This chapter covers the following addresses: Topic General Notes 1 FF6 l# (ExtPort)# CONF (lOchar.)# 1 Extension Name JTF6 2# (SSD)# COIW (16char.W System Speed Dial Names FF6 3# (Extport)# (PSD)# CONF (16ch&# Personal Speed Dial Names 1 FF6 44# 69)# CONF (15char.M Absence Messages FF6 5# (Trunk)# CONF (6char.W Trunk Name Assignment FF6 Address all FF6 addresses I Page 6-2 16-3 6-4 6-5 1 16-6 1 6-8 (CPC-AIUB 2.0 or higher) FF6 6# (HuntGrp)# CONF (1lchar.M Hunt Group Name Assignment 6-9 (CPC-AII/EI 2.0 or higher) FF6 7# (l-5)# CON-F (15char.M Call WaitingJOHVA Text Reply (CPC-AII/B 2.0 or higher) FF6 (8/W (1-200)# (1/2)# (DID/DNISNo.j# DID/DNIS Text Name Assignment (6char.)# DBS-70-400 6-11 (CPC-B 5.0 or higher) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 6-1 General Notes Assigning text names via FF6 programming requires the use of a DSS/BLF phone. Figure 6-l below shows the key layout of a DSSI72 console that can be used for assigning text names. The left- and right-arrow keys, located on the bottom row of the expansion unit (on the right), can be used to move the cursor backward and forward through the letters of a name entry. Some text names can also be assigned without entering the programming mode (see Section 700-Feature Operation for instructions), while others require FF6 programming. Text Names that can be assigned without entering programming mode . . . Extension Names System Speed Dial Names Personal Speed Dial Names Call Waiting/OHVA Text Reply Text Names that can only be assigned using FF6 programming . . . Absence Messages Trunk Names Hunt Group Names DIDIDNIS Names Figure 6-l. Key layout of a DSSl72 console for text name assignment . Page 6-2 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com D BS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6) Extension Name Software Version: All Versions Address: FF6 l# (ExtPort)# CONF (Name)# Description Names of up to 10 characters can be assigned to each extension number. An extension’s name appears on the second line of its display. The name of an extension being called appears on the top line of the display. Extension names can also be assigned without entering the programming mode, using the Attendant Feature option (see Section 700-Feature Operation for instructions). Programming To assign an extension name . . . FF6 I# (l-144)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNN)# t Extension Port t Text Name (up to 10 characters) To clear an extension name . . . FF6 1# (l-144)# CONF ON/OFF A I Extension Port Notes DBS-70-400 Using a DSS Console With AFl? If the Attendant Feature Package (AFP) is used (available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0), the DSS console must be initially set as type “11” in the Terminal Type address (FF3 ExtPort## 2#), to enable the keys to perform programming functions. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 6-3 Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6) Section 400-Programming System Speed Dial Names SoWare Ver$ion: All Versions Address: FF6 2# (SSD)# CONF (Name)# Description Names of up to 16 characters can be assigned to System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers. The names are displayed alphabetically on large-display telephones to confirm the name of the person being called using an SSD code. SSD names can also be assigned without entering the programming mode, using the Attendant Feature option (see Section 700-Feature Operation for instructions). Programming To assign SSD names . . . I I FF6 2# (00-89 or 000-199)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)# f f Text Name SSD Number: (up to 16 characters) OO-89=CPC-A (all versions); CPC-AI1 and CPC-B versions prior to 7.0 OOO-199=CPC-AI1 and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher To clear SSD names . . . I I FF6 2# (00-89 or 000-199)# CONF ON/OFF f SSD Number Related Programming Override Toll Restriction With SSD Numbers: FFl 2# l# 4# (SSD)# SSD Display Restriction: FFl 2# l# 5# (0 or l)# System Speed Dial Numbers: FFlO l# (SSD)# (PhoneNo.)## Notes Page 6-4 Using a DSS Console With AFI? If the Attendant Feature Package (AFP) is used (available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0), the DSS console must be initially set as type “11” in the Terminal Type address (FF3 ExtPort# 2#), to enable the keys to perform programming functions. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6) Section 400-Programming Personal Speed Dial Names Software Version: All Versions Address: FF6 3## (ExtPort)# (PSD)# CONF (Name)# Description Names of up to 16 characters can be assigned to Personal Speed Dial (PSD) numbers. The names are displayed alphabetically on large-display telephones to confirm the name of the person being called using a PSD code. Display-phone users can also assign their own PSD names without entering the programming mode (see Section 700-Feature Operation for instructions). Programming To assign PSD names . . . FF6 3# (l-144)# (90-99 or 900-909)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)# f I’. Extension Port t Text Name PSD Number: 90-99=CPC-A (all versions); CPC-AII and (up to 16 characters) CPC-B versions prior to 7.0 900-909=CPC-AII and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher To clear PSD names . . . FF6 3# (l-144)# (90-99 or 900-909)# CONF ON/OFF t Extension Port t PSD Number Related Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers: FFlO 2# (ExtPort)# (PSD)# (PhoneNo.)# Notes DBS-70-400 Using a DSS Console With AFl? If the Attendant Feature Package (AFP) is used (available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0), the DSS console must be initially set as type “11” in the Terminal Type address (FF3 ExtPort# 2#),. to enable the keys to perform programming functions. DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 6-5 Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6) Section 400-Programming Absence Messages Software Version: All Versions Address: FF6 4# (59)# CONF (Message)# Description Use this program to create up to 5 custom absence messages for DBS phone users. Absence messages can only be assigned via FF6 programming. DBS phone users can set their extensions to send a message to calling parties, indicating they cannot answer the phone. The absence message is automatically displayed on the calling extension’s LCD (if it has one). When users set their phones to send absence messages, they can select which message will be displayed on the calling extension’s phone. The DBS system supports up to 10 different absence messages; 5 of these are preset (see Table 6-l below), and 5 can be created using this FF6 address on a DSS/BLF phone. Table 6-l. Preset Absence Messages O-4 Absence Message No. 0 1 2. 3 4 Message Text In Meeting At Lunch Out of Office Vacation Another Office Programming To create a cu$tom absence message . . . FF6 4# (59)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)# f Custom Absence Message Number (5-9) f Custom Absence Message Text (up to 15 characters) To clear a custom absence message . . . FF6 4# (59)# CONF ON/OFF + Custom Absence Message No. Page 6-6 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Notes DBS-70-400 Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6) Using a DSS Console With AFf! If the Attendant Feature Package (AFP) is used (available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0), the DSS console must be initially set as type “11” in the Terminal Type address (FF3 ExtPort# 2#), to enable the keys to perform programming functions. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 . Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 6-7 Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6) Section 400~Programming Trunk Naine Assignment Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF6 5## (Trunk)# CONF (NNNNNN)# Description Trunks can be given names of up to 6 characters to help identify the source of calls. When an inbound call rings at an extension, the trunk name appears on the top line of the extension’s display. Trunk names can only be assigned via FF6 programming. Programming To assign a trunk name . . . FF6 5# (l-64)# CONF (NNNNNN)# + Trunk Number f Trunk Text (up to 6 characters) To clear a trunk name . . . FF6 5# (1164)# CONF ON/OFF A TrunkI4umber Notes -. Page 6-8 Using a DSS Console With AFl? If the Attendant Feature Package (AFP) is used (available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0), the DSS console must be initially set as type “11” in the Terminal Type address (FF3 ExtPort# 2#), to enable the keys to perform programming functions. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 “k Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBSr70-400 Section 400~Programming Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6) Hunt Group Name Assignment Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF6 6# (HuntGrp)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNNN)# Description Hunt groups can be given names of up to 10 characters to help identify the source of trunk calls transferred from the hunt group. \ Hunt group names can only be assigned via FF6 programming. Programming To assign hunt group names . . . FF6 6# (I-8)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNN)# t t Hunt Group Number Hunt Group Text (up to 10 characters) To clear’hunt group names . . . FF6 6# (118)# CONF ON/OFF t Hunt Group Number Notes DBS-70-400 Using a ‘DSS Console With AFP If the Attendant Feature Package (AFP) is used (available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0), the DSS console must be initially set as type “11” in the Terminal Type address (FF3 ExtPort# 2#), to enable the keys to perform programming functions. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 6-9 Section 400-Programming Chapter 6. Name and Message Assicjnments (FFG) Call Waiting/OHVA Text Reply Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-6 Version 2.0 or higher Address: FF6 7# (l-5)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)# Description When a busy party receives an indication of an incoming intercom call, the busy party can respond by sending a text message back to the caller. The text message can be sent after a Call Waiting tone, an OfRook Voice Announce, or a Call Waiting tone followed by Offhook Voice Announce. This address allows you to change the default messages. The following table shows the default messages: Table 6-2. Default call waiiinglOHVA text reply messages 2 3 4 5 Please Hold Will Call Back Transfer Unavailable Call Waiting/OHVA text messages can also be assigned without entering the programming mode, using the Attendant Feature option (see Section 700Feature Operation for [email protected]). Programming To assign call waiting/OHVA text reply messages . . . FF6 7# ‘(l-5)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)# f f Message Number Message Text (up to 15 characters) To clear call waiting/OHVA text reply messages . . . FF6 7# (l-5)# CONF ON/OFF + Message Number Page 6-10 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6) DlDlDNlS Text Name Assignment Software Version: CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher Address: DID: FF6 8# (l-200)# (1 or 2)# (0000-9999)# (NNNNNN)# DNIS: FF6 9# (l-200)# (1 or 2)# (000019999)# (NNNNNN)# Description Assign DID/DNIS names of up to 6 characters long for specific DID/DNTS numbers. DID/DNIS text names can only be assigned via FF6 programming. The DID/ DNIS number must already be assigned to an extension, before you can assign a name to the number. (see FFl 8# 3# for DID numbers: FFl 8# 4# 7# for DNIS numbers) Programming To assign a DID/DNIS text name . . . FF6 (8 or 9)# (11200)# (1 or 2)# (OOOO-9999)# (NNNNNN)# t DID/DNIS Text l=Assign a number DID/DNIS 8=DID 9=DNIS Assignment Table to a name Number (only if “1” 2=Change a name is selected) t Name Text (up to 6 char.) To clear a DlD/DNIS text name . . . FF6 (8 or 9)# (l-200)# (1 or 2)# CONF ON/OFF + f \ 8=DID l=Number and name DID/DNIS Text 2=Name only 9=DNIS Assignment Table Related Programming Inbound DID Numbers: FFl 8# 3# (DIDNo.)# (ExtNo.)# DAIS Number Setting: FFl 8# 4# 7# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)# Notes DBS-70-400 Maximums. Up to 200 DID text names and 200 DlVIS text names can be assigned. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 6-11 7. Toll Restrictions (FF7) Use the FF7 program addresses in this chapter to perform Toll Restriction Service (TRS) programming. This chapter covers the following addresses: FF7 Address aliFF7addresses FF7 I# l# (0 or l)# FF7 1#2#(0 or l)# FF7 1#3#(1-15)# FF7 1# 4# thru lOl# (0 or l># FF7 l# 12# th 16# (0 or l)# FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)# Topic Page 7-2 t An Overview of Toll Restrictions 1 International Calling For TRS TvDes 3-6 DTMF Signaling During Incoming Calls For TRS 7-6 Types O-6 1 Maximum Dialed Digits For TRS Types 3-6 1 7-7 3-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6 7-8 7-Ditit Toll Restriction For TRS Twes 2-6 7-9 Dialing Plan Switch 7-10 7-5 (CPC-A 4.0 or higher. CPC-AID 6.0 or higher) FF7 l# 18# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)# Operator Access 7-11 (CPC-A 4.0 or higher. CPC-AU/B 6.0 or higher) FF7 l# 19# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)# Interhational Calling on Extensions 7-12 (CPC-A 4.0 or higher. CPC-AIUB 6.0 or higher) FF7 l# 20# (l-lO)# (O-999)# Country Code Table 7-13 (CPC-A 4.0 or higher; CPC-AH/B 6.0 or higher) FF7 l# 21# (0 or l)# Equal Access Code Format (CPC-A 4.0 or higher; CPC-AIUB 6.0 or higher) FF7 l# 22# (l-1O)t: (OOO-999)# Office Code Restriction Table For TRS Types 2-6 (CPC-A 4.0 or higher. CPC-AWE 6.0 or hinherj F'F7 2#(3-6)#(000-999)#(0 orI># FF7 3#(3-6)#(000-999)#(0 or l)# FF7 4# (l+Y (000-999)# FF7 5# (14)# (000-999)# (0 or l)# FF7 6# (l-50)# @OOOO00-9999999)# FF7 7#(ExtPon)#(Trunk)#(O-7)# FF7 8# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (O-7)# FF7 9# (1-4)# (0 or l)# Area Code Table For TRS Trpes 3-6 Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 Special Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 Special 7-Digit Table For TRS Types 2-6 Day TRS Types O-7 for Trunks Night TRS Types O-7 for Trunks Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global -I 7-14 7-15 i-16 1 1 7-17 7-18 7-19 --i 1 7-20 7-21 7-22 7-23 CODV) FF7 9#(5-8)#(0 or l)# FF7 9# (9-12)# (0 or l># FF7 9#(13-16)#(0 or l)# DBS-70-400 Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global COPY) Area & Office Code Table for TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy) Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global CODV) DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I 7-24 7-25 7-26 Page 7-1 An Overview of Toll Restrictions The DBS Toll Restriction Service (TRS) allows you to set restrictions on outgoing calls. For example, TRS can prohibit long-distance calls and prevent after-hours calls. TRS can also minimize non-business calls and reduce phone bills by permitting only longdistance calls over designated trunks. The DBS system supports up to eight different TRS types (see table below). A TRS type can be assigned to each trunk to activate toll restriction. Table 7-L. ,Toll restriction types TRS Type Characteristics Full restriction of outbound dialing. 0 Inbound calls can be answered if trunk is assigned to ring an extension. Intercom calls are allowed. Group Call Pickup (intercom calls only). 9+911 calls are always restricted (except in WC-AD/B Version 6.00 only). Full restriction of outbound dialing. 1 Inbound trunk calls to all phones can be answered and/or transferred. Intercom calls are allowed. Group Call Pickup (intercom calls only). 9+9 11 calls are always restricted (except in CPC-AIVB Version 6.00 only). Local calls (office code dialing) are allowed. 2 l-800 calls are allowed. 911 calls are always allowed (Version 6.0 or higher). Inbound trunk calls to all phones can be answered and/or transferred. Full restriction of international calls. Full restriction of operator calls (old dialing plan). Selectable restriction of operator calls (new NANP dialing plan). Selectable restriction of speed dial numbers. Selectable restriction of Nil codes (211-811). Restriction of up to 10 three-digit office codes (new NANP dialing plan). Restriction of up to 50 seven-digit numbers. Inter-digit timing is set to 6 seconds. 9 11 calls are always allowed (Version 6.0 or higher). 3 Full restriction of operator calls (old dialing plan). Selectable restriction of operator calls (new NANP dialing plan). Selectable restriction of international calls (defaulted to full restriction). Selectable restriction of Nil codes (211-811). Selectable restriction of speed dial numbers. Restriction of up to 50 seven-digit numbers. Trunk calls can be answered and transferred. Defaulted to full restriction of area-code dialing. Defaulted to full restriction of office-code dialing.. Inter-digit timing is set to 6 seconds. Identical to TRS type 3, except all office codes are allowed by default. 4 l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Page 7-2 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Sectton 400~Programming Utapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) TRS Type Characteristics Programmable TRS type; all area codes and office codes are allowed by 5 default. Identical to TRS type 5. 6 l l 7 Notes l Cannot restrict any dialing. New NANP Vialing Plan. Beginning with CPC-AlID3 Version 6.0, changes to the North American Numbering Plan (NANP) are supported. These changes affect TRS parameters, which is explained in the affected program addresses in this chapter. Table 7-2. NANP changes (Change Old Numbering Plan New NANP Plan (Versions prior to 6.0) (Version 6.0 or higher) 1Cey : N = digits 2-9 P = digits O-l X = digits O-9’ CC = Country Code digits 1 - 199 1Irea Code/Exchange Format NPX-NNX-XXXX 1YOU Calls w/in Same Area I-NNX-XXXX CMe Interexchange Carrier (IXC) lOXXX0 Iielection Oll+CC+upto9digits Intemational Calls 9‘11 Emergency Calls CIperator Calls L.ocal Calls DBS-70-400 NXX-NXX-XXXX I-NXX-NXX-XXXX 101xxxx0 011 +CC+upto 12digits Always restricted (except in Version Can be restricted 6.00 only) for TRS types 0 and 1. Always allowed for TRS types 2-6. Selectable restriction for TRS types Selectable restriction on individual 3-6; allowed by default if intemat’l extensions, as long as the extension uses trunks with TRS types 2-6. calls are allowed system-wide. Always restricted for TRS types O-2. Always restricted for TRS types 0 and 1. Always allowed for TRS type 7. Always allowed for TRS type 7. 1) Check Office Code Table. 1) Check Office Code Table. 2) Check new Offtce Code Restric2) Check 7-Digit Toll Restriction. tion Table (up to 10 entries). 3) Check Add/Delete Digits. 3) Check 7-Digit Toll Restriction.’ 4) Check Add/Delete Digits. DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 7-3 Old Numbering Plan New NANP Plan Change (Versions prior to 6.0) (Version 6.0 or higher) Long-Distance Calls 1) Check Special Area/Office Codes. 1) Check Special Area/Office Codes. 2) Check Area Code Table. 2) Check Area Code Table. 3) Check Add/Delete Digits. 3) Check new Off’ce Code Restriction Table (up to 10 entries). 4) Check Add/Delete Digits. Allowed or restricted system-wide Selectable restriction on extensions by TRS type assigned to trunk. if using trunks with TRS types 3-6. Selectable restriction on dialed numbers based on Country Code. International Calls Page 7-4 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) International Calling For TRS Types 3-6 Software Version: All Versions Address: FR I# 1# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to allow or deny international calls on trunks that are assigned TRS types 3-6. If the DBS is set to use the new NANP dialing plan (available with CPC-A Version 4.0 or higher, and CPC-AII/B Version 6.0 or higher), this address determines whether the DBS will check the Country Code Table for any restrictions on the dialed number. Lf the DBS uses the old dialing plan, this address determines whether international calling is allowed or denied, regardless of the country code. In both cases, this address applies only to those trunks that are assigned TRS types 3-6. (International calls are always restricted for TRS types 1 and 2 -and always allowed for TRS type 7.) Programming I FF7 I# I# (0 or l)# f Old Dialing Plan: (dl versions) New NANP Dialing Plan: (CPC-A 4.0 or higher: CPC-AH/B 6.0 or higher) O=Deny international calls. l=Allow international calls. O=Check Country Code Table for restrictions. l=Allow international calls. Related Programming Dialing Plan Switch: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)# Country Code Table: F’F7 l# 20# (Table)# (Code)# Override Toll Restriction with SSD Numbers: FFl 2# l# 4# (SSD)# System Installation Area Code: FFl 2# l# 18# (0 or l)# Notes Restkting International Calls On Individual Extensions. E the new NANP dialing plan is used, individual extensions can be set to allow/restrict international calls based on the Country Code Table (see FM l# 20#). Including “011” in Office Code Tables for International Calling. Lf international calls are permitted, “011” should be permitted in Office Code Tables for TRS Types 3-6 (see FF7 3#). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 7-5 Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Section 400~Programming DTMF Signaling During Incoming Calls For TRS Types O-6 Software Version: All Versions Address: FFi’ l# 2# (0 or l)# Description This address determines if DTMF signaling can be sent to the CO after an extension picks up an incoming trunk call. If an extension receives a call on a trunk assigned to TRS type O-6, the extension user may try to bypass ‘lRS restrictions by dialing an outgoing call while still off-hook. (After the outside caller hangs up, sometimes the CO sends dial tone to the called party if they remain off-hook.) The DBS can block these bypasses by disabling DTMF signaling during incoming calls. If this address is set to “0” (disable DTMF signaling), the user will not be able to dial out while still off-hook from an incoming call -even if they transfer the call to another extension with no TRS restrictions. This address also affects indirect pickup of trunk calls (press a DSS/BLF key to pick up a call ringing on another extension). If this address is set to “O”, the DSS/BLF phone user will also not be able to dial out. Programming FF7 l# 2# (0 or l)# O=Disable DTMF signaling on extensions during incoming calls. kEnable DTMF signaling on extensions during incoming calls. Notes No Interaction With TRS Type 7. This address does not affect trunks assigned to TRS type 7, which allows all outbound dialing. No DSSIBLF Interaction With TRS Type 0. DSS/BLF keys cannot be used to pick up calls on trunks assigned TRS type 0. Because of this built-in restriction, the DTMF Signaling setting does not apply. No Interaction With FLASH Key. If an extension user attempts to dial out by pressing the FLASH key during an incoming trunk call, the DBS will check for TRS restrictions, regardless of the DTMF Signaling setting. Page 7-6 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com . DBS-?O-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Maximum Dialed Digits For TRS Types 3-6 Software Version: Ail Versions Address: FF7 I# 3# (l-15)# Description The maximum number of dialed digits on trunks assigned TRS types 3-6 can be set from 15 to 29. By default, the maximum number is unlimited. Programming FF7 l# 3# (l-15)# f Maximum Number of Dialed Digits Allowed Note: The default setting is ** (unlimited). To change the setting to a limited number of digits, enter l- 15 (see table below for values). To revert tothe ** default, press FF7 l# 3# CONF. Table 7-3. Maximum number of dialed digits for TRS types 3-6 DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 7-7 Section 400-Programming Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) 3-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6 Software Version: All Versions Address: FR 1# (4-11)# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to to allow or deny the dialing of 211-911 numbers on trunks that are assigned TRS types 2-6. By default, all of these numbers are allowed. If the DBS is set to use the nm NANP dialing plan (available only with CPCAll/B Version 6.0 or higher), “911” is always allowed for T.RS types 2-6, regardless of the setting here. Programming FF7 yll)” (0 7 I)# . Special Numbers: O=A.lhv dialing. 4=211 l=Deny dialing. 5=311 6=411 7=511 8=611 9=711 .lO=8 l’l 11=911 NOTE: Beginning with CPC-AIL/B Version 6.03, 1 l# (“911”) is disabled if the new NANP dialing plan is used, so that 911 calls cannot be restricted. Related Programming Dialing Plan Switch: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)# Page 7-8 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 \ Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DES-70-400 secuon 4uu-rruyrarnrrw~y 7-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6 Software Version: All Versions Address: FR It (12-l 6)# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to determine whether the DBS will check dialed 7-digit numbers against the “Special ‘I-Digit Table” (see FF7 6#). By default, the DBS will check the dialed number against the table; if it finds a match, the call will be denied, regardless of the area code. Programming I FF7 1# (12916)# (0 or l)# ‘IRS Types: 12=TRS type 2 13=TRS type 3 1GTRS type 4 15=TRS type 5 16=TRS tvDe 6 O=Does nbt check the 7-digit table. l=Checks the 7-digit table. Related Programming Special 7-Digit Table For TRS Types 2-6: FF7 6# (l-50)# (7-digitNo.)# Notes An#ysis of Final Digits. 7-digit toll restriction considers the last 7 digits dialed. This is so that area codes that are normally permitted, can be denied when dialed with certain telephone numbers (such as 800-976-xXxX numbers). DES-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 7-9 Dialing Plan Switch Sofhnrare Version: CPC-A Version 4.0 or higher; CPC-All/B Version 6.0 or higher Address: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)# Description This address allows you to choose between the new North American Numbering Plan (NANP) and the old dialing plan. By default, the old dialing plan is used. Selecting the new NANP dialing plan, in addition to supporting public network changes in dialing formats, also provides greater flexibility for “exceptions to the rule” -- such as applying TRS restrictions to individual extensions, area codes, office codes, and counay codes. Specific differences between the old and new dialing plans are listed in the table below. Some of the FF7 addresses in this chapter apply only to the new NANP dialing plan; other FF7 addresses apply to both dialing plans, but the value of their settings differs depending on the dialing plan selected. These differences are noted in the explanation for each affected address. Programming FF7 1# 17# (0 or l)# f O=Old dialing plan i=New NANP dialing plan Table 7-4. Differences between old and new dialing plans Subject Office Codes (Exchanges) Long-Distance Calls Equal Access Code Format International Numbers Old Plan NNX-XXXX NO/lx-NNX-XXXX 10xXx 9 digits in length (N=digits 2 thru 9 I New (NANP) Plan Nxx-XxXx Nxx-Nxx-XxXx 1OlXXXX 12 digits in length X=digits 0 thru 9) Related Programming All Toll Restriction Addresses (FF7) Page 7-l 0 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Operator Access Software Version: CPC-A Version 4.0 or higher; CPC-All/B Version 6.0 or higher Address: FR 1# 18# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)# Description This Operator Access switch works only if the DBS system is set to use the new NAM dialing plan (FF7 l# 17# l#). Also, this switch applies only to TRS types 2-6 (TRS types 0 and 1 do not allow outbound dialing; TRS type 7 allows all dialing). Use this address to block extension(s) from being able to access a trunk and dialing “O”, “OO”, “lOXXXO”, or “1OlXXXXO” to reach an operator. This prevents a user from being able to make a restricted phone call by asking the operator to place the call for him. Programming I FF7 I# 18# (l-144)# (0 or l)# Extension Port O=Deny operator calls. l=Allow operator calls. Related Programming Dialing Plan Switch: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)# Notes Timeout for Operator Calls. If this switch is set to “Deny” (default) and an extension user accesses a trunk and dials the operator, the system will wait 6 seconds before automatically disconnecting the call. However, if the user dials additional digits within the 6 seconds, the DBS will check other switches such as %ternational Calling On Extensions”, “7-Digit Toll Restriction”, etc., to allow or deny the call. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 7-l 1 Section 400-Programming Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) International Calling on Extensions Software Version: CPC-A Version 4.0 or higher; CPC-All/B Version 6.0 or higher Address: FF7 1# 19# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)# Description This address applies only to systems programmed to use the new NANP dialing plan (FF7 l# 17# l#). Also, this switch applies only to TRS types 3-6 (TRS types O-2 do not allow international dialing; TRS type 7 allows all dialing). Use this address to allow or deny international calling on individual extension(s) that are “exceptions to the rule”. l l When an extension attempts an overseas call (trunk access + 01 or 011) on a trunk assigned TRS type 3-6, the system checks the setting in this address (default=deny call). However, if this address is set to “l”, the system checks the “International Calling For TRS Types 3-6” (FF7 l# l#) to see if the dialed country code should be checked against the Country Code Table (FF7 l# 20#) before allowing the call. If so, and if the dialed country code is included in the table, the call is allowed. Programming I FF7 1# 19# (1;;44)# (0 “i 1)s Extension Port I O=Deny call. l=Check the International Calls Switch (FF7 l# l#) Related Programming International C&rig For TRS Types 3-6: FF7 l# l# (0 or l)# Dialing Plan Switch: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)# Country Code Table: FF7 l# 20# (Table)# (Code)# Page 7-12 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Section 400-Programming Country Code Table Software Version: CPC-A Version 4.0 or higher; CPC-All/B Version 6.0 or higher Address: FF7 1# 20# (Table)# (Code)# Description This address applies only to systems programmed to use the new NANP dialing plan (FF7 l# 17# l#). Also, this switch applies only to TRS types 3-6 (TRS types O-2 do not allow international dialing: TRS type 7 allows all dialing). In this address, the DBS provides a Country Code Table of up to 10 allowable country code entries for placing international calls. Each entry can be 1 to 3 digits long. Programming FF7 l# 20# (l{O)# (0-y Table Entry Country Code Entry Related Programming International Calling For TRS Types 3-6: FF7 l# l# (0 or l)# Dialing Plan Switch: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)# International Calling on Extensions: FF7 l# 19# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)# Notes Country Code Usage. Country codes are used as follows: l l l When a phone user accesses a trunk assigned TRS type 3-6 and then dials 01 or 0 11, the system first checks the international calling restriction set for the extension (in FF7 l# 19#). If the switch is enabled, the DBS then checks the international calling restriction set for the system (in FF7 l# l#), which determines if the Country Code Table is checked before an international call is processed. If it is checked, the call will be allowed only if the dialed country code appears in the Table. Short Country Codes. When country codes of less than 3 digits are entered, the system will allow any country code that begins with that number or numbers. For example, an entry of “9” allows all two- and three-digit country codes beginning with “9.” Likewise, an entry of “26” allows all three-digit country codes beginning with “26.” Digit Restriction. The system will not accept country codes that begin with “1” (this is reserved for U.S. calls). DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 7-13 Lnaprer 1. I 011 nesrrlcnon (i-i- /I becnon 4oo-rrogramming Equal Access Code Format Software Version: CPC-A Version 4.0 or higher; CPC-All/B Version 6.0 or higher Address: FF7 1# 21# (0 or l)# Description This address determines whether the old CIC (Carrier Identification Code) format can still be dialed to reach a preferred lXC (interexchange carrier). l l Old dialing plan format is 10 XXX (where “XXX” is a 3-digit CIC). New NANP (North American Numbering Plan) format is 101 XXXX (where “XXXX” is a 4-digit UC). In some areas, the public network is providing a transitional period during which both formats are recognized, until the new NANP dialing plan takes effect. This address accommodates the transitional period. NOTE: This address is effective only if the new NANP Dialing Plan is selected in FF7 l# 17#. lf the old dialing plan is selected, the new CIC format (101 XXXX) will not be recognized by the DBS. Programming FF7 1# 21# (0 or l)# $ O=Old format (10 XXX) can still be used. l=New format only (101 XXXX). . Related Programming Dialing Plan Switch: IT7 l# 17# (0 or l)# Page 7-l 4 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Section 400-Programming Office Code Restriction Table For TRS Types 2-6 Software Version: CPC-A Version 4.0 or higher; CPC-All/B Version 6.0 or higher Address: FF7 l# 22# (l-lO)# (OOO-999)# Description This address applies only to DBS systems set for the new NANP dialing plan (FF7 l# 17# l#). The Office Code Restriction Table allows up to 10 office codes (“exchanges”) to be restricted system-wide for all trunks assigned TRS types 2-6. The DBS will check this table before checking the individual office codes assigned to each TRS type in FF7 3#. NOTE: These office codes are not tied to any area codes. Therefore, whenever one of these office codes is dialed, it is restricted regardless of the area code. Applications for this feature include 555 and 976 calls. Programming 1 I FF7 l# 22# (1-l 0)# (OOO-999)# t Office Code Entry No. f Office Code To Be Restricted Related Programming Dialing Plan Switch: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 , Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 7-l 5 ’ Section 400-Programming Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 Software Version: All Versions Address: FF7 2# (316)# (OOO-999)# (0 or I)# Description Use this address to set area code dialing restrictions based on the TRS type assigned to a trunk. Callers accessing a trunk assigned to TRS types 3-6 are allowed or denied access to specific area codes according to the settings in this address. Programming F F 7 2# (316)# (OOO-999)# ( 0 o r l)# TRS Type (3-6) t Area Code f O=Allowdialing. l=Deny dialing. Defaults -TRS Types 3 and 4: 1 (Deny) TRS Types 5 and 6: 0 (Allow) Related Programming System Installation Area Code: FFl 2# l# 18# (0 or l)# Day TRS Types O-7 for Trunks: FF7 7# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0-7)# Night TRS Types O-7 for Trunks: FM 8# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0-7)# Page 7-16 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Section 400-Programming Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 Software Version: All Versions Address: FF7 3## (3-6)# (OOO-999)# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to allow or deny individual office code(s) for local calls based on the TRS type assigned to the trunk. Programming FF7 3# (316)# (0001999)# (0 or l)# /( TRS Type (3-6) f Office Code t O=Allow dialing. 1 =Deny dialing. Defaults -TRS Type 3: 1 (Deny) TRS Types 4,5 and 6: 0 (Allow) Related Programming System Installation Area Code: FFl 2# l# 18# (0 or l)# Notes Office Code Tables. While this address is used for local calls, the Office Code Restriction Table address (FF7 l# 21#) is used for local and longdistance calls. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 7-17 Section 400-Programming Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Special Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 Software Version: All Versions Address: FF7 4# (l-4)# (OOO-999)# Description Use this address to enter up to four area codes that will be tied to ranges of office codes in the next address (FF7 5#). This allows you to set up special area/office code combinations that are “exceptions to the rule” -- for example, restricting calls to (800)976-xxxx numbers, while allowing (800) 977-xXxX numbers. These special area/office code combinations will apply to TRS types 3-6. Programming To enter a special area code . . . FF7 4## y-4), (OOOf399)# Special Area Code Entry No. Special Area Code To clear a special area code . . . FF7 4## (114)# (0001999)# CONF ON/OFF I f. Special Area Code Number (l-4) f Special Area Code Related Programming Special Office Code Table for TRS Types 3-6: F’F7 5# (l-4)# (000-999)# (0 or l)# Page 7-l 8 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 - - Sdftware Version: All Versions Address: FF7 5## (l-4)# (000-999)# (0 or l)# Description Each of the four special area codes entered in the previous address (FF7 4##) can be tied with one or more special offke codes using this address. Each special area code can be matched to office codes (000-999). And. each office code can be individually allowed or denied. Typically. “976”, “555” or other office codes representing pay-for-call services are entered as special office codes. These special area/office code combinations will apply to TRS types 3-6. NOTE: If at a later date you wish to reset all the special office codes assigned to a special area code, use the Global Copy address (FF7 9# 13- 16#) to do it all at once, instead of resetting each individual office code here. Programming I FF7 5# (l-4)# (000-999)# (0 or l)# A f t I Special Area Code Entry No. (see FF7 4## address) Special Office Code (an unlimited number of office codes can be ,assigned to each Special Area Code) O=Allow dialing. l=Deny dialing. Defaults -Special Area Codes 1 and 2: 1 (Deny) Special Area Codes 3 and 4: 0 (Allow) Related Programming Special Area Code Table for TRS Types 3-6: FF7 4# (1-4)# (000-999% Special Office Code Table for TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy): FF7 9# (13-16)# (0 or l># DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 7-19 Section 400-Programming Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Special ‘T-Digit Table For TRS Types 2-6 Software Version: All Versions Address: FF7 6# (l-50)# (0000000-9999999)# Description Use this program to set up a table of up to 50 restricted 7-digit numbers for trunks assigned TRS types 2-6. These 7-digit numbers are restricted for all area codes. The “l-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6” address (FF7 l# 12-16#) determines whether this table is checked or not. Programming To assign a special 7-digit number . . . F F 7 6# (I-50)# (0000000-9999999)# 4 I t Entry No. of Special 7-Digit Number 7-D& Number To clear a special 7-digit number . . . F F 7 6# (MO)# ,CONF O N / O F F f Entry l\io. of Special 7-Digit Number Related Programming 7-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6: FF7 l# (12-16)# (0 or l)# Page 7-20 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 7. toll Restriction (FF7) Section 400-Programming Day TRS Types O-7 for Trunks Software Version: All Versions Address: FF7 7# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (017)# Description Use this program to assign TRS types to the trunks on an individual extension. The assigned TRS type will apply to the trunk during “Day” mode. For a review of TRS types, see “An Overview of Toll Restrictions” on page 7-2. Programming I FF7 7# (11144)# (l-33 or l-65)# (017)# f Extension Port f Trunk t TRS Type O-7 Default: 7 (all calls allowed) Note: Enter “65” (for CPC-AIL/B) or “33” (for CPC-A) to apply all trunks to the TRS type. Related Programming Toll Restriction: all FF7 addresses DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 7-21 Night TRS Types O-7 for Trunks So-are Version: All Versions Address: FF7 8# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (O-7)# Description Use this program to assign TRS types to the trunks on an individual extension. These TRS types will apply when the system is in “Night” and “Night 2” mode. For a review of TRS types, see “An Overview of Toll Restrictions” on page 7-2. Programming FF7 8# (I-144)# (l-33 or l-65)# (017)# f Extension Tort f Trunk t TRS Type O-7 Default: 7 (all calls allowed) Note: Enter “65” (for CPC-AII/B) or “33” (for CPC-A) to apply all trunks to the TRS type. Related Programming Automatic Night Mode Start Time: FFl 3# l# HHMM# Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time: FFl 3# 30# HHMM# Toll Restriction: all F’F7 addresses Page 7-22 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy) Software Version: All Versions A d d r e s s : FR 9# (l-4)# ( 0 o r l)# Description Use this address to allow or deny all area codes for TRS types 3-h. Programming FF7 9# (l-4)# (0 or I)# TRS Types: l=Type 3 2=Type 4 3=Type 5 4=Type 6 I 4 O=Allow dialins. 1 =Deny dialing. Defaults -TRS Types 3 and 4: 1 (Deny) TRS Types 5 and 6: 0 (Allow) Related Programming Area Code Table for TRS Types 3-h: FF7 2# (3-6)# KKKJ-939)# (0 or li# DBS-70-400 DBS Manuai - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 7-23 Section 400-Programming Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy) Software Version: All Versions Address: FF7 9# (58)# (0 or l)# Description Programming Use this address to allow or deny all office codes for TRS types 3-6. 1 1 FF7 9# (58)# (0 or l)# f TRS Types: 5=Type 3 6=Type 4 7=Type 5 8=Type 6 O=Aliow dialing. l=Deny dialing. Defaults -TRS Type 3: 1 (Deny) TRS Types 4,5 and 6: 0 (Allow) Related Programming Office Code Table for TRS Types 3-6: FF7 3# (3-6)# (000-999)# (0 or l)# Page 7-24 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Section 400-Programming Area & Office Code Table for TRS Types 3-6 (Global COPY) Software Version: All Versions Address: FR 9# (9~12)# (0 or l)## Description Use this address to allow or deny all area codes Ir[Ltd office codes for TRS types 3-6. Programming FF7 9# (9~12)# (0 or I)# TRS Types: 9=Type 3 lO=Type 4 ll=Type 5 12=Type 6 O=Allow dialing. l=Deny dialing. Defaults -TRS Type 3: 1 (Deny) TRS Type 4: 1 (Deny) for A/C* and 0 (Allow) for O/Cs TRS Types 5 and 6: 0 (Allqw) 1 Related Programming Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6: FF7 2# (3-6)# (000-999)# (0 or l)# Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6: FF7 3# (3-6)# (000-999)# (0 or l)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 7-25 Section 400-Programming Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7) Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global COPY) Software Version: -AlI Versions Address: FF7 9# (13016)# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to allow or deny the Special Area/Office Code combinations set in FF7 4# and 5#. Special Office Code Table (Global Copy) resets all office codes assigned to a Special Area Code at the same time (instead of resetting the office codes individually in FF7 5#). Special area/office code combinations apply to TRS types 3-6. Programming FF7 9# (13.16)# (0 or l)# Special Area Code Entry Nos: 13=Special Area Code 1 14=Special Area Code 2 15=Special Area Code 3 ’ 16=Special Area Code 4 O=Allow l=Deny Defaults: Special A/Cs 1 and 2: 1 (Deny) Special A/Cs 3 and 4: 0 (Allow) Related Programming Special Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6: FF7 4# (l-4)# (000-999)# Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6: FF7 5# (l-4)# (000-999)# (0 or l)# Page 7-26 DBS Manual - issued 8/i/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) Use the FF8 addresses in this chapter to set up Least Cost Routing (LCR). This chapter covers the following addresses: Topic An Overview of Least Cost Routing Before Programming LCR I LCR Setup Activating LCR LCR Call Processing Using LCR With a PBX System 1 FF8 I# (Tab1eNo.M (AreaCode)# (0 or l)# 1 LCR Area Codes FF8 2# (TableNo.)# (OfficeCode)# (0 or l)# I LCR Office Codes FF8 3# (EntryNo.)# (AreaCodeF ( Special LCR Area Codes FF8 4# (Ent.ryNo.)# (Tab1eNo.W (OfficeCodeM Special LCR Off ice Code Tables (0 or I)# FF8 Address FF8 5# (TableNo.)# (Position)# (TrunkGroupW Time Priority Route Tables FF8 6# (TrunkGroup)# (Position)# (Trunk)# LCR Trunk Groups LCR Delete Tables LCR Add Tables FF8 7# (TrunkGroup)# (DigitshY FF8 8# (TrunkGroup)# (Digits)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 8-2 8-2 8-4 8-4 8-5 18-6 I 18-7 1 18-8 1 8-9 8-10 8-12 8-13 8-14 Page 8-l An Overview of Least Cost Routing With the Least Cost Routing (LCR) feature, you can program the DBS system to automatically route outgoing calls to the least expensive carrier. Before Programming LCR l l l LCR SetUp Verify the carrier for each CO trunk in the system, and which carriers provide the best rates at different times of the day or weekend -- check the site’s phone bills for call history. Cut Strap S 1 on the CPC card. See Section 300-Installation for instructions. Enable LCR for the system in FFl 2# l# 3# (set to “1”). Use FF8 addresses to set up LCR in the following logical order: Step 1: Build LCR Trunk Groups FF8 6# (TrunkGroup)# (Position)# (Trunk)# Assign trunks to each group, prioritizing the trunks by assigning them to positions within the group (trunk in position 1 will be tried first, then trunk in position 2, etc.). To prevent glare, assign the trunks in descending order by port number (from highest to lowest -- e.g., trunk port 7 in the first position, trunk port 6 in the second position, etc.). Maximum 8 trunk groups. Maximum 8 positions (trunks) per group. ’ Example: Create three trunk groups -- Trunk Group 1 for trunks that will be used for local calls; Trunk Group 2 for long-distance trunks; and Trunk Group 3 for backup trunks. Step 2: Build Time Priority Route Tables FF8 5# (TableNo.)# (Position)# (TrunkGroup)# Assign trunk groups to positions within each Time Priority Route Table, which has six time-of-day periods (see Table 8-1, next page). These time periods are fixed and can’t be changed. Each time period has eight different positions for trunk groups. Maximum 15 Time Priority Route Tables. Example: Create two Time Priority Route Tables -- Table 1 for longdistance calls; Table 2 for local calls. l l Page 8-2 For Table 1 (long-distance), assign Trunk Group 2 to positions I, 9, 17,25,33 and 41, so that these trunks will be tried fist in all time periods for long-distance calls. In positions 2, 10, 18,26, 34 and 42, assign Trunk Group 3 (backup). For Table 2 (local), assign Trunk Group 1 to positions 1,9, 17, 25,33 and 41, so that these trunks will be tried first in all time periods for local calls. In positions 2, 10, 18,26,34 and 42, assign Trunk Group 3 (backup). DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-7d-400 ’ Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) Section 400-Programming Table 8-1. Time Priority Route Table format Fixed Time Periods LCR Trunk Group Position Step 3: Set Up LCR for Long-Distance Dialing FF8 1# (TableNo.)# (AreaCode)# (Add/Remove)# Input all area codes into a Time Priority Route Table. Maximum 1,000 area codes (000-999) per Table. All area codes you want routed by LCR must be input into a Time priority Route Table. If you need to set up special area/ office code combinations as “exceptions to the rule”, use Step 5 below. Example: Assign area codes you want LCR-routed to Table 1 (longdistance). If a dialed area code is not assigned to a Time Priority Route Table, it will be routed to pooled trunk group “9”. Step 4: Set Up LCR for Local Dialing FF8 2# (TableNo.)# (OfficeCode)# (Add/Remove)# Every office code (exchange) to follow LCR must be input, one at a time, to a Time Priority Route Table. Maximum 1,000 office codes (000-999) per Table. Example: Assign all office codes in the site’s local area to Table 2 (local). If a local office code is not included in Table 2, it will be routed to trunk group “9” when dialed. Step 5: Set Up “Exceptions To The Rule” (Area/Office Code Combinations) FF8 3# (EntryNo.)# (AreaCode)# FF8 4# (EntryNo.)# (TableNo.)# (Office Code)# (Add/Remove)# If there are any special area/office code combinations you want routed to different trunks, input these combinations here. Example: Assign 7 14-242 to Table 1 (for calls to 7 14/242-1000) Assign 714-243 to Table 3 (for calls to 7 14/243-1000) l l DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 8-3 Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) Section 400-Programming Step 6: Set Up Add/Delete Digits FF8 7# (TrunkGroup)# (DeleteDigits)# FF8 8# (TrunkGroup)# (AddDigits)# The DBS will automatically outpulse Add Digits, or prevent Delete Digits from being outpulsed, at the beginning of all phone numbers dialed on trunks in the assigned group. The Add/Delete Digits are associated with LCR trunk groups, not with the dialed phone number or the time of day. Example: When the DBS is behind a PBX, assign “g-PAUSE” (press the REDIAL key to insert the pause) so that the PBX will be automatically accessed whenever a user dials out. Activating LCR l l l Although the FF8 addresses provide for LCR setup, you must activate LCR in the “LCR Access” system address, FFl 2# l# 3# l#. You can still build a Pooled Trunk Group “9” in FF2 (Trunk)# 3#, which the DBS will access if all LCR trunks are busy. Individual extensions can be forced to use LCR in FF3 (ExtPort)# 4#. LCR Call Processing LCR processes calls as follows: 1. An extension user dials an outgoing phone nurnber. If 0,411,555,911, or 800 is dialed, the DBS will automatically drop out of LCR and use pooled trunk group “9” (this trunk group is built in FF2 Trunk# 3#). This occurs to make sure these numbers are dialed without any modification (e.g., LCR’s Add/Delete Digits Tables). l 2. The DBS determines which Time Priority Route Table to use for the call, based on the area code and/or office code dialed. If the number is not assigned to a Table, LCR processing terminates and the call is routed to pooled trunk group “9”. l 3. The DBS will search all trunks in the Time Priority Route Table’s assigned trunk groups, until an available trunk is found. l l Page 8-4 If all trunks in the first trunk group are busy, the DBS will search it again. If all the trunks are still busy, the user will hear a “beep-beep” tone as LCR proceeds to the next trunk group. Each trunk group is searched twice. If no trunks are available in any trunk group (whether LCR or not), the user (after hearing busy tone) can dial “2” to have the DBS call backDBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) Section 400-Programming when a trunk becomes available. When the DBS recalls, the user picks up the handset and the DBS will automatically redial the number. 4. When a trunk is found, digits are added to or deleted from the phone number, according to the Add or Delete digits assigned to the trunk group. . Using LCR With a PBX System When the DBS is behind a PBX. two “9”s have to be dialed to access an outside line -- once to access the PBX, and again to access a trunk line. In these cases, LCR is often used to add the “9”s automatically (via the Add Digits Table) so the user doesn’t have to dial them each time. . Ln earlier CPC versions (CPC-A lower than 3.21; CPC-B lower than 2.1 l), some office codes -- specifically, 941,955,991, and 980 .-- shotlld not be routed through LCR in PBX systems. Because of the “9” dialing requirement, and because the DBS automatically drops out of LCR if 0,411,555, 911 or 800 is dialed, the DBS may interpret these special numbers as office codes instead. For example, if “9-9 11” is dialed to access a trunk and make an emergency call, LCR may assume office code 991 was dialed instead. Therefore, do not assign office codes 941,955,991 or 980 to Time [email protected] Route Tables if you have an earlier CPC-A or CPC-B version. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 DBS-70-400 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 8-5 Section 400-Programming Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) LCR Area Codes Software Version: All Versions Address: FF8 1# (TableNo.)# (AreaCode)# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to route all calls to a certain area code through LCR. This address associates the area code with a Time Priority Route Table, which tells the DBS which trunk group to route the call to, based on the time of day and weekend when the area code is dialed. To use different Time Priority Route Tables for the same area code (based on the office code dialed), do not enter the area code here -- instead, use the Special LCR Area/Office Codes addresses (FF8 3# and 4#). If a dialed area code is not assigned to a Time Priority Route Table, the call will be routed to pooled trunk group “9” (built in FF2 Trunks 3#). Programming I I FF8 l# (1=15)# (000-999)# (0 or l)# f Time Priority Route Table No. t Area Code t O=Remove from table. l=Add to table. Related Programming Time Priority Route Tables: FF8 5# (Table)# (Position)# (TrunkGrp)# Notes FLASH Key Interaction. Once a trunk is accessed through LCR, the FLASH key cannot be used to get a second dial tone. The flash operation is disabled to prevent second calls from being placed over inappropriate routes. Special Numbers Not Processed By LCR. If the user dials 0,411,555,9 11, or 800, the DBS will automatically terminate LCR processing and route the call to pooled trunk group “9” (this trunk group is built in FF2 Trunk# 3#). This occurs so that these numbers are dialed without modification (e.g., preventing LCR Add digits from being dialed as a prefix to the number). i Page 8-6 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com \ ‘., DBS-70-400 Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) Section 400-Programming LCR Office Codes Software Version: All Versions Address: FF8 2# (TableNo.)# (OfficeCode)# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to route all calls to a certain office code (exchange) through LCR. This address associates an exchange with a Time Priority Route Table, which tells the DBS which trunk group to route the call to, based on the time of day and weekend when the exchange is dialed. To use different Time Priority Route Tables for different exchanges within the same area code, do not enter the exchanges here -- instead, use the Special LCR Area/Office Codes addresses (FFS 3# and 4#). If a dialed exchange is not assigned to a Time Priority Route Table, the call will be routed to pooled trunk group “9” (built in FF2 Trunk++ 3#). Programming I FF8 2# (1115)# (OOO-999)# (0 or I)# f Time Priority Route Table No. t Office Code (Exchange) t O=Remove from table. l=Add to table. Related Programming Time Priority Route Tables: FF8 5# (Table)# (Position)++ (TrunkGrp)# Notes FLASH Key Interaction. Once a trunk is accessed through LCR, the FLASH key cannot be used to get second dial tone. The flash operation is disabled to prevent second calls from being placed over inappropriate routes. Special Numbers Not Processed By LCR. If the user dials 0,4 11,555,9 11 or 800, the DBS will automatically terminate LCR processing and route the call to pooled trunk group ‘9” (this trunk group is built in FK! Tnm.k# 3#). This occurs so that these numbers are dialed without modification (e.g., preventing‘LCR Add digits from being dialed as a prefix to the number). LCR Office Code Restriction in PBX Systems. With CPC-A versions lower than 3.21, and CPC-B versions lower than 2.11, office codes 941,955,991, and 980 should not be routed through LCR if the DBS is behind a PBX system. Because of the ‘9” dialing requirement to access the PBX and a trunk line, and because the DBS will automatically drop out of LCR processing if special numbers 0.411.555.9 11, or 800 are dialed, the DBS may interpret the special numbers as office codes instead (for example, reading a “9-911” emergency call as a “991” office code). . DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 8-7 Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) Section 400-Programming Special LCR Area Codes Software Version: All Versions Address: FF8 3## (EntryNo.)# (AreaCode)# Description Use this address to assign up to four special area codes for LCR routing. This address is used in conjunction with the next address -- “Special LCR Office Codes” (FF8 4#) -- to assign different office codes within the same area code to different Time Priority Route Tables. If an area code is assigned here, the DBS will wait until the next three digits (representing the office code) are dialed, before routing the call. Programming To assign a Special LCR Area Code . . . FF8 3# (I?# (00799)# Special Area Code Entry No. Area Code To clear a Special LCR Area Code . . . FF8 3# (114)# CONF ON/OFF f Special Area Code Entry No. Related Programming Time Priority Route Tables: FF8 5# (Table)## (Position)# (TrunkGrp)# Special LCR Office Codes: FF8 4## (EntryNo.)# (Table)# (GfficeCode)# (0 or l)# Notes FLASH Key Interaction. Once a trunk is accessed through LCR, the FLASH key cannot be used to get second dial tone. The flash operation is disabled to prevent second calls from being placed over inappropriate routes. Special Numbers Not Processed By LCR. If the user dials 0,411,555,911, or 800, the DBS will automatically terminate LCR processing and route the call to pooled trunk group “9” (this trunk group is built in FF2 Trunk#+ 3#). This occurs so that these numbers are dialed without modification (e.g., preventing LCR Add digits from being dialed as a prefix to the number). DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Page 8-8 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) Special LCR Office Code Tables Software Version: All Versions Address: FF8 4## (EntryNo.)# (TableNo.)# (OfficeCode)# (0 or l)# Description Use this address to assign office codes to a special area code for LCR routing. This address is used in conjunction with the previous address -- “Special LCR Area Codes” (FFS 4#) -- to assign different office codes within the same area code to different Time Priority Route Tables (instead of using the same Time Priority Route Table for all calls to that area code). If a special area/office code combination is dialed, the DBS will wait until both the area code and office code is dialed before routing the call. Programming To assign a Special LCR Office Code . . . FF8 4# (l-4)# (l-15)# (000-999)# (0 or l)# /f Special Area Code Entry No. + lime Priority f Office Code Route Table No. f O=Remove from table. l=Add to table. Related Programming Time Priority Route Tables: FF8 5# (Table)# (Position)# (TrunkGrp)# Special LCR Area Codes: FF8 3# (EntryNo.)# (AreaCode)# Notes FLASH Key Interaction. Once a trunk is accessed through LCR, the FLASH key cannot be used to get second dial tone. The flash operation is disabled to prevent second calls from being placed over inappropriate routes. Special Numbers Not Processed By LCR. If the user dials 0,411,555,911 or 800, the DBS will automatically terminate LCR processing and route the call to pooled trunk group ‘9” (this trunk group is built in FF2 Trunk# 3#). This occurs so that these numbers are dialed without modification (e.g.. preventing LCR Add digits from being dialed as a prefix to the number). LCR Office Code Restiction in PBX Systems. With CPC-A versions lower than 3.21, and CPC-B versions lower than 2.11, office codes 941,955,99 1, and 980 should not be routed through LCR if the DBS is behind a PBX system. Because of the “9” dialing requirement to access the PBX and a trunk line, and because the DBS will automatically drop out of LCR processing if special numbers 0,411,555,9 11 or 800 are dialed, the DBS may interpret the special numbers as office codes instead (for example, reading a “9-9 11” emergency call as a “991” office code). DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95 DBS-70-400 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 8-9 . Section 400-Programming Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) Time Priority .Route Tables Software Version: All Versions Address: FF8 5# (TableNo.)# (Position)# (TrunkGroup)# Description Use this address to assign LCR trunk groups to Time Priority Route Tables. Within each Table, LCR trunk groups are assigned to priority positions in six time-of-day periods (in the format shown in Table 8-2 below). This sets up LCR routing paths for the DBS to follow when outgoing calls are placed. Area codes and/or office codes are also associated with Time Priority Route Tables, using other addresses. When a user dials the area code and/or office code, the DBS will route the call to the trunk groups in the assigned Table based on the time of day/weekend when the call is placed. The first position in each time period is the highest-priority position for that time period. For example, if a call is placed at 8:35 pm, the trunk group assigned to position 25 will be tried first when the call is placed (refer to Table 8-2 below). If the DBS cannot access a trunk in this group, it will search the trunk group assigned to the next-highest position (in the same example, position 26). Table 8-2. Time Priority Route Table format Fixed Time Periods Trunk Group Positions Programming To create Time Priority Route Tables . . . FF8 5#?5)# (li48)# (1-f# Time Priority Route Table No. Position DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Page 8-l 0 Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical Manuals Trunk Group DBS-70-400 ’ Section 400-Programming Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) To reset a position in a Time Priority Route Table to default . . . FF8 5# (1015)# (l-48)# CONF ON/OFF f z Time Pribrity Route Table No. Position Related Programming LCR Access: FFl 2# l# 3# (0 or l)# LCR Area Codes: FF8 l# (TableNo.)# (AreaCode)# (0 or l)# LCR Office Codes: FF8 2# (TableNo.)# (OfficeCode)# (0 or l)# Special LCR Area Codes: FF8 3# (EntryNo.)## (AreaCode)# Special LCR Office Code Tables: FF8 4# (EntryNo.)# (Tab1eNo.w (Office Code)# (0 or l)# LCR Trunk Groups: FF8 4# (TrunkGroup)# (Position)# (Trunk)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 8-11 Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) Section 400-Programming LCR Trunk Groups Software Version: AlI Versions Address: FF8 6# (TrunkGrp)# (Position)# (Trunk)# Description Use this address to build LCR trunk groups, which are assigned to priority positions in Time Priority Route Tables (see FF8 5#). Each LCR trunk group can contain up to 8 trunks. A maximum of 8 different trunk groups can be created. Within each trunk group, the trunks are assigned to positions from the highest priority (position 1) to the lowest (position 8). When a call is routed to the trunk group, LCR will try the trunk in the first position, then the second position, etc. LCR trunk groups are also used for assigning Add or Delete digits as a prefix to dialed numbers routed to the trunk group (see FF8 7# and 8#). Programming FF8 6# (I-8)# (198)# (1164)# fft LCR Trunk Group . Position Trunk Related Programming Time Priority Route Tables: FF8 5# (TableNo.)# (Position)+! (TrunkGrp)# LCR Delete Tables: FF8 7# (TrunkGrp)# (up to 16 digits)# LCR Add Tables: FF8 8# (TrunkGrp)# (up to 16 digits)# Notes Trunk Assignment to LC’R Trunk Groups. A trunk cannot be assigned to more than one position within the same LCR trunk group. However, the same trunk can be assigned to several different groups. Avoiding Glare. Glare occurs when both ends of a trunk are seized at the same time, causing accidental connection between an incoming caller and a DBS extension user preparing to make an outside call. Since incoming calls will access DBS trunks starting from the lowest to the highest trunk number, glare can be avoided by routing outgoing calls to the highest-numbered trunks fast. So, when you build LCR trunk groups, assign trunks in descending order (from highest to lowest trunk number) to trunk group positions in ascending order (from lowest to highest position). For example, assign trunk 7 to position 1; trunk 6 to position 2, trunk 5 to position 3, etc. Page 8-12 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com . DBS-70-400 Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) Section 400-Programming LCR Delete Tables Software Version: All Versions Address: FF8 7# (TrunkGrp)# (DeleteDigits)# Description Use this address to assign Delete Digits to calls routed to an LCR trunk group. Up to 16 digits can be assigned. When an outgoing call is routed to an LCR trunk group, the DBS will check the first digits of the dialed number and, if it finds a matching enny in this table, the DBS will not outpulse the matched digits (only the rest of the dialed digits will be outpulsed). This feature is often used to strip off the “1” before an area code. or “!+AC” before a 7-digit phone number. The deletion will occur only if the outgoing call is routed to a trunk group that has Delete Digits assigned to it. The deletion is not relative to time-of-day or the complete dialed number. Programming To create an LCR Delete Table . . . FF8 7# (l-8)# (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)# LCR Trunk Group $ Deletion Digits (u;; to 16 digits) To clear an LCR Delete Table . . . FF8 7# (l-8)# CONF ON/OFF 4 I LCR Trunk Group Related Programming LCR Trunk Groups.: FF8 6# (TrunkGrp)# (Position)# (Trunk)# Notes [email protected] of Deleted Digits Over Added Digits. If digits are being added and deleted from the same trunk group, the DBS will delete digits first, then add digits. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/1/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 8-13 Section 400-Programming Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8) LCR Add Tables Software Version: All Versions Address: FF8 8## (TrunkGrp)# (AddDigits)# Description Use this address to assign Add Digits to calls routed to an LCR trunk group. Up to 16 digits can be assigned. When an outgoing call is routed to an LCR trunk group with Add Digits, the DBS will add the digits to the beginning of the dialed number when it outpulses the number to the CO. This feature is often used to add CIC or PIC codes to dialed numbers. You can also put “pauses” (by pressing REDIAL key) in the Add Digits. The Add Digits feature is not associated with time-of-day or the dialed number. Programming To create an LCR Add Table . . . FF8 ‘8# (l-8)# (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)# /. LCR Trunk Group t Addition Digits (up to 16 digits) To clear an LCR Add Table . . . Related Programming Outbound DTMF Signal Duration for Auto-Dialed Digits: FF2 (Trunk)# 1% (l-3)# LCR Trunk Groups: FF8 6# (TrunkGrp)b (Position)# (Trunk)# Notes Priority of Deleted Digits Over Added Dig&. If digits are being added and deleted from the same trunk group, the DBS will delete digits first, then add digits. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Page 8-14 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 9. Copy Program Settings (FF9) Use the FF9 program addresses in this chapter to copy settings among trunks, extensions, and FF keys. This chapter covers the following addresses: FF9 Address FF9 l# (Trunk)# (Trunk)# FF9 2# (ExtPort)# (ExtPoft)## FF9 3# (ExtPon)# (ExtP0l-t)~ CBS-70-400 Topic Trunk Copy 1 Extension Copy 1 FF Key Copy DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 9-3 19-4 19-5 Page 9-1 . Page 9-2 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 9. Copy Program Settings (FF9) Trunk Copy Software Version: All Versions Address: FF9 l# (SourceTrunk)# (TargetTrunk)## Description Use this address to copy the attributes of one trunk to another. Copying must be done on a trunk-by-trunk basis. The first trunk entry in this address is the trunk being copiedfrom (the source); the second trunk entry is the trunk being copied to (the m-get). Programming Note: You must enter two pound-signs (#I#) at the end of this address. FF9 1# (li64)1 (l?Y# Trunk Number (Source) Notes DBS-70-400 Trunk Number (Target) Restriction Regarding Private Trunks. This program copies all trunk attributes except the Private Trunk Line attribute. DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 9-3 Chapter 9. Copy Program Settings (FF9) Section 400-Programming Extension Copy Software Version: All Versions Address: FF9 2# (SourceExtPort)# (TargetExtPort)## Description Use this address to copy the attributes of one extension to another. Copying must be done on an extension-by-extension basis. The first extension port entry in this address is the extension being copiedfrom (the source); the second extension entry is the extension being copied to (the target). Programming Note: You must enter two pound-signs (##) at the end of this address. FF9 2# (l=lf4)# ( l - 1 4 4 7 Extension Port (Source) Notes Extension Port Wget) Copying Restrictions. This address copies all extension attributes except the extension number, telephone type, extension lockout code, and EM/24 port number (BLF port setting). Consideration for Call Forward ID Codes. Do not use this address to copy settings from an extension with a Call Forward ID Code. If the copied extension settings include a Call Forward ID Code, the copy “target” will be able to retrieve the messages of the copy “source.” For example, if you copy extension settings from station 200 to station 300, station 300 will be able to retrieve 200’s messages. Station 300 can retrieve 200’s messages because the Call Forward ID Code for 200 is also assigned to 300. Page 9-4 DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Chapter 9. Copy Program Settings (FF9) FF Key Copy Software Version: All Versions Address: FF9 3# (ExtPort)# (ExtPort)### Description Use this address to copy the attributes of one extension’s FF keys to another. Copying must be done on an extension-by-extension basis. The first extension port entry in this address is the FF key source; the second extension entry is the FF key target. Programming Note: You must enter two pound-signs (#) at the end of this address. FF9 3# (l-lf4)Y (l-144f% Extension Port (Source) Notes Extension Port Cbset) Copying Restriction. This address does not copy FF keys programmed as PSD (Personal Speed Dial) keys. Clearing FF Keys Before Using the Copy Program. Before you copy the FF keys to an extension that is set to the defaults, you must clear the key settings of the target phone. To clear key settings, use address FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)# CONF ON/OFF. Setting VP FF Keys on Multiple Phones. To set up multiple extensions with new FF key settings, use the following steps: 1. Clear the keys of the source phone using FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)#. 2. Copy the cleared key settings to multiple target extensions using FF9 3# (SourceExtPort)# (TargetExtPort)#. 3. Set up the FF keys on the source phone using FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)#. 4. Copy the new settings to multiple target extensions using FF9 3# (SourceExtPort)#(TargetExtPort)#. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 . Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 9-5 10. Speed Dial Programming (FFIO) Use the FFlO addresses in this chapter to program speed dial numbers. This chapter covers the following addresses: FFlO I# (SSD)# (DialedN0.W Topic System Speed Dial Numbers Page 10-3 FRO 2# (ExtPortM (PSDM (Dia1edNo.W Personal Speed Dial Numbers 10-5 F’FlO Address DBS-70400 DBS Manual- Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 10-l Page 10-2 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 10. Speed Dial Programming (FFlO) Section 400-Programming System Speed Dial Numbers Software Version: All Versions Address: FFlO 1# (SSD)# (PhoneNumber)# Description Use this address to set up System Speed Dial (SSD) codes and their related phone numbers. An Attendant phone is required to program SSD numbers. NOTE: Up to 90 SSD codes (00-89) can be assigned in CPC-A (all versions) and CPC-AH/B versions prior to 7.0. Beginning with CPC-AWB Version 7.0, up to 200 SSD codes (000-199) can be assigned. Programming To assign an SSD number . . . FFlO l# (00-89 or 000-199)# (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)# t SSD Code Pdone Number Sent To CO OO-89=CPC-A (all versions), and CPC-AII/ (up to 16 digits) CPC-B versions prior to 7.0 OOO-199=CPC-AIIKPC-B Version 7.0 or higher To clear an SSD number . . . FFlO l# (00-89 cy 000-199)# CONF ON/OFF I SSD Code Related Programming Override Toll Restriction with SSD Numbers: FFl 2# l# 4# (SSD)# SSD Display Restriction: FFl 2# l# 5# (0 or l)# SSD Name Display: FFl 2# l# 19# (0 or l)# System Speed Dial Names: FF6 2# (SSD)# CONF (Name)++ Notes SSD Code Display. SSD codes will appear on large-display telephones in alphabetical order by SSD name (set in FF6 2#). DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 DBS-70-400 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 10-3 Chapter 10. Speed Dial Programming (FFl 0) Section 400-Programming SSD Number Display. SSD codes 80-89 (or 160-199) can be set so that their associated phone numbers will not display when the DBS outpulses them. See “SSD Display Restriction”, address FFl 2# l# 5#. Including Trunk Groups in an SSD Number. You can make a trunk group part of an SSD number. To do this, press CONP to insert a “C” as the first character of the SSD number, then enter the trunk group number l-8. The “C” is required for an SLT to use speed-dialing. A “9” can also be used to access the pooled trunk capability. DSS Key Functions. DSS keys can be used for several different tasks in speed dial programming. The keys are described in the following table: Table 10-I. DSS key functions in System Speed Dial programming Function DSS Key Clears entered data on key phone CON-F <Backsoaces 1 Backspaces BS -> 1 Forward spaces P Inserts a pause Initiates trunk group access C r ~~~~ I I I For example, “Cl P5551212” will access pooled trunk group 8 1, then pause, and then dial 555-1212. Page 10-4 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Chapter 10. Speed Dial Programming (FFlO) Section 400-Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers Software Version: All Versions Address: FFlO 2# (ExtPort)# (PSD)# (PhoneNumber)# Description Use this address to set up Personal Speed Dial (PSD) codes and their related phone numbers. PSD numbers can be programmed from any phone. Up to 10 PSDs can be assigned on each extension. In CPC-A (all versions) and in CPC-AH/B versions prior to 7.0, two-digit PSD codes 90-99 are used. Beginning with CPC-AI1 and CPC-B Version 7.0, three-digit codes 900-909 are used. Programming To assign a PSD number . . . FFIO 2# (l-144)# (90-99 or 9001909)# (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)# f Extension Port t f PSD Code Phone Number Sent To CO (up to 16 digits) 90-99=CPC-A (all versions), and CPC-AIWPC-B versions prior to 7.0 900-909=CPC-AII/CPC-B Version 7.0 or higher To clear a PSD number . . . FFIO 2# (19144)# (90-99 or 900-909)# CONF ON/OFF + Extension Port + PSD Code Related Programming PSD Name Display: FF3 (ExtPort)# 17# (0 or l)# Personal Speed Dial Names: FF6 3# (ExtPort)# (PSD)# CONF (Name)# Notes PSD Number Display. PSD numbers appear on large-display telephones in alphabetical order by PSD name (set in FF6 3#) . DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 10-5 Chapter 10. Speed Dial Programming (FFlO) Section 400-Programming DSS Key Functions. DSS keys can be used for several different tasks in speed dial programming. The keys are described in the following table: Table 10-2. DSS key functions in Personal Speed Dial programming DSS Key CONF <BS -> P C Function Clears entered data on key phone Backspaces Backspaces Forward spaces Inserts a pause Initiates trunk group access For example: “Cl P5551212” will access pooled trunk group 8 1, then pause, and then dial 555-1212. Page 10-6 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Appendix A. Large-Screen Displays This appendix illustrates the menu screens that can be programmed to appear during different call states (e.g., when the phone is idle, during a trunk call, during an intercom call, etc.) on large-display phones. These screens act as labels for the soft keys surrounding the LCD. The soft keys provide onetouch initiation of a feature, or one-touch access to a directory, during the call state when the screen appears. There are a total of 39 screens. Screens 1-24 are fixed, pre-programmed screens which cannot be changed. Beginning with CPC-AM3 Version 6.0, Flexible Function screens 25-39 are available, which can be custom-designed using FFl 2# 7# l# thru 4#. AU of these screens can be assigned to different call states using FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# (0-39)#: Note: Some screens cannot be set to display during certain call processing operations. Main Menu FF3 (Extl’ort)# (26-33)# l# Personal Speed Dial FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 2# DBS-70-400 System Speed Dial FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 3# DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page A-l Appendix A. Large-Screen Displays Page A-2 Section 400-Programming DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Appendix A. Large-Screen Displays Attendant Menu 3 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33j# lO# Function Screen 1 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# ll# Function Screen 2 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 12# Function Screen 3 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 13# Function Screen 4 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 14# Function Screen 5 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 15# Df3S Manual - Issued 8/l/95 DES-70-400 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com + Page A-3 Appendix A. Large-Screen Displays w a B a ~ Section 400-Programming Function Screen 6 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 16# Function Screen 7 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 17# Function Screen 8 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 18# Function Screen 9 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 19# .~,O~-!j~~~~~~,~~~~~ .“::kiii’$“:4i~~~~~~~,~~~~~ ,.,__.n_.,., _, ,/., :.: :.‘,:.‘,:. ,~I~-~~~“~~~~~~: . . ........._.:..,:.;:.,(i,:.:......... :.:. a....,., .>2,. .,._., ,.,_ ,. ,. .,.: i., :.:.:. . . . . .~.~~ii~~~~~~~~~~; -.~:i~~~~.~~~~~~~~~ I, , :, ..: “‘::.?.:.:.. . . . i., , ‘:.:.,:.,i’:‘.: : : > .;. ; ? “:+;::$::. ,: :.p& ‘6’ R~~~:~~~~.~~~8:I”~~~~~~: :I.: i:c.:.:.:, :. ~:. : ~,::.,::.:i..,. <..A,.. .:.y.: .: ::,,:..::..::.: :,..:: ‘:: ’ :’ : : .:,., ,:. :g:. ‘,::,:‘.:;y”;:. .,,(.,:‘,.~‘~.~::.~, .“,:: ,:: ..:.:::..~:::..:~+.:+.. ~..::..~:~-.,:~,:;~~~~: :.:~: ~. : ~:~:, .;:,c<* ,. (_.,. . . ... .;,.r(,f.~:,.:~.:‘:.~.,.~. :.~~:~.:..:,: ..:...:.i.’:.‘.:..‘.:. ~_:.. .:.‘..::~. ._.. ..:. ,. ..:.:.. .., . ,. . .r ,.,:. Function Screen 10 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 20# w w ~ B B w m w :~~~~~!~~~~~~~~~~~ ~iii~~~~~~~~~: : :y:.: .:. . .i.i. /5 . . .:.:.: . . . . ..~y.. . . ~.:. :.:.~;. .:.:.:.~:.:. c..:.:y.:.,.:. .:.:,: . . . . ~~~~~~~~:~~~~~~~~~ : . . ., . . . . . ~~~~~~~~~~~~~ .;i,::,....::..:..:.. ..i::...:..:..:‘.. ..:.. L. . . i... . .. .i.. . .. . ..,.., . ..,.. ... . . . .......~. . . .y.i. . ~~~.~F:::.:, :~:~~~~lD;f;~~~~~~:~ :.:., ,‘( y:::.: .“:...., : . .:. : , .:c : ‘.‘.‘i.’ 1: 2: : :.:. ::.. :i. : . . . . . ~~~~~i-~~~~:~ . . . . . . . . . . . .;. . . . . . , ,_ .,:.:.,.,.,. . ,:.:.:.:.:.:.‘.‘.~.~,‘:‘.‘:‘: .T. :. .:.‘.:.:.:.x. j.‘. ?. ~~~~~~~~~~~:~ a ~ m w m Function Screen 11 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 21# DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Page A-4 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Appendix A. Large-Screen Displays Function Screen 12 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 22# Function Screen 13 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 23# Function Screen 14 FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 24# Flexible Function Screens 1 - 15 F’F3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# (2%39)# DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page A-5 Appendix B. Terminal Programming The body of this Secrion 400 i$ devoted to programming the DBS system through a key phone. However. the DBS can also be programmed remotel! via the Terminal Programming mode. Using this mode, commands can be entered on a remote PC or terminal and sent to the DBS via modem. Or, the PC/terminal can be connected directly to the DBS’s SMDR port (0’6~. You can enter the Terminal Programming mode using any of the follo\ving three methods: l l l Direct Connection: Lse a local PC or terminal and a communications package to connect directly to CX6. DISA: Dial into the system through a DISA trunk. Operator Transfer: Dial into the system through a regular trunk. then have the operator enter the Remote Programming ID Code. This appendix gives an overview of these programming methods. Terminal Programming Through a Direct Connection To program the system through a PC or terminal connected :G DBS ser-iaI port CN6: 1. .Make sure the cables are configured and connected as described in Secrio~ 300-Imrullation. 2. Make sure the DBS is in the SMDR mode. Dial the following codes from the Attendant port OK/OFF #93 3. Enter your terminal communications program and make sure your PC or terminal’s data communications settings match those of the DBS. 3. From your terminal communications program (~terminal emulation in a PC communications package). type the following command: #99 xxxx (where “xxxx” is the site’s password: system default is -‘9999”) 5. After the DBS displays “REMT>” on the computer, type P 2nd press ENTER. 6. Follow the directions on the screen to access the desired program. DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page B-l Section 400-Programming Appendix 8. Terminal Programming Terminal Programming Through a CO or DISA Trunk Note: To enter the Terminal Programming mode through a trunk, the DBS must be equipped with an MFR card (if using DISA) and an RAI card. To program through a CO or DISA trunk: 1. Dial into the DBS through the trunk. 2. Ask the operator to place you on hold and dial #6 xxxx (where “xxxx” is the site’s password; system default is “9999”). This will transfer you to the RAI-A&B cards. 3. Wait for the computer to display “REMT>“, then type P and press ENTER. 4. Follow the directions on the screen to access the desired program. Terminal Programming Commands Use the following commands to navigate terminal programming: ruble B-I. Terminal programming commands i ! I ’ -07 -08 -09 -10 -B -b i -F -f Ix 1 Ctrl-2 Page 8-2 1 Access Ring assignments f Access FF key assignments ( Access Name assignments i Access Toll Restriction data Access Least Cost Routing data Access Copy mode Access Speed Dial data Back to previous address Back to previous port 1 Forward to next address I I Forward to next port 1 Return to previous mode Quit DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Appendix B. Terminal Frogramming Section 400-Programming Resuming SMDR or Bus Monitor Mode After Terminal Programming The DBS supports three remote functions -1) Bus Monitor 2) SMDR 3) Terminal (Remote) Programming However, only one of these functions can operate at a time. When not in Terminal (Remote) Programming, either SMDR or Bus Monitor is active. When you enter Terminal Programming (#6-xxxx), the other function stops. When finished, the SMDR or Bus Monitor function resumes. The DBS can be reset to the desired SMDR or Bus Monitor mode by entering (or having someone at the site enter) one of the following codes at an extension or Attendant phone: Table B-2. Codes for switching SMDRIBus Monitor modes Function Command Normal Bus Monitor #90 Register Bus Monitor #91 Poll Bus Monitor #92 1 SMDR Output #93 DBS-70-400 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page B-3 Section 400-Index A AB/ABCD Signaling ................................. 1-19 1 Absence Messagesassigning to FF keys...................................5-5 creatintr_ .......................................................6-6 displaying extension status.. ..................... 3-39 effect on call coverage feature ................ .4- 18 effect on hunt feature.. ..............................4- 1 1 preset ..........................................................6-6 Access CodesDISA inbound ID code.. ......................... 1-128 DISA outbound ID code 1.. .................... I- 129 DISA outbound ID code 2...................... l-130 PBX, automatic pause in .......................... 2-10 PBX. creating ...........................................l-64 programming mode ................................ l-131 remote programming .............................. 1-127 Account Codesassigning ...................................................I-70 assigning to FF keys................................... 5-5 forced verified/unverified/voluntary ..........3-9 ACD Channelsterminal type.. ........... ................................. .3-5 Add DigitsillLCR ......................................................8-14 AEC (Analog Extension Card)-API slot assignment.. ................................ 1-25 disconnect signal (CPC-A). ..................... .3-4 1 disconnect signal (CPC-AII/B) ............... .3-55 disconnect signal duration (CPC-A) ........ I-30 disconnect signal duration (CPC-AII/E%) . . l-43 extension ring pattern............................... 3-47 AFP (Attendant Feature Package)-alarm feature, enabling ............................. 1-36 default FF key feature assignments..........5-l 1 FF key feature assignment.. ......................5- 10 terminal type ...............................................3-6 AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)-alarm [email protected] ...........................................l-171 recovery timer ........................................1-173 relay close ...............................................1-184 Aiarms...........................................................1-36 assigning to FF keys ................................... 5-5 Tl frame loss ..........................................l-174 Tl other alarms, detection.. .................... I-171 DBS-70-400 Tl other alarms, recovery ...................... 1-173 Tl red, counter ....................................... l- 176 Tl red, detection .................................... l-166 Tl red. relay........................................... 1-181 Tl relay, reset ........................................ 1-185 Tl signal loss, counter.. ......................... l-177 Tl slips................................................... 1-175 Tl sync loss, counter ............................. 1-178 Tl sync loss, relay ................................. I-182 Tl yellow, counter ................................. l- 179 Tl yellow. detection .............................. 1-167 Tl yellow. recovery............................... 1-169 Tl yellow, relay ..................................... l-180 T 1 yellow, send ...................................... 1-164 Alert ToneBusy Override/OHVA ............................. l-22 voice calls ................................................ I-21 AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)-line coding set ........................................ 1-161 Answer Key-assigning to FF keys .................................. 5-5 Answer Supervision Timer for Tl .......... I- 152 Any Key-assigning to FF key .................................... 5-5 API (Application Programming Interface)-AEC slot for ............................................. 1-25 auto-redial restriction.. ............................. 3-58 baud rate.. ................................................. I-52 DID/DNIS answer codes ......................... l-46 DID/DNIS digits.. .................................... I-44 pot-t type ................................................... 1-51 Area Codesglobal restriction for TRS types 3-6.. ......7-23 global restriction with office codes..........7-25 in LCR........................................................ 8-6 restricting by TRS type ............................ 7-16 restricting with office codes........... .7-18, 7-26 special, in LCR ..........................................8-8 Attendant Phones-alternate .................................................... l-18 assigning Park Hold to FF key................... 5-5 barge-ins.. ................................................. 3- 13 default ringing trunks ................................. 4-3 delayed ringing on ................................... 4-20 Fourth Attendant position........................ l-33 hunt group transfer to ............................... 4-15 intercom calling ....................................... I- 19 DBS Manual- Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Index-l Section 400-Programming Index override.. ................................................... 1-35 permanent call forward point .................. .3-52 primary, overflow calls ............................ l-28 recall timer, hold (CO) ............................. l-93 recall timer, hunt groups........................... l-97 recall timer, intercom hold ..................... l-l 14 recall timer, Park Hold ............................. l-99 recall timer. transferred CO calls ............. l-95 recall timer, transferred intercom calls ... l-l 16 Second Attendant position ....................... l-3 1 terminal type.. ............................................. 3-5 Third Attendant position .......................... l-32 timer, call reversions .............................. l-101 transfer extension ..................................... l-34 Auto Flash Redial ....................................... l-10 Auto Pickup.. ............................................... 3-16 Auto Set Relocation Code ......................... .3-49 Auto-Dialing-auto-redial (enabling on extensions) ........3-58 outbound DTMF signal duration for........2- 12 Automatic Pause-unsupervised conferencing with...............3- 17 B BSZS ........................................................... l-161 _ Barge-In-allowing on extensions............................ .3-14 assigning to FF key ................................... .5-5 Attendant override .................................... l-35 enabling an extension to ........................... 3-13 Baud Rate-for API port .............................................. l-52 for RAI modem ........................................ l-62 for SMDR serial port................................ l-55 BGM (Background Music)-and Class of Service ........................ l-68, 3-40 assigning to FF key .................................... 5-5 BLF (Busy Lamp Field)-delayed ringing on.. .................................. l-37 Buffer Size ................................................... l-6 1 Bus Monitor Mode-switching to SMDR.. ..... l-58, l-59, l-60, B-3 Busy Override-alert tone................................................... l-22 assigning to FF key .................................... 5-5 receive ...................................................... 3-14 send.. .........................................................3-13 Busy Tone Transmission for Tl .............. 1-194 Index-2 Busy/No Answer-permanent call forward type .................... 3-5 1 Busy/Offhook-displaying extension status ...................... 3-39 Busy-Out ....................................................... 2-3 C Call Coverage Groups-extension members .................................. 4-18 restrictions ................................................ 4-19 Call Duration Display .................................. l-5 Call Forwarding-and call coverage groups.......................... 4-18 and copying extension attributes.. .............. 9-4 and transferred calls.. .............................l- 117 assigning to FF key.................................... 5-5 effect on hunt feature ............................... 4- 11 forced LCR and (X-Outside ...................... 3-8 ID digits and terminal type ........................ 3-6 no-answer timer ..................................... l-111 permanent type.. ....................................... 3-51 target extension (permanent) ................... 3-52 Call Forward-Outside-and Class of Service................................. l-68 assigning to FF key.................................... 5-5 with LCR.................................................... 1-7 Call Park-and hunt groups.. ...................................... 4- 12 assigning to FF key.................................... 5-5 default assignment to DSS FF keys.. ......... 5-9 Call Pickup-assigning to FF key.................................... 5-5 Call Reversions-and hunt groups.. ...................................... 4- 13 timer, Attendant phones.. ....................... l- 101 Call Waiting-assigning to FF key.. .................................. 5-5 creating text replies.. ................................ 6- 10 enabling extensions for ............................ 3-12 Caller ID-and DISA Auto Answer.. ........................... 2-8 automatic DISA ....................................... l-81 LCD timer for .......................................... l-48 Log, assigning to FF key............................ 5-5 trunk circuit types .................................... 2-18 trunk setting considerations ..................... 2-20 Carrier Tones ................................ l-195, l-196 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Index CIC (Carrier Identification Code)-adding with LCR ...................................... 8-14 old format, allowing ................................ .7- 14 Circuit Types-and Tl channels.. .................................... 1-159 for tnmks ..................................................2-18 station port class .......................................3-43 Tl digital’pad settings ............................ 1-155 Class of Service-assigning to extensions............................. 3-40 changing assignment to extension.. ..........3-40 defining features of................................... l-68 CN6............... l-53, l-54, l-55, l-56, l-57, l-58, l-59, l-60, B-l Conferencing-unsupervised, allowing on extensions ...... 3-17 unsupervised, allowing on trunks.............2-13 unsupervised, timer ................................ l-102 Country Code Table-building .....................................................7-13 CPC Card Initialization.. ....................... Intro-4 D Day Mode-assigning to FF key .................................... 5-5 extension delayed ring assignments.. .......4-20 extension ring assignments.. ...................... .4-3 hunt group delayed ring assignments.. .... .4-21 hunt group ring assignments ..................... .4-4 start time, automatic ............................... 1-123 TRS during ...............................................7-21 Day/Date Setting ........................................... 1-3 Defauit Program Settings.. ..................... Intro-9 Delayed Ringing-enabling for CO calls................................ 1-29 enabling on extensions (BLF) .................. l-37 extension assignment (Day) .................... .4-20 extension assignment (Night 2)............... -4-29 extension assignment (Night). ................. .4-22 hunt group assignment (Day) .................. .4-2 1 hunt group assignment (Night 2)............. .4-30 hunt group assignment (Night)................ .4-23 timer for CO calls ................................... 1-118 timer for extensions (DSS/BLF) ............ l-120 Delete Digits-inLCR ......................................................8-13 Dial Tone-calling, assigning to FF key.. ..................... .5-7 DBS-70-400 detection ................................................... 2-11 On/Off, assigning to FF key ...................... 5-5 Tl receive .............................................. 1-195 Tl transmission.. .................................... l- 193 Dial-Pulse-and Tl incoming calls ............................ 1-192 signal conversion to DTMF, assigning to FF key ...................................................... 5-5 trunk setting ............................................... 2-4 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)-enabling trunks for ................................. l- 187 extension assignments (CPC-B 2.0) ........ 3-41 extension assignments (CPC-B 3.1)...... 1-133 hardware and power requirements......... 1 - 134 immediate/wink start on trunks.. .............. 2-21 multiple DID/DNIS.. ................................ l-39 name assignments .................................... 6-11 New Function Reset and........................ 1-132 ring assignments .................................... 1-198 Tl dialing method, incoming calls........ 1-192 timeout for dialing ................................... 2-23 timeout for interdigit dialing.. .................. 2-24 to a Voice Mailbox .................................. l-44 trunk circuit types .................................... 2-18 Voice Mail answer code for..................... l-46 wink start timer for trunks ....................... 2-22 Digital Pad Settings for Tl ...................... 1-155 Directories-extensions.. ............................................... 3-39 PSD numbers, assigning to FF key............ 5-6 SSD numbers, assigning to FF key............ 5-6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)-auto answer ................................................ 2-8 automatic DISA callers ............................ 1-81 end time.................................................... 2-17 hardware requirement ................................ 2-8 ID code (inbound) .................................. l- 128 ID code 1 (outbound) ............................. 1-129 ID code 2 (outbound) ............................. l-130 ID code for remote programming.......... 1-127 in remote programming ............................. B-2 limitations ..............................................l-130 SLT ring pattern ....................................... l-42 start time .................................................. 2-16 Disconnect Signaling-AEC disconnect (CPC-A)........................ 3-41 AEC disconnect (CPC-AII/B) ................. 3-55 detection timer for trunks.. ....................... 2-15 release acknowledge timer for Tl .......... 1-148 Tl timer for ............................................1-146 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com . Index-3 Section 400-Programming Index DND (Do Not Disturb)-assigning to FF key .................................... 5-5 displaying extension status.. ..................... 3-39 effect on call coverage .feature ................ .4- 18 effect on hunt feature ................................. 4-11 DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service)-enabling trunks for ................................. 1-187 extension assignments ............................ l- 197 multiple DWDNIS .................................. l-39 name assignments.. ................................... 6-l 1 ring assignments ..................................... 1-198 Tl dialing method, incoming calls.. ....... 1-192 to a Voice Mailbox................................... l-44 Voice Mail answer code.. ......................... l-46 Door Phonesassigning ports for .................................... 1-82 auto-rediai restriction ............................... 3-58 ML keys, using with ................................. l-84 opener access code, creating .................... l-86 opener access code, requiring.. ................. l-50 opener relay timer.. ................................... I-90 receiving a call from.. ............................... l-85 restrictions ....................................... l-83, l-85 ring assignments ....................................... l-84 ring pattern ............................................... l-89 ring timeout timer..................................... l-88 setting trunk dialing for .......i...................... 2-4 SLT phones, using with.. .......................... 1-84 tone type ................................................... l-87 DSLT (Digital Single-Line Telephone)-auto-redial on............................................ 3-58 receiving volume ...................................... 3-48 ring pattern for.. ........................................ 3-46 setting terminal type for ............................. 3-5 DSS Consoles-default FF key feature assignments............. 5-9 key layout (illust.) ............................... 5-9, 6-2 keys in PSD programming ....................... 10-6 keys in SSD programming ....................... 10-4 setting terminal type for ............................ .3-5 DSS/BLF Key-assigning to extensions (LED flash)...........5-5 Attendant. using on .................................. 1-31 call coverage, using with.. ....................... .4- 18 default FF key assignment.......................... 5-9 delayed ring, required with.. ..................... l-37 delayed ringing on extensions.. ................4-26 DTMF signaling on .................................... 7-6 key bank hold, using with ........................ l-13 names & messages, creating with ............. .6- 1 Index-4 ringing on extensions............................... 4-25 DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency)-and Tl incoming calls.. .......................... 1-192 outbound signal duration for auto-dialed digits....................................................... 2- 12 restricting with TRS ................................... 7-6 trunk setting ............................................... 2-4 E E&M ..........................................................1-186 EM/24-copying restriction ..................................... 9-4 FF key feature assignment ......................... 5-3 key layout on (illust.) ................................. 5-4 port assignment .......................................... 3-7 Equal Access Codeformat.. ..................................................... 7-14 ESF (Extended SuperFrame). ...... l-160, 1-191 Extension Lockoutassigning to FF key .................................... 5-6 codes, creating ......................................... 3-10 copying restriction ..................................... 9-4 Extension Numbers-assigning to ports ....................................... 3-3 clearing ....................................................... 3-4 displaying port number for ........................ 3-4 for Primary Attendant ................................ 3-4 for Second Attendant ................................. 3-4 number of digits in................................... 1-17 reassigning.. .............................................. 3-4 Extensionsclass of service ......................................... 3-40 copying attributes of .................................. 9-4 directory display ...................................... 3-39 directory, assigning to FF key.................... 5-6 DSS/BLF delayed ring assignments........4-26 DSS/BLF ring assignments.. .................... 4-25 hunt group members (CPC-A/B) ............. 4-14 hunt group members (CPC-AIL/B) .......... 4- 17 hunt group transfer to.. ................... . ......... 4- 15 including in page groups.. ............... ......... 3-22 moving ..................................................... 3-49 name assignments ...................................... 6-3 ring pattern.. ............................................. 3-46 status of .................................................... 3-39 terminal type .............................................. 3-5 External Paging .......................................... 1-67 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming index F Failure Mode for Tl ................................. 1-162 FF Keys-APP default feature assignments.. ........... .5-11 copying attributes of.................................. .9-5 extension assignments............................... -5-3 feature assignments. DSS consoles ........... .5-8 feature codes (table) .................................. .5 -5 layout on a 34-button phone (illust.) ..........5-4 layout on an EM/24 console (illust.) ..........5-4 programming mode ................................... xvii Flash-auto flash redial ........................................ l-10 CO flash timer.. ...................................... l-104 inT1 .......................................................1-165 PBX flash timer...................................... l-l 10 SLT flash control ...................................... 1-15 SLT hookflash .......................................... 3-45 SLT onhook flash timer.. ........................ 1 . 106 FLASH Key-LCR, using with ......................................... 8-6 timing for CO ......................................... l-104 timing for PBX hold.. .............................. l-l 10 TRS. using with .......................................... 7-6 Flexible Function Screens-assigning text for ...................................... l-78 l - 8 0 default, all screens .................................... default, individual screens.. ...................... l-79 feature codes (table) ................................. 1-74 soft-keys, assigning features to ................ l-73 Forced Account Codes--see Account Codes Forced Least Cost Routing ......................... .3-8 Fractional Tl ............................................. l-200 Frame (Tl)-format .....................................................l-160 loss counter.............................................1-174 loss relay.................................................1-183 G Glare-- and wink-start signaling in Tl................ 1-154 avoiding in LCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 12 immediate glare timer for T 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I- 153 Ground-Start Trunks-and Tl COP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-.............l-186 considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 inbound call detection timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-l 13 DBS-70-400 outbound call detection timer ................ l- 112 trunk circuit type.. .................................... 2- 18 Group Call Pickup-and page groups ....................................... 3-22 assigning feature to FF key.. ...................... 5-6 Guard Timer for Tl ................................. 1-147 H Headset-assigning to FP key .................................... 5-6 Hold-non-appearing, for CO calls.. ................... 1-14 recall timer, Attendant-held CO calls ...... l-93 recall timer, Attendant-held intercom calls ...................................................... 1-l 14 recall timer, Attendant-parked ................. 1-99 recall timer, extension-held CO calls ....... 1-94 recall timer, extension-held intercom calls ...................................................... l-l 15 recall timer, extension-parked calls ....... I- 100 tone, internal ............................................ 1-49 Hot Dial Pad.. .............................................. 3-57 Hunt Groups-call next.. .................................................. 4-13 circular ....................................................... 4-9 deiayed ring assignments (Day)............... 4-2 1 delayed ring assignments (Night 2).........4-30 delayed ring assignments (Night) ............ 4-23 distributed ................................................ 4- 11 longest idle ............................................... 4-11 member extensions (CPC-A/B) ............... 4- 14 member extensions (CPC-AII/B). ............ 4- 17 membership restriction ............................ 4- 11 name assignments ...................................... 6-9 permanent call forward point................... 3-52 pilot number requirement.. ....................... 4- 17 pilot numbers ............................................. 4-7 recall timer, Attendant ............................. l-97 recall timer, extension transfers to........... l-98 ring assignments (Day) .............................. 4-4 ring assignments (Night 2)....................... 4-28 ring assignments (Night) ............................ 4-6 terminal ............................................. 4-9,4- 11 timer, no-answer .................................... 1-122 transfer extension for overflow calls .......4- 15 transfer timer for overflow calls .............. 4-16 VAU hunting priority............................... 3-54 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Index-5 Section 400-Programming Index I Incoming Calls (Tl)-detection timer.. ..........I........................... 1-151 dialing method ........................................ 1-192 signaling type ......................................... l- 189 Initializing New DBS Systems.. .............. Intro-4 Intercom Calls-assigning to FF key .................................... 5-6 prime line ‘pickup.. .................................... 3- 15 recall timer, Attendant-held.. .................. l-l 14 recall timer, Attendant-transferred ......... 1- 116 recall timer, extension-held .................... l- 115 recall timer, extension-transferred.. ........ 1-l 17 tone/voice calling from an extension ....... l-20 tone/voice calling from Attendant.. .......... l- 19 Internal Hold Tone ..................................... l-49 International Calls-restricting on extensions with TRS ..........7- 12 restricting on trunks with TRS ................... 7-5 IXC (Inter-Exchange Carrier)-formats.. ................................... 7-3.7-l 1, 7-14 K Key bank Hold ............................................ 1-13 Key Phones (K-Tel)-auto-redial on.. ..........................................3-58 setting terminal type for.. .......................... .3-5 L LCD-SSD display on ........................................... l-9 timer for Caller ID.................................... l-48 LCR (Least Cost Routing)-l+ required ............................................... l-23 access.. ........................................................l-7 activating .................................................... 8-4 add digits .................................................. 8-14 area codes in.. ............................................. 8-6 call processing in.. ...................................... 8-4 delete digits ..............................................8- 13 forced, on extensions .................................. 3-8 office codes in ............................................8-7 overview .....................................................8-2 PBX, using with .........................................8-5 pooled trunks in..........................................2-5 requirements ...............................................8-2 Index-6 setup ...........................................................8-2 special area codes in .................................. 8-8 special numbers not processed.. ................. 8-6 special office codes in ................................ 8-9 time priority route tables, building .......... 8-10 trunk groups in ......................................... 8- 12 Line Coding for Tl ................................... 1-161 Local Calls-restricting office codes for ....................... 7- 17 Loop-Start Trunks-considerations .......................................... 2- 18 trunk circuit type ...................................... 2-18 M MC0 (Multi-Central Office)-AFP default F’F key feature assignments. 5-l 1 enabling an extension for......................... 3-53 Meet-Me Answer-assigning to FF key.................................... 5-6 Menus-displayed during a trunk call.. .................. 3-3 1 displayed during Cal! Waiting tone.. ....... 3-35 displayed during idle mode...................... 3-23 displayed during intercom dial tone......... 3-25 displayed when accessing CO dial tone ... 3-29 displayed when calling an extension ....... 3-27 displayed when dialing a busy extension. 3-3? displayed when receiving a page ............. 3-33 soft key (illustr.). ........................................ A-l Message Waiting Answer-assigning to FF key .................................... 5-6 MFR Card-in remote programming ............................. B-2 ML (Multi-Line)-enabling an extension for......................... 3-53 ringback tone from.. ................................. 3-42 ML/MCO-and call coverage groups.......................... 4-18 assigning to FF key.. .................................. 5-6 separation ................................................. 3-53 Multiple DID/DNIS .................................... l-39 Mute-assigning to FF key .................................... 5-6 N Name Assignments-extensions.. ................................................. 6-3 DSS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 . Section 400~Programming Index hunt. groups .................................................6-9 PSD.............................................................6-5 SSD.............................................................6-4 trunks .......................................................... 6-8 NANP (North American Numbering Plan)-and “911” dialing.. ..................................... .7-8 choosing ...................................................7-10 compared to old numbering plan (table) ....7-3 country code table .................................... 7-13 international calling on extensions.. .........7-12 international calls ....................................... 7-5 lxc format ...............................................7-14 of&e codes, restricting ........................... .7-15 operator calls ............................................7-11 New Function Reset ..................... Intro-5, 1-132 Night 2 Modeassigning to FF key .................................... 5-6 extension delayed ring assignments.. .......4-29 extension ring assignments.. .................... .4-27 hunt group delayed ring assignments.......4-30 hunt group ring assignments ................... .4-28 star& time, automatic ............................... l- 125 TRS during ...............................................7-22 Night Key.. ...................................................1-92 Night Modeassigning to FF key .................................... 5-6 extension delayed ring assignments.. .......4-22 kxtension ring assignments.. ...................... .4-5 hunt group delayed ring assignments.. .....4-23 hunt group ring assignments ..................... .4-6 start time, automatic ................................. 1-9 1 TRS during ............................................... .7-22 Non-Appearing Trunk Hold ...................... l- 14 0 Offhook Signalingand hunt groups ........................................ 4-12 for busy extensions ................................... 3-11 pattern.. .....................................................3-20 volume ......................................................3-19 Office Codesglobal restriction for TRS types 3-6.........7-24 global restriction with area codes.............7-25 illLCR ........................................................8-7 restricting individual ................................ 7-17 restricting system-wide ............................ 7-15 restricting with area codes.. ............ .7-19.7-26 special, in LCR ........................................... 8-9 DBS-70-400 OHVA (Offhook Voice Announce)-alert tone .................................................. l-22 assigning to FF key .................................... 5-6 creating text replies .................................. 6-10 enabling extensions for ............................ 3-12 One Touch Dial ........................................... l-l 1 Onhook Transfer ........................................ 1-12 OOF (out-of-frame). ...................... 1-17 1, l- 173 Operator Calls-restricting with TRS ................................. 7-11 OPXauto-redial restriction ............................... 3-58 extension ring pattern.. ............................. 3-47 setting terminal type for............................. 3-5 Outgoing Signaling Type for Tl ............. l-188 Outpulse Delay Timer for Tl .................. l- 149 Overflow Calls-Attendant transfer extension .................... l-34 for primary Attendant .............................. l-28 Override Toll Restrictionwith SSD numbers ..................................... 1-8 P Pad Settingsdigital, for Tl ......................................... 1-155 hot dial pad.. ............................................. 3-57 levels (Station Port Class). ....................... 3-43 Pagingassigning to FF key.. .................................. 5-6 building page groups.. .............................. 3-22 default assignment to DSS F’F keys........... 5-9 duration timing ......................................... 1-41 external delayed ringing (Day) ................ 4-20 external delayed ringing (Night 2)........... 4-29 external delayed ringing (Night). ............. 4-22 external interface control for.. .................. l-67 external ringing (Day) ................................ 4-3 external ringing (Night 2) ........................ 4-27 external ringing (Night) ............................. 4-5 group limitation for barge-ins .................. 3- 13 hot dial pad restriction ............................. 3-57 zones ........................................................ 1-67 Park Holdassigning to Attendant FF key ................... 5-5 assigning to FF key .................................... 5-6 recall timer for Attendants ....................... 1-99 recall timer for extensions...................... 1- 100 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Index-7 Section 400-Programming Index Pause-inserting into Add digits (LCR) ...............8-14 timer, automatic ...................................... l-103 timer, dialing .......................................... l-109 Pay-For-Call Services-restricting .................................................. 7-19 PBXaccess codes, automatic pause in.............. l-64 access codes, creating ............................... l-63 automatic pause for .................................. 2-10 flash on REDIAL ..................................... l-10 flash timer............................................... l-l 10 LCR, using with ......................................... 8-5 trunk port type setting ................................ 2-7 unsupervised conference in ...................... 3- 17 Permanent Call Forward-target extension ........................................ 3-52 type ........................................................... 3-5 1 Pooled Trunksaccess, group “9” ........................................ 2-5 access, groups “8 l-86” ............................... 2-6 forced LCR on ............................................ 3-8 including in SSD numbers.. ...................... 10-4 prime line pickup ...................................... 3-15 selection, assigning to FF key ............... ....5-7 Prime Line Pickup ...................................... 3-15 Private Trunk Lineassigning to extensions ............................... 2-9, copying restriction ...................................... 9-3 PROG Key ................................................... 1-12 Programming Modeentering ................................................. Intro-7 example entry ....................................... Intro-9 FF key sequence ........................................ xvii ID code for entering ............................... 1-131 preparations for ................................ ..L. Intro-3 structure ................................................ Intro-6 PSD (Personal Speed Dial)-copying restriction for FF keys ..................9-5 directory, assigning to FF key.. ..................5-6 display on large LCD phones...................3-21 displaying ................................................. 1 O-5 name assignments....................................... 6-5 numbers, assigning on extensions............ 10-5 numbers, assigning to FF key.................... .5-6 permanent call forward point .................. .3-52 Index-8 RAI (Remote Administration Interface)-baud rate ................................................... 1-62 modem card compatibility ....................... l-62 remote programming with ......................... B-2 serial port settings .................................... 1-62 RAlMCLR/RAMHOLD Switches ..........Intro-4 Rangefor extension ports ..................................... 3 - 1 for trunks .................................................... 2-1 Red Alarms (Tl)-counter ................................................... 1-176 detection .................................................1-166 relay ....................................................... 1-181 REDIAL Key-add digits (LCR) ...................................... 8-14 auto flash timer ...................................... l-104 auto flash using ........................................ l-10 automatic pause for PBX ......................... 2-10 auto-redial................................................ 3-58 SSD display on.. ......................................... l-9 Release-acknowledge timer for Tl ...................... 1-148 assigning to FF key .................................... 5-6 Reminderassigning to FF key .................................... 5-6 Remote Loopback for Tl ......................... 1-163 Remote Programmingcommands in .............................................. B-2 ID code for............................................. 1-127 resuming mode after .................................. B-3 through a CO or DISA Trunk.. .................. B-2 through a direct connection.. ...................... B-l Ring Assignmentsextensions (Day) ........................................ 4-3 extensions (Night 2) ................................. 4-27 extensions (Night) ...................................... 4-5 hunt groups (Day) ...................................... 4-4 hunt groups (Night 2) ............................... 4-28 hunt groups (Night) .................................... 4-6 Ring Cycieexpansion timer, incoming calls ............ l-108 illustration .............................................. l-107 Ring Patternsfor analog transfers (CPC-A). .................. l-27 for analog transfers (CRC-AII/B) ............ 1-38 for extensions ........................................... 3-46 for inbound trunk calls ............................. 2-14 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Index for SLT DISA ...........................................1-42 for UNA terminals ....................................1-66 Ringback Tone-ML keys....................................................3-42 transmission for Tl................................. l-196 Ringing Line Pickup...................................3-16 RJ2lx ............................................................ .3-3 Robbed Bit Setting for Tl ........................ 1-191 S Sl Strap.. .................................. l-7. 2-5, 2-6, 8-2 Save Number Redial-assigning to FF key ................................... .5-6 SCC-B Card-extension ring pattern ............................... 3-47 SF (SuperFrame) ........................... l-160, 1-191 Signal Loss Counter for Tl...................... 1-177 Slip Counter for Tl...................................1-175 SLT (Single-Line Teiephone)-and hunt groups ........................................4- 12 audio delay when overriding TRS.............. l-8 auto-redial restriction ............................... 3-58 DISA ring pattern..................................... l-42 flash control ..............................................l-15 hookflash ..................................................3-45 hot dial pad restriction.. ............................3-57 hunt group transfer to .............................. .4-15 onhook flash timer.. ................................l-106 restrictions on moving .............................. 3-50 setting terminal type for ............................ .3-5 station port class for ................................. 3-43 transfer ring pattern (CPC-A). .................. l-27 transfer ring pattern (CPC-AIVB) ............ 1-38 SLT Adapter (SLT-A)-ring pattern for........................................... 3-46 setting terminal type for .............................3-5 SMDR-account c,odes in .........................................3-9 and Account Codes...................................1-71 baud rate ...................................................l-55 data length ................................................l-57 display start timer for CO calls .................. 1-6 including extensions on report .................3- 18 mode, in remote programming.................. B-l odd/even parity .........................................l-54 parity check ..............................................l-53 print mode 1 (out/inbound calls) .............. l-58 print mode 2 (local/Iong-distance) ........... l-59 DBS-70-400 print mode 3 (header title) ....................... l-60 serial port flow control ............................. 1-61 stop bit length........................................... l-56 SMDR/Bus Monitor mode resuming after terminal programming....... B-3 Soft Key Menus--see Menus Soft Keys-on large-display phones (illust.)............... l-73 Software Version Verification.. .............. Intro-4 Splash Tone-for Busy Override/OHVA.. ...................... 1-22 for voice calls ........................................... 1-21 SRAM ........................................... Intro-5, 1-132 SSD (System Speed Dial)-directory, assigning to FF key.. .................. 5-6 display restriction....................................... l-9 displaying ................................................. 10-3 name assiggents ...................................... 6 3 name display ............................................ 1-24 numbers, assigning.. ................................. 10-3 numbers, assigning to FP key .................... 5-6 overriding TRS with .................................. l-8 permanent call forward point.. ................. 3-52 Station Lockout-codes, creating ......................................... 3-10 copying restriction ..................................... 9-4 Station Port Class ....................................... 3-43 Structure of Section 400 ............................... xvii SW1 Switch .............................................. Intro-4 Syncing (for Tl)-detecting sync loss.. .................... 1-171, 1-173 duplicate settings for.. ............................ l-142 loss counter ............................................ 1- 178 loss relay ................................................ 1-182 network re-sync timer ............................ 1-145 sync source l..........................................1-141 sync source 2.......................................... 1-143 sync source 3.......................................... 1-144 trunk port class ......................................... 2-25 typical settings ....................................... 1-141 System Configuration (Tl) ...................... I- 135 System Installation Area Code.. ................ l-23 T Tl-alarms, assigning to PP keys...................... 5-6 failure mode ........................................... 1-162 flash key operation ................................. 1-165 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Index-9 Index frame format........................................... I-160 frame loss counter .................................. 1-174 frame loss relay ...................................... l-183 incoming dialing method.. ...................... l- 192 incoming signaling type ......................... l- 189 line codinob .............................................. 1-161 minimum programming for.................... l- 136 number of channels used.. ...................... 1-159 outgoing signaling type .......................... 1- 188 relay reset ............................................... 1-185 remote loopback ..................................... l- 163 robbed bit setting.. .................................. 1-191 slip counter ............................................. 1- 175 system configuration .............................. 1-135 trunk circuit types ..................................... 2-18 trunk closure.. ......................................... l-200 trunk configuration.. ............................... 1-158 tnmk mode.. ............................................ l-190 trunk port class ......................................... 2-25 trunk signaling emulation ....................... l- 186 Talkbackassigning to FF key ................................... .5-7 Terminal Programming--see Remote Programming Terminal Type-copying restriction.. ................................... .9-4 setting for extensions.. ................................ 3-5 Time Priority Route Tables ...................... .8-10 Time Setting-for Day mode automatic start................. 1-123 for DBS system clock.. ................. ;............. l-4 for DISA end on trunks.. ......................... .2-17 for DISA start on trunks.. ........................ .2-16 for Night 2 mode automatic start............ 1-125 for Night mode automatic start.. ............... 1-91 Timers-answer supervision for Tl ...................... l- 152 Attendant call reversion ......................... l- 10 1 automatic pause ...................................... l-103 call forward no-answer.. ......................... l-l 11 CO flash.. ................................................ I-104 CO ring cycle detection .......................... l-107 delayed ring, CO calls.. .......................... l-l 18 delayed ring. DSS/BLF.. ........................ l-120 dial pause ................................................ l-109 DID digit timeout.. .................................. .2-23 DID interdigit timeout .............................. 2-24 inbound detection, ground-start.. ............ l-l 13 inbound expansion, ring cycle.. .............. l- 108 no-answer, hunt groups .......................... 1-122 Section 400-Programming outbound detection, ground-start........... l- 112 PBX flash...............................................l-110 recall. Attendant hunt group .................... 1-97 recall, Attendant park hold.. ..................... 1-99 recall, Attendant-held CO calls.. .............. l-93 recall, Attendant-held intercom calls.. ... l-l 14 recall, Attendant-transferred CO calls.. ... 1-95 recall, Attendant-transferred intercom calls ......................................................l-l 16 recall. extension transfers to hunt groups l-98 recall, extension-held CO calls.. .............. l-94 recall, extension-held intercom calls ..... l- 115 recall, extension-parked calls.. ............... l- 100 recall, extension-transferred CO calls ...... i-96 recall, extension-transferred intercom calls ......................................................1-117 SLT onhook flash...................................l- 106 SMDR display start.. .................................. 1-6 T 1 disconnect .........................................1-146 Tl guard.................................................1-147 Tl immediate glare................................ 1-153 Tl incoming detection.. ......................... 1-151 Tl outpulse delay.. .................................1-149 Tl release acknowledge.. ....................... 1-148 Tl wink glare.........................................1-154 Tl wink timeout .....................................l-150 transfer, hunt group.. ................................ 4-16 trunk disconnect detection ....................... 2- 15 unsupervised conference.. ...................... 1 - 102 wink-start for trunks.. ............................... 2-22 Transferassigning to FF key.. .................................. 5-7 onhook .....................................................1-12 recall timer, Attendant-transferred CO CalIS ........................................................l-95 recall timer, Attendant-transferred intercom calls ......................................................l- 116 recall timer, extension-transferred CO calls .................................. ...................... l-96 recall timer, extension-transferred intercom calls ......................................................l -l 17 ring pattern, analog (CPC-A)................... l-27 ring pattern, analog (CPC-AII/Et) ............ l-38 TRS (Toll Restriction Service)-1+ required............................................... l-23 3-digit dialing, restricting .......................... 7-8 ‘I-digit dialing, restricting ................ .7-9, 7-20 account codes and.................... l-70. l-72. 3-9 area codes. restricting .................... .7- 16, 7-23 index-l 0 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400 Section 400-Programming Index area/offtce codes, restricting ..........7- 18,7- 19, 7-25.7-26 country codes, allowing............................ 7-13 dialed digits, restricting number of ........... .7-7 dialing plan switch ................................... 7-10 DTMF signaling, restricting.. .................... .7-6 equal access code format......................... .7-14 international calls, restricting on extensions ...............................................7-12 international calls, restricting on trunks.....7-5 office codes, restricting.........7-15,7-17,7-24 operator calls, restricting .......................... 7-11 overriding with SSD numbers.. .................. 1-8 overview .....................................................7-2 PBX, using with .......................................1-63 private trunk lines, using with................... .2-9 trunk port types and .................................... 2-7 types, assigning (Day)............................. .7-21 types, assigning (Night 2)........................ .7-22 types, assigning (Night). .......................... .7-22 types, characteristics of (table).................. .7-2 Trunk Closure for Tl ............................... l-200 Trunk Groups-including in SSD numbers.. ...................... 10-4 LCR, building ........................................... 8-12 pooled group “9” access ............................ .2-5 pooled groups “81-86” access ................... .2-6 selection, assigning to PP key ................... .5-7 Trunks-assigning TRS types to (Day).................. .7-2 1 assigning TRS types to (Night 2)............ .7-22 assigning TRS types to (Night) ............... .7-22 busy-out ......................................................2-3 circuit type for .......................................... 2-18 closure (Tl) ............................................l-200 copying attributes of.................. . ................ 9-3 DISA end time for .................................... 2-17 DISA start time......................................... 2-16 disconnect detection timer.. ..................... .2- 15 DTMWpulse dialing ................................... 2-4 FF key assignment restriction ................... .5-9 inbound ring pattern ................................ .2- 14 name assignments....................................... 6-8 numbering range ......................................... 2-l pooled trunk access, group “9”.................. .2-5 pooled trunk access, groups “8 l-86” ..........2-6 port class...................................................2-25 port operation ............................................. 2-3 port type.. ....................................................2-7 private, assigning to extensions.. ............... .2-9 DBS-70-400 queuing, assigning to FF key.. ................... 5-7 selection. assigning to PI? key.. .................. 5-7 Tl circuit types ........................................ 2-18 Tl configuration .................................... l- 158 Tl mode .................................................l-190 Tl signal emulation ...............................l- 186 unsupervised conference, allowing.. ........ 2- 13 TSAPI .................................................1-51, l-52 U UNA (Universal Night Answer)-delayed ring assignments (Day). .............. 4-20 delayed ring assignments (Night 2).........4-29 delayed ring assignments (Night) ............ 4-22 pickup, assigning to F’F key ....................... 5-7 ring assignments (Day) .............................. 4-3 ring assignments (Night 2)....................... 4-27 ring assignments (Night). ........................... 4-5 ring patterns for M/C/B terminals............ 1-66 Unsupervised Conference-allowing on extensions.. ........................... 3- 17 allowing on trunks ................................... 2-13 timer for ................................................. l-102 Upgrading CPC-B Software................... Intro-5 V VAU (Voice Announce Unit)-Attendant intercom calling with .............. l- 19 call waiting/OHVA, disabling for............ 3-12 extension intercom calling with............... l-20 hunting priority ........................................ 3-54 non-appearing trunk hold, setting for...... 1-14 offhook signaling, disabling for............... 3- 11 onhook transfer, enabling for.. ................. 1- 12 port assignment.. ...................................... 3-56 prime line pickup, enabling for.. .............. 3- 16 terminal type ..............................................3-6 Voice Calling-assigning to FP key .................................... 5-7 Voice Mail-access, assigning to FF key.. ...................... 5-7 AJX slot................................................... l-25 auto-redial restriction ............................... 3-58 busy tone .................................................. l-26 DID/DNIS answer codes ......................... l-46 DID/DNIS digits to .................................. l-44 hunt group pilot number ............................ 4-7 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Index-l 1 Section 400-Programming index password assignment to FF key ................ .5-5 permanent call forwarding to ...................3-5 1 terminal hunt group type ........................ ..4-11 terminal type.. ........... _-. ............................... 3-5 transfer, assigning to FF key ..................... .5-7 using 3-digit extension numbers with ...... 1-17 W Wink-and DID/DNIS calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-187 start signaling for DID trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 start timer for trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*.......... 2-22 Tl glare timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-154 Tl signaling for incoming calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189 Tl signaling for outgoing calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-188 Tl timeout timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-150 X: X ON/X OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-61 Y Yellow Alarms (Tl)-counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179 detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167 recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-169 relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-180 send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164 Index-l 2 DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS-70-400
* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
advertisement
© 2021